Contents
1 Introduction
- 1.1 Notational conventions
2 Before you start
3 Important information
4 Basic hardware procedures
5 Basic software procedures
- 5.1 Starting the maintenance task
- 5.2 Completing the maintenance task
6 Power supply unit (PSU)
7 Hard disk drives (HDD) / solid state drives (SSD)
8 Fans
- 8.1 Basic information
  - 8.1.1 Standard system fan module
  - 8.1.2 Redundant system fan module
- 8.2 Replacing the system fan
9 Expansion cards and backup units
10 Main memory
11 Processor (CPU)
12 Accessible drives
13 Front panel
- 13.1 Replacing the front panel
14 System board and components
15 Converting a floorstand model to a rack model
16 Cabling
- 16.1 Replacing the intrusion switch cable
17 Appendix A
18 Appendix B

Fujitsu TX1330 M4 User Manual

Displayed below is the user manual for TX1330 M4 by Fujitsu which is a product in the Servers category. This manual has pages.

Related Manuals

Fujitsu TX1330 M4 Manual

Upgrade and Maintenance Manual - English

FUJITSU Server PRIMERGY TX1330 M4

Upgrade and Maintenance Manual

November 2018

Comments…Suggestions…Corrections…

The User Documentation Department would like to

know your opinion of this manual. Your feedback helps

us optimize our documentation to suit your individual

needs.

Feel free to send us your comments by e-mail to

manuals@ts.fujitsu.com.

Documentation creation according

to DIN EN ISO 9001:2015

To ensure a consistently high quality standard and

user-friendliness, this documentation was created to

meet the regulations of a quality management system

which complies with the requirements of the standard

DIN EN ISO 9001:2015.

cognitas. Gesellschaft für Technik-Dokumentation mbH

www.cognitas.de

Delivery subject to availability; right of technical modifications reserved.

All hardware and software names used are trademarks of their respective manufacturers.

– The contents of this manual may be revised without prior notice.

– Fujitsu assumes no liability for damages to third party copyrights or other

rights arising from the use of any information in this manual.

– No part of this manual may be reproduced in any form without the prior written

permission of Fujitsu.

Microsoft, Windows, Windows Server, and Hyper-V are trademarks or registered trademarks of

Microsoft Corporation in the USA and other countries.

Intel and Xeon are trademarks or registered trademarks of Intel Corporation or its subsidiaries

in the USA and other countries.

TX1330 M4 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual

Before reading this manual

For your safety

This manual contains important information for safely and correctly using this

product.

Carefully read the manual before using this product. Pay particular attention to

the accompanying manual "Safety Notes and Regulations" and ensure that

these safety notes are understood before using the product. Keep this manual

and the "Safety Notes and Regulations" manual in a safe place for easy

reference while using this product.

Radio interference

This product is a "Class A" ITE (Information Technology Equipment). In a

domestic environment this product may cause radio interference, in which case

the user may be required to take appropriate measures. VCCI-A

Aluminum electrolytic capacitors

The aluminum electrolytic capacitors used in the printed circuit board

assemblies of the product and in the mouse and keyboard are limited-life

components. Use of these components beyond their operating life may result in

electrolyte leakage or depletion, potentially causing emission of foul odor or

smoke.

As a guideline, in a normal office environment (25°C) operating life is not

expected to be reached within the maintenance support period (5 years).

However, operating life may be reached more quickly if, for example, the

product is used in a hot environment. The customer shall bear the cost of

replacing replaceable components which have exceeded their operating life.

Note that these are only guidelines, and do not constitute a guarantee of

trouble-free operation during the maintenance support period.

High safety use

This product has been designed and manufactured to be used in commercial

and/or industrial areas as a server.

When used as visual display workplace, it must not be placed in the direct field

of view to avoid incommoding reflections (applies only to TX server systems).

Upgrade and Maintenance Manual TX1330 M4

The device has not been designed or manufactured for uses which demand an

extremely high level of safety and carry a direct and serious risk of life or body

if such safety cannot be assured.

These uses include control of nuclear reactions in nuclear power plants,

automatic airplane flight control, air traffic control, traffic control in mass

transport systems, medical devices for life support, and missile guidance

control in weapons systems (hereafter, "high safety use"). Customers should

not use this product for high safety use unless measures are in place for

ensuring the level of safety demanded of such use. Please consult the sales

staff of Fujitsu if intending to use this product for high safety use.

Measures against momentary voltage drop

This product may be affected by a momentary voltage drop in the power supply

caused by lightning. To prevent a momentary voltage drop, the use of an

uninterruptible power supply is recommended.

(This notice follows the guidelines of Voltage Dip Immunity of Personal

Computer issued by JEITA, the Japan Electronics and Information Technology

Industries Association.)

Technology controlled by the Foreign Exchange and Foreign Trade

Control Law of Japan

Documents produced by Fujitsu may contain technology controlled by the

Foreign Exchange and Foreign Trade Control Law of Japan. Documents which

contain such technology should not be exported from Japan or transferred to

non-residents of Japan without first obtaining authorization in accordance with

the above law.

Harmonic Current Standards

This product conforms to harmonic current standard JIS C 61000-3-2.

TX1330 M4 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual

Only for Japan:

About SATA HDDs

The SATA version of this server supports HDDs with SATA/BC-SATA storage

interfaces. Please note that the usage and operation conditions differ

depending on the type of HDD used.

For more information on the usage and operation conditions of each available

type of HDD, see the following internet address:

http://jp.fujitsu.com/platform/server/primergy/harddisk/

Only for Japan:

Shielded LAN cables should be used in this product.

Upgrade and Maintenance Manual TX1330 M4

Version history

Issue number Reason for update

1.0 / November 2018 Initial release

TX1330 M4 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual

Contents

1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25

1.1 Notational conventions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26

2 Before you start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27

2.1 Classification of procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29

2.1.1 Customer Replaceable Units (CRU) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29

2.1.2 Upgrade and Repair Units (URU) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30

2.1.3 Field Replaceable Units (FRU) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31

2.2 Average task duration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32

2.3 Tools you need at hand . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33

2.4 Documents you need at hand . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33

3 Important information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37

3.1 Safety instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37

3.2 ENERGY STAR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45

3.3 CE conformity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46

3.4 FCC Class A Compliance Statement . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47

3.5 Environmental protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48

4 Basic hardware procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51

4.1 Using diagnostics information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51

4.1.1 Locating the defective server . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51

4.1.2 Determining the error class . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52

4.1.3 Locating the defective component . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52

4.2 Shutting down the server . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53

4.3 Disconnecting the power cord . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54

4.3.1 Standard power supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54

4.3.2 Redundant power supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54

Upgrade and Maintenance Manual TX1330 M4

Contents

4.4 Getting access to the component . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55

4.4.1 Rack model . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55

4.4.1.1 Extending the server out of the rack . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55

4.4.1.2 Removing the server from the rack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57

4.4.1.3 Removing the top cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59

4.4.1.4 Removing the rack front cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60

4.4.2 Floorstand model . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62

4.4.2.1 Unlocking the server . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62

4.4.2.2 Removing the side cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63

4.4.2.3 Removing the bay covers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64

4.4.2.4 Removing the front cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65

4.5 Reassembling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67

4.5.1 Rack model . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67

4.5.1.1 Installing the rack front cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67

4.5.1.2 Installing the top cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69

4.5.1.3 Installing the server in the rack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70

4.5.1.4 Sliding the server into the rack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72

4.5.2 Floorstand model . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73

4.5.2.1 Installing the front cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73

4.5.2.2 Installing the bay covers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74

4.5.2.3 Installing the side cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76

4.5.2.4 Locking the server . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77

4.6 Connecting the power cord . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78

4.7 Switching on the server . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80

4.8 Handling the system fan module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81

4.8.1 Removing the system fan module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81

4.8.2 Installing the system fan module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83

4.9 Handling accessible drive bays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86

4.9.1 Opening the accessible drive locking bar . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86

4.9.1.1 Floorstand model . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86

4.9.1.2 Rack model . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87

4.9.2 Closing the accessible drive locking bar . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88

4.9.2.1 Floorstand model . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88

4.9.2.2 Rack model . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89

4.9.3 Accessible drive filler covers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90

4.9.3.1 Removing accessible drive filler covers . . . . . . . . . . . . 90

4.9.3.2 Installing accessible drive filler covers . . . . . . . . . . . . 91

4.9.4 Accessible drive covers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92

4.9.4.1 Removing accessible drive covers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92

4.9.4.2 Installing accessible drive covers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93

TX1330 M4 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual

Contents

4.10 Handling the anti-tilt bracket . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94

4.10.1 Installing the anti-tilt bracket . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94

4.10.2 Removing the anti-tilt bracket . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95

5 Basic software procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97

5.1 Starting the maintenance task . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97

5.1.1 Suspending BitLocker functionality . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97

5.1.2 Disabling the boot watchdog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98

5.1.3 Removing backup and optical disk media . . . . . . . . . . . . 99

5.1.4 Verifying and configuring the backup software solution . . . . . 100

5.1.5 Switching on the ID indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100

5.2 Completing the maintenance task . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102

5.2.1 Updating or recovering the BIOS and the iRMC S5 . . . . . . . 102

5.2.1.1 Updating or recovering the BIOS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102

5.2.1.2 Updating the iRMC firmware . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102

5.2.2 Verifying system information backup/restore . . . . . . . . . . 103

5.2.3 Updating expansion card firmware . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104

5.2.4 Enabling Option ROM scan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105

5.2.5 Reconfiguring the backup software solution . . . . . . . . . . . 106

5.2.6 Resetting the boot retry counter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106

5.2.6.1 Viewing the boot retry counter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107

5.2.6.2 Resetting the boot retry counter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107

5.2.7 Resetting the error status after replacing memory modules

or CPUs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108

5.2.7.1 Memory modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108

5.2.7.2 CPUs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110

5.2.8 Enabling the boot watchdog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111

5.2.9 Enabling replaced components in the BIOS . . . . . . . . . . . 112

5.2.10 Verifying the memory mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113

5.2.11 Verifying the system time settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113

5.2.12 Viewing and clearing the System Event Log (SEL) . . . . . . . 114

5.2.12.1 Viewing the SEL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114

5.2.12.2 Clearing the SEL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115

5.2.13 Updating the NIC configuration file in a Linux and VMware

environment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116

5.2.14 Resuming BitLocker functionality . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117

5.2.15 Performing a RAID array rebuild . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117

5.2.16 Looking for MAC/WWN/GUID and SAS addresses . . . . . . . 118

5.2.16.1 Looking for the MAC address of a LAN controller . . . . . . 118

5.2.16.2 Looking for the WWN address of a fibre channel controller . 119

Upgrade and Maintenance Manual TX1330 M4

Contents

5.2.16.3 Looking for the GUID address of an infiniband or

Omni-Path controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120

5.2.16.4 Looking for SAS addresses of SAS controllers for

external devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120

5.2.17 Using the Chassis ID Prom Tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121

5.2.18 Configuring LAN teaming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122

5.2.18.1 After replacing/upgrading LAN controllers . . . . . . . . . 122

5.2.18.2 After replacing a system board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122

5.2.19 Switching off the ID indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123

5.2.20 Specifying the chassis model . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123

5.2.21 Performing a fan test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124

6 Power supply unit (PSU) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127

6.1 Basic information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128

6.2 Standard power supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129

6.2.1 Replacing the standard PSU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129

6.2.1.1 Preliminary steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129

6.2.1.2 Removing the defective standard PSU . . . . . . . . . . . 130

6.2.1.3 Installing the new standard PSU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133

6.2.1.4 Concluding steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135

6.3 Redundant power supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136

6.3.1 Installing a hot-plug PSU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136

6.3.1.1 Preliminary steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136

6.3.1.2 Removing the dummy cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137

6.3.1.3 Installing a hot-plug PSU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137

6.3.1.4 Concluding steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139

6.3.2 Removing a hot-plug PSU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139

6.3.2.1 Preliminary steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141

6.3.2.2 Removing a hot-plug PSU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141

6.3.2.3 Installing a dummy cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142

6.3.2.4 Concluding steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142

6.3.3 Replacing hot-plug PSUs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143

6.3.3.1 Preliminary steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144

6.3.3.2 Removing the defective hot-plug PSU . . . . . . . . . . . 144

6.3.3.3 Installing the new hot-plug PSU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144

6.3.3.4 Concluding steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144

6.3.4 Replacing the power distribution board . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145

6.3.4.1 Preliminary steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145

6.3.4.2 Removing the defective power distribution board . . . . . . 145

TX1330 M4 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual

Contents

6.3.4.3 Installing the new power distribution board . . . . . . . . . 147

6.3.4.4 Concluding steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148

6.4 Fujitsu battery unit (FJBU) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149

6.4.1 Installing the FJBU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149

6.4.1.1 Preliminary steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149

6.4.1.2 Removing the dummy cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149

6.4.1.3 Installing an FJBU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150

6.4.1.4 Concluding steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150

6.4.2 Removing the FJBU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151

6.4.2.1 Preliminary steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151

6.4.2.2 Removing an FJBU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152

6.4.2.3 Installing a dummy cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152

6.4.3 Replacing the FJBU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153

6.4.3.1 Preliminary steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153

6.4.3.2 Removing the defective FJBU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153

6.4.3.3 Installing the new FJBU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153

6.4.3.4 Concluding steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154

6.5 Converting a standard power supply to a redundant power

supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155

6.5.1 Preliminary steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155

6.5.2 Removing the standard PSU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156

6.5.3 Installing the upgrade kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156

6.5.4 Concluding steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159

7 Hard disk drives (HDD) / solid state drives (SSD) . . . . . . 161

7.1 Basic information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162

7.2 Handling HDDs or SSDs without installation frame . . . . . 164

7.2.1 2.5-inch HDD/SSD and 2.5-inch installation frame . . . . . . . 164

7.2.2 2.5-inch HDD/SSD and 3.5-inch installation frame . . . . . . . 166

7.2.3 3.5-inch HDD and 3.5-inch installation frame . . . . . . . . . . 168

7.3 3.5-inch HDD configurations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170

7.3.1 Equipping the 3.5-inch HDD bays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170

7.3.2 Backplane overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170

7.3.3 Configuration with up to four HDD modules . . . . . . . . . . . 171

7.3.4 Configuration with up to eight HDD modules . . . . . . . . . . 172

7.3.5 Configuration with up to 12 HDD modules . . . . . . . . . . . . 173

7.3.6 Configuration with additional PCIe SSDs . . . . . . . . . . . . 174

Upgrade and Maintenance Manual TX1330 M4

Contents

7.3.7 Installing 3.5-inch HDD modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176

7.3.7.1 Preliminary steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176

7.3.7.2 Removing a 3.5-inch HDD dummy module . . . . . . . . . 176

7.3.7.3 Installing a 3.5-inch HDD module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177

7.3.7.4 Concluding steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178

7.3.8 Removing 3.5-inch HDD modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178

7.3.8.1 Preliminary steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178

7.3.8.2 Removing a 3.5-inch HDD module . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179

7.3.8.3 Installing a 3.5-inch HDD dummy module . . . . . . . . . . 179

7.3.8.4 Concluding steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180

7.3.9 Replacing a 3.5-inch HDD module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181

7.3.9.1 Preliminary steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182

7.3.9.2 Removing a 3.5-inch HDD module . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182

7.3.9.3 Installing a 3.5-inch HDD module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182

7.3.9.4 Concluding steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182

7.3.10 Replacing a 3.5-inch backplane . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183

7.3.10.1 Preliminary steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183

7.3.10.2 Removing the 3.5-inch HDD bay top cover . . . . . . . . . 183

7.3.10.3 Removing a 3.5-inch HDD SAS backplane . . . . . . . . . 187

7.3.10.4 Installing a 3.5-inch HDD SAS backplane . . . . . . . . . . 188

7.3.10.5 Installing the 3.5-inch HDD bay top cover . . . . . . . . . . 190

7.3.10.6 Connecting cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192

7.3.10.7 Concluding steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192

7.3.11 Upgrading configuration from up to four to up to eight

3.5-inch HDDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193

7.3.11.1 Preliminary steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193

7.3.11.2 Removing the 3.5-inch HDD bay top cover . . . . . . . . . 193

7.3.11.3 Removing the 4x 3.5-inch HDD front panel . . . . . . . . . 194

7.3.11.4 Installing the second 3.5-inch HDD SAS backplane . . . . 195

7.3.11.5 Installing the 8x 3.5-inch HDD front panel . . . . . . . . . . 196

7.3.11.6 Installing the 3.5-inch HDD bay top cover . . . . . . . . . . 196

7.3.11.7 Connecting cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197

7.3.11.8 Concluding steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198

7.4 2.5-inch HDD/SSD configurations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199

7.4.1 Backplane overviews . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199

7.4.2 Configuration with up to eight HDDs/SSDs . . . . . . . . . . . 200

7.4.3 Configuration with up to 16 HDDs/SSDs . . . . . . . . . . . . 201

7.4.4 Configuration with up to 24 HDDs/SSDs . . . . . . . . . . . . 202

7.4.5 Configuration with additional PCIe SSDs . . . . . . . . . . . . 203

7.4.6 Installing 2.5-inch HDD/SSD modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205

7.4.6.1 Preliminary steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205

TX1330 M4 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual

Contents

7.4.6.2 Removing a 2.5-inch HDD/SSD dummy module . . . . . . . 205

7.4.6.3 Installing a 2.5-inch HDD/SSD module . . . . . . . . . . . . 206

7.4.6.4 Concluding steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207

7.4.7 Removing 2.5-inch HDD/SSD modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207

7.4.7.1 Preliminary steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207

7.4.7.2 Removing a 2.5-inch HDD/SSD module . . . . . . . . . . . 208

7.4.7.3 Installing a 2.5-inch HDD/SSD dummy module . . . . . . . 209

7.4.7.4 Concluding steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209

7.4.8 Replacing a 2.5-inch HDD/SSD module . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210

7.4.8.1 Preliminary steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211

7.4.8.2 Removing the defective 2.5-inch HDD/SSD module . . . . . 211

7.4.8.3 Installing the new 2.5-inch HDD/SSD module . . . . . . . . 211

7.4.8.4 Concluding steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211

7.4.9 Replacing a 2.5-inch backplane . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212

7.4.9.1 Preliminary steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212

7.4.9.2 Removing the 2.5-inch HDD/SSD bay top cover . . . . . . . 212

7.4.9.3 Removing a 2.5-inch HDD/SSD SAS backplane . . . . . . . 216

7.4.9.4 Installing a 2.5-inch HDD/SSD SAS backplane . . . . . . . 218

7.4.9.5 Installing the 2.5-inch HDD/SSD bay top cover . . . . . . . 219

7.4.9.6 Connecting cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222

7.4.9.7 Concluding steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223

7.4.10 Upgrading configuration from up to eight to up to 16 2.5-inch

HDDs/SSDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223

7.4.10.1 Preliminary steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223

7.4.10.2 Removing the 8x 2.5-inch HDD/SSD front panel . . . . . . . 224

7.4.10.3 Removing the 2.5-inch HDD/SSD bay top cover . . . . . . . 224

7.4.10.4 Installing the second 2.5-inch HDD/SSD SAS backplane . . 224

7.4.10.5 Installing the 2.5-inch HDD/SSD bay top cover . . . . . . . 225

7.4.10.6 Installing the 16x 2.5-inch HDD/SSD front panel . . . . . . . 225

7.4.10.7 Connecting cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226

7.4.10.8 Installing the expander board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226

7.4.10.9 Concluding steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227

7.5 HDD extension boxes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228

7.5.1 HDD extension boxes overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228

7.5.1.1 8x 2.5-inch HDD/SSD extension box . . . . . . . . . . . . 228

7.5.1.2 4x 3.5-inch HDD extension box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228

7.5.2 Installing the 8x 2.5-inch HDD/SSD extension box . . . . . . . 229

7.5.2.1 Preliminary steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229

7.5.2.2 Removing accessible drive dummy covers . . . . . . . . . 229

7.5.2.3 Installing the HDD/SSD or PCIe SSD backplane . . . . . . 229

7.5.2.4 Installing the 8x 2.5-inch HDD/SSD extension box . . . . . 230

Upgrade and Maintenance Manual TX1330 M4

Contents

7.5.2.5 Connecting cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232

7.5.2.6 Installing HDDs/SSDs modules into the 8x 2.5-inch

HDD/SSD extension box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234

7.5.2.7 Concluding steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234

7.5.3 Removing the 8x 2.5-inch HDD/SSD extension box . . . . . . 234

7.5.3.1 Preliminary steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234

7.5.3.2 Removing the 8x 2.5-inch HDD/SSD extension box . . . . 235

7.5.3.3 Installing accessible drive dummy covers . . . . . . . . . . 236

7.5.3.4 Concluding steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 236

7.5.4 Replacing the HDD/SSD backplane or PCIe SSD backplane

on the 8x 2.5-inch HDD/SSD extension box . . . . . . . . . . 236

7.5.4.1 Preliminary steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 236

7.5.4.2 Removing the defective HDD/SSD backplane . . . . . . . 237

7.5.4.3 Installing the new HDD/SSD backplane . . . . . . . . . . . 239

7.5.4.4 Concluding steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240

7.5.5 Installing the 4x 3.5-inch HDD extension box . . . . . . . . . . 241

7.5.5.1 Preliminary steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 241

7.5.5.2 Removing accessible drive dummy covers . . . . . . . . . 241

7.5.5.3 Installing the ultraslim ODD into the HDD extension box . . 241

7.5.5.4 Installing the HDD backplane . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 241

7.5.5.5 Installing the 4x 3.5-inch HDD extension box . . . . . . . . 242

7.5.5.6 Connecting cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244

7.5.5.7 Installing HDD modules into the 4x 3.5-inch HDD

extension box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245

7.5.5.8 Concluding steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245

7.5.6 Removing the 4x 3.5-inch HDD extension box . . . . . . . . . 245

7.5.6.1 Preliminary steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245

7.5.6.2 Removing the 4x 3.5-inch HDD extension box . . . . . . . 246

7.5.6.3 Installing accessible drive dummy covers . . . . . . . . . . 247

7.5.6.4 Concluding steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247

7.5.7 Replacing the HDD backplane on the 4x 3.5-inch HDD

extension box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247

7.5.7.1 Preliminary steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247

7.5.7.2 Removing the defective HDD backplane . . . . . . . . . . 248

7.5.7.3 Installing the new HDD backplane . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249

7.5.7.4 Concluding steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250

7.6 SAS expander board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251

7.6.1 Installing the SAS expander board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251

7.6.1.1 Preliminary steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251

7.6.1.2 Installing the SAS expander board . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251

7.6.1.3 Connecting cables to the SAS expander board . . . . . . . 252

TX1330 M4 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual

Contents

7.6.1.4 Installing the SAS expander holder . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254

7.6.1.5 Concluding steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255

7.6.2 Removing the SAS expander board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255

7.6.2.1 Preliminary steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255

7.6.2.2 Removing the SAS expander holder . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256

7.6.2.3 Removing the SAS expander board . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257

7.6.2.4 Concluding steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257

7.6.3 Replacing the SAS expander board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258

7.6.3.1 Preliminary steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258

7.6.3.2 Removing the defective SAS expander board . . . . . . . . 258

7.6.3.3 Installing the new SAS expander board . . . . . . . . . . . 258

7.6.3.4 Concluding steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258

8 Fans . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 259

8.1 Basic information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 259

8.1.1 Standard system fan module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260

8.1.2 Redundant system fan module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261

8.2 Replacing the system fan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262

8.2.1 Preliminary steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262

8.2.2 Removing a system fan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262

8.2.2.1 Removing the fan cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262

8.2.2.2 Removing the defective system fan . . . . . . . . . . . . . 264

8.2.3 Installing a system fan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 266

8.2.3.1 Installing the new system fan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 266

8.2.3.2 Running the fan cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 266

8.2.4 Concluding steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267

9 Expansion cards and backup units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269

9.1 Basic information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270

9.2 Handling slot brackets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 271

9.2.1 Installing a slot bracket . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 271

9.2.2 Removing a slot bracket . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 272

9.3 Handling SFP+ transceiver modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273

9.3.1 Installing the SFP+ transceiver modules . . . . . . . . . . . . 273

9.3.2 Removing an SFP+ transceiver module . . . . . . . . . . . . . 276

9.4 Expansion cards and riser card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279

9.4.1 Installing expansion cards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279

Upgrade and Maintenance Manual TX1330 M4

Contents

9.4.1.1 Preliminary steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279

9.4.1.2 Removing a PCI slot cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 280

9.4.1.3 Installing an expansion card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 281

9.4.1.4 Concluding steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 284

9.4.2 Removing expansion cards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 285

9.4.2.1 Preliminary steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 285

9.4.2.2 Removing an expansion card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 286

9.4.2.3 Installing the slot cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287

9.4.2.4 Concluding steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287

9.4.3 Replacing expansion cards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 288

9.4.3.1 Preliminary steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 288

9.4.3.2 Removing an expansion card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 288

9.4.3.3 Installing the new expansion card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 289

9.4.3.4 Concluding steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 289

9.4.4 Replacing the riser card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 290

9.4.4.1 Preliminary steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 290

9.4.4.2 Removing the defective riser card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 290

9.4.4.3 Installing the new riser card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 291

9.4.4.4 Concluding steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 292

9.4.5 Replacing a TFM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 293

9.4.5.1 Preliminary steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 293

9.4.5.2 Removing the defective TFM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 293

9.4.5.3 Installing the new TFM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 295

9.4.5.4 Concluding steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 297

9.5 Flash Backup Unit (FBU) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 298

9.5.1 Installing an FBU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 299

9.5.1.1 Preliminary steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 299

9.5.1.2 Preparing the FBU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300

9.5.1.3 Installing the FBU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 302

9.5.1.4 Concluding steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 303

9.5.2 Removing an FBU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 304

9.5.2.1 Preliminary steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 304

9.5.2.2 Removing the FBU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 305

9.5.2.3 Removing the FBU from the FBU holder . . . . . . . . . . 307

9.5.2.4 Concluding steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307

9.5.3 Replacing an FBU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 308

9.5.3.1 Preliminary steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 308

9.5.3.2 Removing the defective FBU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 308

9.5.3.3 Installing a new FBU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 309

9.5.3.4 Concluding steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 309

TX1330 M4 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual

Contents

10 Main memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 311

10.1 Basic information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 312

10.1.1 Memory sequence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 312

10.1.1.1 Population rules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 312

10.1.1.2 Modes of operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 313

10.2 Installing memory modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 314

10.2.1 Preliminary steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 314

10.2.2 Selecting the memory slot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 314

10.2.3 Installing a memory module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 314

10.2.4 Concluding steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 315

10.3 Removing memory modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 315

10.3.1 Preliminary steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 315

10.3.2 Removing a memory module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 316

10.3.3 Concluding steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 316

10.4 Replacing the memory modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 317

10.4.1 Preliminary steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 317

10.4.2 Removing the defective memory module . . . . . . . . . . . . 317

10.4.3 Installing the new memory module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 317

10.4.4 Concluding steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 318

11 Processor (CPU) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 319

11.1 Basic information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 320

11.2 Upgrading or replacing the CPU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 320

11.2.1 Preliminary steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 320

11.2.2 Removing the heat sink . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 321

11.2.3 Removing the CPU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 322

11.2.4 Installing the CPU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 324

11.2.5 Applying thermal paste . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 328

11.2.6 Installing the CPU heat sink . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 330

11.2.7 Concluding steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 331

11.3 Replacing the heat sink . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 332

11.3.1 Preliminary steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 332

11.3.2 Removing the defective heat sink . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 332

11.3.3 Installing the new heat sink . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 332

11.3.4 Concluding steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 333

Upgrade and Maintenance Manual TX1330 M4

Contents

11.4 Handling the protective cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 333

11.4.1 Installing the protective cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 333

11.4.2 Removing the protective cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 336

12 Accessible drives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 339

12.1 Basic information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 340

12.2 Installing accessible drives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 342

12.2.1 Preliminary steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 342

12.2.2 Removing accessible drive dummy covers . . . . . . . . . . . 342

12.2.3 Installing mounting brackets to RDX backup drives . . . . . . 342

12.2.4 Installing an accessible drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 344

12.2.5 Connecting cables to a accessible drive . . . . . . . . . . . . 346

12.2.6 Concluding steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 347

12.3 Removing accessible drives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 347

12.3.1 Preliminary steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 347

12.3.2 Removing an accessible drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 348

12.3.3 Installing accessible drive dummy covers . . . . . . . . . . . 348

12.3.4 Concluding steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 349

12.4 Replacing accessible drives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 349

12.4.1 Preliminary steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 349

12.4.2 Removing the defective accessible drive . . . . . . . . . . . . 349

12.4.3 Installing the new accessible drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 350

12.4.4 Concluding steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 350

12.5 Slimline ODD in Multibay box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 351

12.5.1 Installing the slimline ODD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 351

12.5.1.1 Preliminary steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 351

12.5.1.2 Removing the ODD dummy module . . . . . . . . . . . . 351

12.5.1.3 Installing the slimline ODD into the Multibay box . . . . . . 352

12.5.1.4 Removing accessible drive dummy covers . . . . . . . . . 353

12.5.1.5 Installing the Multibay box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 353

12.5.1.6 Concluding steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 355

12.5.2 Removing a slimline ODD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 355

12.5.2.1 Preliminary steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 355

12.5.2.2 Removing the Multibay box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 356

12.5.2.3 Removing the slimline ODD from the Multibay box . . . . . 357

12.5.2.4 Installing a ODD dummy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 358

12.5.2.5 Installing the Multibay box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 358

12.5.2.6 Concluding steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 358

TX1330 M4 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual

Contents

12.5.3 Replacing a slimline ODD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 359

12.5.3.1 Preliminary steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 359

12.5.3.2 Removing the defective slimline ODD . . . . . . . . . . . . 359

12.5.3.3 Installing the new slimline ODD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 359

12.5.3.4 Concluding steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 359

12.6 Ultraslim ODD in 4x 3.5-inch HDD extension box . . . . . . 360

12.6.1 Installing the ultraslim ODD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 360

12.6.1.1 Preliminary steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 360

12.6.1.2 Installing the ultraslim ODD into the HDD extension box . . 361

12.6.1.3 Installing the 4x 3.5-inch HDD extension box . . . . . . . . 363

12.6.1.4 Concluding steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 364

12.6.2 Removing the ultraslim ODD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 364

12.6.2.1 Preliminary steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 364

12.6.2.2 Removing the 4x 3.5-inch HDD extension box . . . . . . . . 364

12.6.2.3 Removing the ultraslim ODD from the extension box . . . . 365

12.6.2.4 Installing the 4x 3.5-inch HDD extension box . . . . . . . . 366

12.6.2.5 Concluding steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 366

12.6.3 Replacing the ultraslim ODD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 366

12.6.3.1 Preliminary steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 366

12.6.3.2 Removing the defective ultraslim ODD . . . . . . . . . . . 367

12.6.3.3 Installing the new ultraslim ODD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 367

12.6.3.4 Concluding steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 367

12.7 Ultraslim ODD in ultraslim ODD adapter . . . . . . . . . . . 368

12.7.1 Installing the ultraslim ODD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 368

12.7.1.1 Preliminary steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 368

12.7.1.2 Installing the ultraslim ODD into the ultraslim

ODD adapter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 369

12.7.1.3 Installing the ultraslim ODD adapter . . . . . . . . . . . . . 370

12.7.1.4 Concluding steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 370

12.7.2 Removing the ultraslim ODD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 371

12.7.2.1 Preliminary steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 371

12.7.2.2 Removing the ultraslim ODD adapter . . . . . . . . . . . . 371

12.7.2.3 Removing the ultraslim ODD from the ultraslim

ODD adapter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 372

12.7.2.4 Installing the ultraslim ODD adapter . . . . . . . . . . . . . 372

12.7.2.5 Concluding steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 372

12.7.3 Replacing the ultraslim ODD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 373

12.7.3.1 Preliminary steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 373

12.7.3.2 Removing the defective ultraslim ODD . . . . . . . . . . . 373

12.7.3.3 Installing the new ultraslim ODD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 373

12.7.3.4 Concluding steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 374

Upgrade and Maintenance Manual TX1330 M4

Contents

13 Front panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 375

13.1 Replacing the front panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 376

13.1.1 Preliminary steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 376

13.1.2 Removing the defective front panel module . . . . . . . . . . 377

13.1.3 Removing cables from the front panel module . . . . . . . . . 379

13.1.4 Connecting cables to the front panel module . . . . . . . . . . 379

13.1.5 Installing the front panel module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 380

13.1.6 Concluding steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 381

14 System board and components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 383

14.1 Basic information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 384

14.2 CMOS battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 385

14.2.1 Replacing the CMOS battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 385

14.2.1.1 Preliminary steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 385

14.2.1.2 Replacing the defective CMOS battery . . . . . . . . . . . 386

14.2.1.3 Concluding steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 386

14.3 Trusted Platform Module (TPM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 388

14.3.1 Installing the TPM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 388

14.3.1.1 Preliminary steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 388

14.3.1.2 Installing the TPM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 389

14.3.1.3 Concluding steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 390

14.3.2 Removing the TPM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 391

14.3.2.1 Preliminary steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 391

14.3.2.2 Removing the TPM board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 393

14.3.2.3 Concluding steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 394

14.3.3 Replacing the TPM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 395

14.3.3.1 Preliminary steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 395

14.3.3.2 Removing the defective TPM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 396

14.3.3.3 Installing the new TPM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 396

14.3.3.4 Concluding steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 396

14.4 iRMC microSD card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 397

14.4.1 Installing the iRMC microSD card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 397

14.4.1.1 Preliminary steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 397

14.4.1.2 Installing the iRMC microSD card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 397

14.4.1.3 Concluding steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 398

TX1330 M4 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual

Contents

14.4.2 Removing the iRMC microSD card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 399

14.4.2.1 Preliminary steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 399

14.4.2.2 Removing the iRMC microSD card . . . . . . . . . . . . . 399

14.4.2.3 Concluding steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 400

14.4.3 Replacing the iRMC microSD card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 400

14.4.3.1 Preliminary steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 400

14.4.3.2 Replacing the iRMC microSD card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 400

14.4.3.3 Concluding steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 401

14.5 M.2 SSD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 402

14.5.1 Installing an M.2 SSD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 402

14.5.1.1 Preliminary steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 402

14.5.1.2 Installing the M.2 SSD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 403

14.5.1.3 Concluding steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 405

14.5.1.4 Software configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 405

14.5.2 Removing the M.2 SSD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 406

14.5.2.1 Preliminary steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 406

14.5.2.2 Removing the M.2 SSD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 407

14.5.2.3 Concluding steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 407

14.5.3 Replacing the M.2 SSD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 408

14.5.3.1 Preliminary steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 408

14.5.3.2 Replacing the M.2 SSD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 408

14.5.3.3 Concluding steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 409

14.5.3.4 Software configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 409

14.6 Dual microSD 64GB Enterprise . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 410

14.6.1 Installing the Dual microSD 64GB Enterprise . . . . . . . . . . 410

14.6.1.1 Preliminary steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 410

14.6.1.2 Installing the Dual microSD 64GB Enterprise . . . . . . . . 411

14.6.1.3 Concluding steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 412

14.6.2 Removing the Dual microSD 64GB Enterprise . . . . . . . . . 412

14.6.2.1 Preliminary steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 412

14.6.2.2 Removing the Dual microSD 64GB Enterprise . . . . . . . 413

14.6.2.3 Concluding steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 413

14.6.3 Replacing the Dual microSD 64GB Enterprise . . . . . . . . . 414

14.6.3.1 Preliminary steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 414

14.6.3.2 Replacing the Dual microSD 64GB Enterprise . . . . . . . . 414

14.6.3.3 Concluding steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 415

14.6.4 Replacing the microSD card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 415

14.6.4.1 Preliminary steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 415

14.6.4.2 Replacing the microSD card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 416

14.6.4.3 Concluding steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 416

Upgrade and Maintenance Manual TX1330 M4

Contents

14.7 System board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 417

14.7.1 Replacing the system board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 417

14.7.1.1 Preliminary steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 419

14.7.1.2 Removing the defective system board . . . . . . . . . . . 420

14.7.1.3 Installing the new system board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 422

14.7.1.4 Concluding steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 423

15 Converting a floorstand model to a rack model . . . . . . . 427

15.1 Preliminary steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 427

15.2 Converting a floorstand model to a rack model . . . . . . . 428

15.3 Concluding steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 440

16 Cabling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 441

16.1 Replacing the intrusion switch cable . . . . . . . . . . . . 441

16.1.1 Preliminary steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 441

16.1.2 Removing the intrusion switch cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 441

16.1.3 Installing the intrusion switch cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 445

16.1.4 Concluding steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 448

17 Appendix A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 449

17.1 Mechanical overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 449

17.1.1 Server front . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 449

17.1.2 Server rear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 452

17.1.3 Server interior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 453

17.2 Connectors and indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 455

17.2.1 Connectors and indicators on the system board . . . . . . . . 455

17.2.1.1 Onboard connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 455

17.2.1.2 Onboard indicators and controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 457

17.2.2 Server front . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 459

17.2.2.1 Indicators on the front panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 459

17.2.2.2 Indicator on the ODD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 462

17.2.2.3 Indicators on the hot-plug HDD/SSD module . . . . . . . . 463

17.2.3 Server rear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 464

17.2.3.1 Connectors on the I/O panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 464

17.2.3.2 Indicators on the I/O panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 465

TX1330 M4 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual

Contents

17.2.3.3 Indicator on hot-plug PSU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 469

17.2.3.4 Indicator on FJBU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 470

17.2.4 Acoustic indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 471

17.3 Onboard settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 473

17.4 Minimum startup configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 474

18 Appendix B . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 477

Upgrade and Maintenance Manual TX1330 M4

Contents

TX1330 M4 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual 25

1 Introduction

This Upgrade and Maintenance Manual provides instructions for the following

procedures:

●Upgrading the server configuration by adding optional hardware

components

●Upgrading the server configuration by replacing existing hardware

components with superior ones.

●Replacing defective hardware components

This manual focuses on on-site maintenance tasks. It is recommended to

prepare each service assignment following remote diagnostics procedures, as

described in the "ServerView Suite Local Service Concept (LSC)" manual (see

section "Documents you need at hand" on page 33.

VCAUTION!

The document at hand comprises procedures of a wide range of

complexity. Check the profile of qualification for technicians before

assigning tasks. Before you start, carefully read "Classification of

procedures" on page 29.

26 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual TX1330 M4

Introduction

1.1 Notational conventions

The following notational conventions are used in this manual:

Text in bold Indicates references to names of interface elements.

Text in

monospace

Indicates commands and text to be entered by the user.

"Quotation marks" Indicate names of chapters and terms that are being

emphasized.

ÊDescribes activities that must be performed in the order

shown.

[Abc] Indicates keys on the keyboard.

VCAUTION! Pay particular attention to texts marked with this symbol!

Failure to observe this warning may endanger your life,

destroy the system or lead to the loss of data.

IIndicates additional information, notes and tips.

Indicates the procedure category in terms of complexity

and qualification requirements, see section

"Classification of procedures" on page 29.

Indicates the average task duration, see section

"Average task duration" on page 32.

TX1330 M4 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual 27

2 Before you start

Before you start any upgrade or maintenance task, proceed as follows:

ÊCarefully read the safety instructions in chapter "Important information" on

page 37.

ÊMake sure that all necessary manuals are available, see the documentation

overview in section "Documents you need at hand" on page 33. Print the

PDF files if required.

ÊMake yourself familiar with the procedure categories introduced in section

"Classification of procedures" on page 29.

ÊEnsure that all required tools are available according to section "Tools you

need at hand" on page 33.

Advanced Thermal Design (ATD)

The ATD option allows you to operate the system with a wider temperature

range either of 5 °C to 40 °C or 5 °C to 45 °C, depending on your system and

configuration.

VCAUTION

In a system that is configured with ATD, only certain components which

support the respectively increased higher operating temperature range

may be installed and used. For applicable restrictions, see the official

configurator tool.

Installing optional components

The operating manual of your server gives an introduction to server features

and provides an overview of available hardware options.

Use the Fujitsu ServerView Suite management software and the iRMC web

interface to prepare hardware expansions. ServerView Suite documentation is

available online at http://manuals.ts.fujitsu.com.

For Japan:

http://www.fujitsu.com/jp/products/computing/servers/primergy/manual/

This option can only be ordered from the

manufacturer and is indicated by the respective

logo on the identification rating plate.

28 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual TX1330 M4

Before you start

Please see the following ServerView Suite topics:

– Operation

– Virtualization

– Maintenance

– Out-Of-Band Management

IFor the latest information on hardware options, see the hardware

configurator of your server, available online at the following address:

http://ts.fujitsu.com/products/standard_servers/index.htm

For Japan:

http://www.fujitsu.com/jp/products/computing/servers/primergy/

Please contact your local Fujitsu customer service partner for details on how to

order expansion kits or spare parts.

Replacing a defective component

The Global Error indicator on the front of the server reports defective hardware

components that need to be replaced. For more information on the controls and

indicators of your server, see the operating manual of your server and section

"Connectors and indicators on the system board" on page 455.

If the system has been powered off in order to replace a non-hot plug unit, a

system of PRIMERGY diagnostic indicators guides you to the defective

component. The "Indicate CSS" button enables the indicator next to the

defective component even if the server has been switched off and disconnected

from the mains. For more information, see section "Using diagnostics

information" on page 51 and section "Indicators on the front panel" on

page 459.

If the defective component is a customer replaceable unit included in the CSS

concept (Customer Self Service), the CSS indicator on the server front will light

up.

It is recommended to prepare local maintenance tasks using remote diagnostics

procedures, see the "ServerView Suite Local Service Concept (LSC)" manual.

TX1330 M4 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual 29

Before you start

2.1 Classification of procedures

The complexity of maintenance procedures varies significantly. Procedures

have been assigned to one of three unit categories, indicating the level of

difficulty and required qualification.

At the beginning of each procedure, the involved unit type is indicated by one of

the symbols introduced in this section.

IPlease ask your local Fujitsu service center for more information.

2.1.1 Customer Replaceable Units (CRU)

Customer Replaceable Units are intended for customer self service and may be

installed or replaced as hot-plug components during operation.

IComponents that the customer is entitled to replace may differ according

to the service form in his country.

For Japan:

http://www.fujitsu.com/jp/products/computing/servers/primergy/support/r

epair.html

Hot-plug components increase system availability and guarantee a high degree

of data integrity and fail-safe performance. Procedures can be carried out

without shutting down the server or going offline.

Components that are handled as Customer Replaceable Units

– Hot-plug PSUs

– Hot-plug fan modules

– Hot-plug HDD/SSD modules

Peripherals that are handled as Customer Replaceable Units

– Keyboard

– Mouse

Customer Replaceable Units (CRU)

30 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual TX1330 M4

Before you start

2.1.2 Upgrade and Repair Units (URU)

Upgrade and Repair Units are non hot-plug components that can be ordered

separately to be installed as options (Upgrade Units) or are available to the

customer through customer self service (Repair Units).

IFor Japan, customer is only allowed to upgrade. For upgrade units as

customer replaceable, see:

http://www.fujitsu.com/jp/products/computing/servers/primergy/

IServer management error messages and diagnostic indicators on the

front panel and system board will report defective Upgrade and Repair

Units as customer replaceable CSS components.

Upgrade and repair procedures involve shutting down and opening the server.

VCAUTION!

The device may be seriously damaged or cause damage if it is opened

without authorization or if repairs are attempted by unauthorized and

untrained personnel.

Components that are handled as Upgrade Units

– Accessible Drives

– Expansion cards

– Flash backup units (FBU)

– Memory modules

– iRMC microSD card

– M.2 SSDs

– Dual microSD 64GB Enterprise

Components that are handled solely as Repair Units

– CMOS battery

– Non hot-plug fans

– Non hot-plug HDDs

Upgrade and Repair Units (URU)

TX1330 M4 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual 31

Before you start

2.1.3 Field Replaceable Units (FRU)

Removing and installing Field Replaceable Units involves complex

maintenance procedures on integral server components. Procedures will

require shutting down, opening and disassembling the server.

VCAUTION!

Maintenance procedures involving Field Replaceable Units must be

performed exclusively by Fujitsu service personnel or technicians trained

by Fujitsu. Please note that unauthorized interference with the system

will void the warranty and exempt the manufacturer from all liability.

Components that are handled as Field Replaceable Units

– CPU (replacement)

– SAS/SATA backplanes

– Power distribution board

– Front panel module

– System board

– Standard PSU

– Trusted Platform Module (TPM)

IPlease ask your local Fujitsu service center for more information.

Field Replaceable Units (FRU)

32 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual TX1330 M4

Before you start

2.2 Average task duration

The average task duration including preliminary and concluding steps is

indicated at the beginning of each procedure next to the procedure class.

Refer to the following table for an overview of steps taken into account for

calculating the average task duration:

Hardware: 10 minutes

Step included Explanation

Server shutdown no

Shutdown time depends on hardware and

software configuration and may vary

significantly.

For software tasks necessary before

maintenance, see section "Starting the

maintenance task" on page 97.

Rack removal,

disassembly yes Making the server available, removing the

server from the rack (if applicable)

Transport no

Transporting the server to the service table

(where required) depends on local

customer conditions.

Maintenance

procedures yes Maintenance procedures including

preliminary and concluding software tasks

Transport no

Returning the server to its installation site

(where required) depends on local

customer conditions.

Assembly,

rack installation yes Reassembling the server, installing the

server in the rack (if applicable)

Starting up no

Booting time depends on hardware and

software configuration and may vary

significantly.

Table 1: Calculation of the average task duration

TX1330 M4 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual 33

Before you start

2.3 Tools you need at hand

When preparing the maintenance task, ensure that all required tools are

available according to the overview below. You will find a list of required tools

at the beginning of each procedure.

2.4 Documents you need at hand

Maintenance procedures may include references to additional documentation.

When preparing the maintenance task, ensure that all required manuals are

available according to the overview below.

I– Ensure to store all printed manuals enclosed with your server in a

save place for future reference.

– Unless stated otherwise, all manuals are available online at:

http://manuals.ts.fujitsu.com under x86 Servers.

For Japan:

http://www.fujitsu.com/jp/products/computing/servers/primergy/man

ual/

Document Description

"Safety Notes and Regulations"

manual

"安全上のご注意 " for Japan

Important safety information, available

online, or as a printed copy

"FUJITSU Server PRIMERGY

TX1330 M4 Operating Manual"

Information how to install, set up and

operate your server, available online

"FUJITSU Server PRIMERGY

TX1330 M4 Upgrade and

Maintenance Manual"

Instructions for upgrading the server

configuration or replacing defective

hardware, available online

"D3673 BIOS Setup Utility for

FUJITSU Server PRIMERGY

TX1330 M4 Reference Manual"

Information on configurable BIOS options

and parameters, available online

System foil Label inside the top cover outlining

connectors, indicators and jumper

Table 2: Documentation overview

34 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual TX1330 M4

Before you start

ID card Various system information, such as the

product name, serial number, order

number, MAC addresses and DNS name

(for Japan, only the product name and the

serial number)

The location of the ID card can be found in

the overview of the server.

Software documentation – "ServerView Suite Local Service

Concept (LSC)" user guide

– "ServerView Operations Manager -

Server Management" user guide

– "iRMC S5 - Concepts and Interfaces“

user guide

– "iRMC S5 - Configuration and

Maintenance" user guide

– "iRMC S5 - Web Interface" user guide

– "ServerView embedded Lifecycle

Management (eLCM)" user guide

Glossary Contains abbreviations and explanations,

available online

"Warranty" manual

"保証書 " for Japan

Important information on warranty

regulations, recycling and service,

available online, or as a printed copy

"Returning used devices"

manual

Recycling and contact information,

available online at

http://ts.fujitsu.com/recycling, or as a

printed copy

Not applicable in Japan and other countries

that have different regulations for recycling

"Service Desk" leaflet

"サポート＆サービス " for Japan

Additional documentation RAID documentation, available online at

http://manuals.ts.fujitsu.com under x86

Servers - Expansion Cards - Storage

Adapters

For Japan:

http://www.fujitsu.com/jp/products/computi

ng/servers/primergy/manual/

Document Description

Table 2: Documentation overview

TX1330 M4 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual 35

Before you start

Third party documentation – Operating system documentation,

online help

– Peripherals documentation

Document Description

Table 2: Documentation overview

36 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual TX1330 M4

Before you start

TX1330 M4 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual 37

3 Important information

IDepending on your server or the installed options some information is not

valid for your server.

VCAUTION!

Before installing and starting up a server, please observe the safety

instructions listed in the following section. This will help you to avoid

making serious errors that could impair your health, damage the server

and endanger the data base.

3.1 Safety instructions

IThe following safety instructions are also provided in the manual "Safety

Notes and Regulations" or " 安全上のご注意 ".

This server meets the relevant safety regulations for IT equipment. If you have

any questions about whether you can install the server in the intended

environment, please contact your sales outlet or our customer service team.

●The actions described in this manual shall be performed by technical

specialists. A technical specialist is a person who is trained to install the

server including hardware and software.

●Repairs to the server that do not relate to CSS failures shall be performed

by service personnel. Please note that unauthorized interference with the

server will void the warranty and exempt the manufacturer from all liability.

●Any failure to observe the guidelines in this manual, and any improper

repairs could expose the user to risks (electric shock, energy hazards, fire

hazards) or damage the equipment.

●Only valid for non hot-plug components

Before installing/removing internal components to/from the server, turn off

the server, all peripheral devices, and any other connected devices. Also

unplug all power cords from the power outlet. Failure to do so can cause

electric shock or damage.

38 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual TX1330 M4

Important information

Before starting up

●During installation and before operating the server, observe the instructions

on environmental conditions for your server.

●If the server is brought in from a cold environment, condensation may form

both inside and on the outside of the server.

Wait until the server has acclimatized to room temperature and is absolutely

dry before starting it up. Material damage may be caused to the server if this

requirement is not observed.

●Only transport the server in its original packaging or in packaging that

protects it from impacts and jolts.

In Japan and APAC, transporting the server in its original packaging does

not apply.

Installation and operation

●This server should not be operated in ambient temperatures above 35 °C.

For servers with Advanced Thermal Design the ambient temperature can

increase to 40 °C or 45 °C.

●If the server is integrated into an installation that draws power from an

industrial power supply network with an IEC309 connector, the power

supply's fuse protection must comply with the requirements for non-

industrial power supply networks for type A connectors.

●The server automatically adjusts itself to a mains voltage, see the type label

of your server. Ensure that the local mains voltage lies within these limits.

●This server must only be connected to properly grounded power outlets or

connected to the grounded rack internal power distribution server with

tested and approved power cords.

●Ensure that the server is connected to a properly grounded power outlet

close to the server.

●Ensure that the power sockets on the server and the properly grounded

power outlets are easily accessible.

●The On/Off button or the main power switch (if present) does not isolate the

server from the mains power supply. In case of repair or servicing disconnect

the server completely from the mains power supply, unplug all power plugs

from the properly grounded power outlets.

TX1330 M4 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual 39

Important information

●Always connect the server and the attached peripheral devices to the same

power circuit. Otherwise you run the risk of losing data if, for example, the

server is still running but a peripheral device (e.g. memory subsystem) fails

during a power outage.

●The adequately shielded data cables must be used.

All data and signal cables must have sufficient shielding. The use of cable

type S/FTP Cat5 or higher is recommended.

Use of unshielded or badly shielded cables may lead to increased emission

of interference and/or reduced fault-tolerance of the device.

●Ethernet cabling has to comply with EN 50173 and EN 50174-1/2 standards

or ISO/IEC 11801 standard respectively. The minimum requirement is a

Category 5 shielded cable for 10/100 Ethernet, or a Category 5e cable for

Gigabit Ethernet.

●Route the cables in such a way that they do not create a potential hazard

(ensure that no-one can trip over them) and that they cannot be damaged.

When connecting the server, see the relevant instructions in this manual.

●Never connect or disconnect data transmission lines during a storm (risk of

lightning hazard).

●Ensure that no objects (e.g. jewelry, paperclips etc.) or liquids can get inside

the server (risk of electric shock, short circuit).

●In emergencies (e.g. damaged casing, controls or cables, penetration of

liquids or foreign bodies), contact the server administrator or your customer

service team. Only disconnect the server from the mains power supply if

there is no risk of harming yourself.

●Proper operation of the server (in accordance with IEC 60950-1 resp.

EN 60950-1) is only ensured if the server is completely assembled and the

rear covers for the installation slots have been fitted (electric shock, cooling,

fire protection, interference suppression).

●Only install server expansions that satisfy the requirements and rules

governing safety and electromagnetic compatibility and those relating to

telecommunication terminals. If you install other expansions, they may

damage the server or violate the safety regulations. Information on which

server expansions are approved for installation can be obtained from our

customer service center or your sales outlet.

●The components marked with a warning notice (e.g. lightning symbol) may

only be opened, removed or exchanged by authorized, qualified personnel.

Exception: CSS components can be replaced.

40 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual TX1330 M4

Important information

●The warranty is void if the server is damaged during installation or

replacement of server expansions.

●Only set screen resolutions and refresh rates that are specified in the

operating manual for the monitor. Otherwise, you may damage your monitor.

If you are in any doubt, contact your sales outlet or customer service center.

●Only valid for non hot-plug components

Before installing/removing internal components to/from the server, turn off

the server, all peripheral devices, and any other connected devices. Also

unplug all power cords from the power outlet. Failure to do so can cause

electric shock or damage.

Internal devices remain hot after shutdown. Wait for a while after shutdown

before installing or removing internal options.

●Do not damage or modify internal cables or internal devices. Doing so may

cause a server failure, fire, or electric shock and will void the warranty and

exempt the manufacturer from all liability.

●The circuit boards and soldered parts of internal options are exposed and

can be damaged by static electricity. To ensure reliable protection, you must

wear an earthing band on your wrist when working with this type of module

and connect it to an unpainted, conducting metal part of the server.

●Do not touch the circuitry on boards or soldered parts. Hold the metallic

areas or the edges of the circuit boards.

●Install the screw removed during installation/detaching internal options in

former position. To use a screw of the different kind can cause a breakdown

of equipment.

●The procedure of installation on this notes might change depending on a

configuration of option.

Batteries

●Incorrect replacement of batteries may lead to a risk of explosion. The

batteries may only be replaced with identical batteries or with a type

recommended by the manufacturer.

●Do not throw batteries into the trash can.

Batteries must be disposed of in accordance with local regulations

concerning special waste.

●Ensure that you insert the battery the right way round.

TX1330 M4 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual 41

Important information

●The battery used in this server may present a fire or chemical burn hazard if

mistreated. Do not disassemble, heat about 100 °C (212F), or incinerate the

battery.

●Replace the lithium battery on the system board in accordance with the

instructions in the corresponding Upgrade and Maintenance Manual,

chapter "System board and components" > "CMOS battery".

●All batteries containing pollutants are marked with a symbol (a crossed-out

garbage can). In addition, the marking is provided with the chemical symbol

of the heavy metal decisive for the classification as a pollutant:

Cd Cadmium

Hg Mercury

Pb Lead

Working with optical disk drives (ODDs) and media

When working with ODDs, these instructions must be followed.

VCAUTION!

●Only use CDs/DVDs/BDs that are in perfect condition, in order to

prevent data loss, equipment damage and injury.

●Check each CD/DVD/BD for damage, cracks, breakages etc. before

inserting it in the drive.

Note that any additional labels applied may change the mechanical

properties of a CD/DVD/BD and cause imbalance and vibrations.

Damaged and imbalanced CDs/DVDs/BDs can break at high drive

speeds (data loss).

Under certain circumstances, sharp CD/DVD/BD fragments can

pierce the cover of the ODD (equipment damage) and can fly out of

the drive (danger of injury, particularly to uncovered body parts such

as the face or neck).

●High humidity and airborne dust levels are to be avoided. Electric

shocks and/or server failures may be caused by liquids such as

water, or metallic items, such as paper clips, entering a drive.

●Shocks and vibrations are also to be avoided.

●Do not insert any objects other than the specified CDs/DVDs/BDs.

42 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual TX1330 M4

Important information

●Do not pull on, press hard, or otherwise handle the CD/DVD/BD tray

roughly.

●Do not disassemble the ODD.

●Before use, clean the ODD tray using a soft, dry cloth.

●As a precaution, remove disks from the ODD when the drive is not to

be used for a long time. Keep the ODD tray closed to prevent foreign

matter, such as dust, from entering the ODD.

●Hold CDs/DVDs/BDs by their edges to avoid contact with the disk

surface.

●Do not contaminate the CD/DVD/BD surface with fingerprints, oil,

dust, etc. If dirty, clean with a soft, dry cloth, wiping from the center to

the edge. Do not use benzene, thinners, water, record sprays,

antistatic agents, or silicone-impregnated cloth.

●Be careful not to damage the CD/DVD/BD surface.

●Keep the CDs/DVDs/BDs away from heat sources.

●Do not bend or place heavy objects on CDs/DVDs/BDs.

●Do not write with ballpoint pen or pencil on the label (printed) side.

●Do not attach stickers or similar to the label side. Doing so may cause

rotational eccentricity and abnormal vibrations.

●When a CD/DVD/BD is moved from a cold place to a warm place,

moisture condensation on the CD/DVD/BD surface can cause data

read errors. In this case, wipe the CD/DVD/BD with a soft, dry cloth

then let it air dry. Do not dry the CD/DVD/BD using devices such as a

hair dryer.

●To avoid dust, damage, and deformation, keep the CD/DVD/BD in its

case whenever it is not in use.

●Do not store CDs/DVDs/BDs at high temperatures. Areas exposed to

prolonged direct sunlight or near heating appliances are to be

avoided.

IYou can prevent damage from the ODD and the CDs/DVDs/BDs, as well

as premature wear of the disks, by observing the following suggestions:

– Only insert disks in the drive when needed and remove them after

use.

– Store the disks in suitable sleeves.

TX1330 M4 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual 43

Important information

– Protect the disks from exposure to heat and direct sunlight.

Laser information

The ODD complies with IEC 60825-1 laser class 1.

VCAUTION!

The ODD contains a light-emitting diode (LED), which under certain

circumstances produces a laser beam stronger than laser class 1.

Looking directly at this beam is dangerous.

Never remove parts of the ODD casing!

Modules with Electrostatic-Sensitive Devices (ESD modules)

ESD modules are identified by the following sticker:

Figure 1: ESD label

IThe ESD label can be different.

When you handle ESD modules, you must always observe the following points:

●Switch off the server and remove the power plugs from the power outlets

before installing or removing ESD modules.

●The circuit boards and soldered parts of internal options are exposed and

can be damaged by static electricity. To ensure reliable protection, you must

wear an earthing band on your wrist when working with ESD modules and

connect it to an unpainted, conducting metal part of the server.

●Any devices or tools that are used must be free of electrostatic charge.

●Wear a suitable grounding cable that connects you to the external chassis

of the server.

●Always hold ESD modules at the edges or at the points marked green (touch

points).

44 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual TX1330 M4

Important information

●Do not touch any connectors or conduction paths on an ESD module.

●Place all the components on a pad which is free of electrostatic charge.

IFor a detailed description of how to handle ESD modules, see the

relevant European or international standards (EN 61340-5-1,

ANSI/ESD S20.20).

Transporting the server

VCAUTION!

Only transport the server in its original packaging or in packaging that

protects it from impacts and jolts.

In Japan and APAC, transporting the server in its original packaging does

not apply.

Do not unpack the server until it is at its installation location.

If you need to lift or transport the server, ask other people to help you.

Never lift or carry the server by the handles or the Quick Release Levers

(QRLs) on the front panel.

Notes on installing the server in the rack

VCAUTION!

●For safety reasons, at least 2 people are required to install the server

in the rack because of its weight and size.

(For Japan, see " 安全上のご注意 ".)

●Never lift the server into the rack using the QRLs on the front panel.

●When connecting and disconnecting cables, observe the relevant

instructions in the "Important Information" chapter of the technical

manual for the corresponding rack. The technical manual is supplied

with the corresponding rack.

●When installing the rack, ensure that the anti-tilt mechanism is

correctly fitted.

●Do not extend more than one server out of the rack simultaneously

even if the tilt protection is in place. If several servers are

simultaneously extended from the rack, there is a risk that the rack

could tip over. See the safety information of the rack and the warning

label.

TX1330 M4 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual 45

Important information

●If the server/rack is intended for permanent connection to the mains

only an authorized specialist (electrician) is allowed to work.

Please follow the regulation of each country.

●If the server is integrated into an installation that draws power from an

industrial power supply network with an IEC309 type connector, the

power supply's fuse protection must comply with the requirements for

non-industrial power supply networks for the type A connector.

Other important information

●During cleaning, observe the instructions in the corresponding Operating

Manual chapter "Starting up and operation" > "Cleaning the server".

●Keep all manuals close to the server. All documentation must be included if

the equipment is passed on to a third party.

3.2 ENERGY STAR

Products that have been certified compliant with ENERGY STAR

and labelled are in full compliance with the specification at

shipping. Note that energy consumption can be affected by

software that is installed or any changes that are made to the

hardware configuration or BIOS or energy options subsequently.

In such cases, the properties guaranteed by ENERGY STAR can

no longer be assured.

The "ServerView Operations Manager" user guide contains

instructions for reading out measurement values, including those

relating to current energy consumption and air temperatures.

Either the Performance Monitor or the Task Manager can be

used to read out CPU utilization levels.

46 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual TX1330 M4

Important information

3.3 CE conformity

The system complies with the requirements of European

Regulations. Find the CE declaration on certificate portal:

https://sp.ts.fujitsu.com/sites/certificates/default.aspx

To open the CE declaration applicable for your system, proceed

as follows:

ÊSelect Industry Standard Servers.

ÊSelect your model, e.g. Rack server.

ÊSelect your system, e.g. PRIMERGY RX2530 M1.

ÊSelect CE Cert <your system>.

VCAUTION!

This is a Class A product. In a domestic environment this

product may cause RF interference, in which case the

user may be required to take adequate measures.

TX1330 M4 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual 47

Important information

3.4 FCC Class A Compliance Statement

If there is an FCC statement on the device, it applies to the products covered in

this manual, unless otherwise specified herein. The statement for other

products will appear in the accompanying documentation.

NOTE:

This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a

"Class A" digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC rules and meets all

requirements of the Canadian Interference-Causing Equipment Standard

ICES-003 for digital apparatus. These limits are designed to provide reasonable

protection against harmful interference in a residential installation. This

equipment generates, uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not

installed and used in strict accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful

interference to radio communications. However, there is no warranty that

interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does

cause harmful interference to radio or television reception, which can be

determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try

to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures:

●Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.

●Increase the separation between equipment and the receiver.

●Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which

the receiver is connected.

●Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help.

Fujitsu is not responsible for any radio or television interference caused by

unauthorized modifications of this equipment or the substitution or attachment

of connecting cables and equipment other than those specified by Fujitsu. The

correction of interferences caused by such unauthorized modification,

substitution or attachment will be the responsibility of the user.

The use of shielded I/O cables is required when connecting this equipment to

any and all optional peripheral or host devices. Failure to do so may violate FCC

and ICES rules.

48 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual TX1330 M4

Important information

3.5 Environmental protection

Environmentally-friendly product design and development

This product has been designed in accordance with the Fujitsu standard for

"environmentally friendly product design and development". This means that

key factors such as durability, selection and labeling of materials, emissions,

packaging, ease of dismantling and recycling have been taken into account.

This saves resources and thus reduces the harm done to the environment.

More information can be found at:

http://ts.fujitsu.com/products/standard_servers/index.html

For Japan:

http://jp.fujitsu.com/platform/server/primergy/concept/

Energy-saving information

Devices that do not need to be constantly switched on should be switched off

until they are needed as well as during long breaks and after completion of work.

Packaging information

This packaging information does not apply in Japan and APAC.

Do not throw away the packaging. You may need it later for transporting the

server. If possible, the equipment should only be transported in its original

packaging.

Information on handling consumables

Please dispose of printer consumables and batteries in accordance with the

applicable national regulations.

In accordance with EU directives, batteries must not be disposed of with

unsorted domestic waste. They can be returned free of charge to the

manufacturer, dealer or an authorized agent for recycling or disposal.

All batteries containing pollutants are marked with a symbol (a crossed-out

garbage can). They are also marked with the chemical symbol for the heavy

metal that causes them to be categorized as containing pollutants:

Cd Cadmium

Hg Mercury

Pb Lead

TX1330 M4 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual 49

Important information

Labels on plastic casing parts

Please avoid sticking your own labels on plastic parts wherever possible, since

this makes it difficult to recycle them.

Returns, recycling and disposal

Please handle returns, recycling and disposal in accordance with local

regulations.

Details regarding the return and recycling of devices and consumables within

Europe can also be found in the "Returning used devices" manual, via your local

Fujitsu branch, or at:

http://ts.fujitsu.com/recycling

The device must not be disposed of with domestic waste. This

device is labeled in compliance with European directive

2012/19/EU on waste electrical and electronic equipment (WEEE).

This directive sets the framework for returning and recycling used

equipment and is valid across the EU. When returning your used

device, please use the return and collection systems available to

you.

More information can be found at:

http://ts.fujitsu.com/recycling

50 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual TX1330 M4

Important information

TX1330 M4 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual 51

4 Basic hardware procedures

4.1 Using diagnostics information

Use the Fujitsu ServerView Suite management software to plan the upgrade or

replacement of hardware components:

ÊIn the ServerView Operations Manager Single System View select

Maintenance from the Information/Operation menu.

It is recommended to prepare local maintenance tasks using remote diagnostics

procedures, see the "ServerView Suite Local Service Concept (LSC)" manual.

IIn Japan remote diagnostics procedures are not used.

Please contact your local Fujitsu customer service partner for details on the

service concept and on how to order expansion kits or spare parts.

4.1.1 Locating the defective server

For easy identification of the server, switch on the ID indicator, especially when

working in a datacenter environment or a server room.

ÊPress the ID button on the front panel, use the iRMC web interface or the

ServerView Operations Manager user interface to switch on the system

identification LEDs.

IFor more information, see the "ServerView Suite Local Service

Concept (LSC)" manual and the iRMC user guides.

ÊWhen using ServerView Operations Manager to toggle the ID indicator,

choose Single System View and press the Locate button.

ÊRemember to switch off the ID indicator after the maintenance task has been

concluded successfully.

52 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual TX1330 M4

Basic hardware procedures

4.1.2 Determining the error class

The Local Service Concept (LSC) allows you to identify defective server

components. Failure events are assigned to one of two error classes:

– Global Error (for non CSS components) events that need to be resolved by

maintenance personnel

– Customer Self Service (for CSS components) error events that may be

resolved by operating personnel

The Global Error indicator and the CSS indicator can be found on the front side

and the rear side of the server.

IIn same cases the indicator on the rear is designed as a combined

indicator (Global Error, ID and CSS indicator).

IThe indicators also light up in standby mode and after a server restart

due to a power failure.

ÊCheck the Global Error indicator and the CSS indicator.

4.1.3 Locating the defective component

After determining the error class by the CSS indicator or the Global Error

indicator (see section "Determining the error class" on page 52), indicators on

the components and onboard indicators on the system board allow you to

identify the defective component.

IFor more information, see the "ServerView Suite Local Service Concept

(LSC)" manual.

Possibilities to get more information about the defective component

●Checking the ServerView System Monitor, available on Windows or Linux

based servers with ServerView agents installed.

IFor more information, see the "ServerView System Monitor" user

guide.

●Checking the System Event Log (SEL), see section "Viewing and clearing

the System Event Log (SEL)" on page 114.

●Checking the indicators on the components, see section "Connectors and

indicators" on page 455.

TX1330 M4 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual 53

Basic hardware procedures

●Checking the onboard indicators on the system board using the Indicate

CSS button, see section "Using the CSS button on the system board" on

page 53.

Using the CSS button on the system board

If the system has been powered off, the onboard indicators guides you to the

faulty component.

VCAUTION

It is mandatory to disconnect all power cords from the system in order to

use the Indicate CSS functionality.

ÊShut down and power off the server.

ÊDisconnect all power cords from the system.

ÊPress the Indicate CSS button to highlight defective components, see

section "Using the CSS button on the system board" on page 53.

The indicator next to the defective component lights up.

4.2 Shutting down the server

VCAUTION!

For more information, see chapter "Important information" on page 37.

IThis step is only required when upgrading or replacing non-hot plug

components.

ÊInform the system administrator that the server will be shut down and put

offline.

ÊTerminate all applications.

ÊPerform the required procedures described in the preliminary steps of each

upgrade or maintenance task.

ÊShut down the server.

IIf the system is running an ACPI-compliant operating system,

pressing the On/Off button will perform a graceful shutdown.

ÊSwitch on the ID indicator on the front panel and I/O panel of the server, see

section "Locating the defective server" on page 51.

54 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual TX1330 M4

Basic hardware procedures

4.3 Disconnecting the power cord

4.3.1 Standard power supply

Figure 2: Unlocking the cable tie of a standard PSU

ÊPull out the locking lever on the cable tie (1) and loosen the loop (2).

ÊDisconnect the power cord from the PSU and remove it from the cable tie.

4.3.2 Redundant power supply

Figure 3: Unlocking the cable clamp of a PSU

ÊPress the cable clamp down until it disengages (1).

ÊOpen the cable clamp (2).

ÊDisconnect the power cord from the PSU and remove it from the cable

clamp.

TX1330 M4 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual 55

Basic hardware procedures

4.4 Getting access to the component

VCAUTION!

●Before removing or installing covers, turn off the server and all

peripheral devices. Also unplug all power cables from the outlet.

Failure to do so can cause electric shock.

●In order to comply with applicable EMC regulations (regulations on

electromagnetic compatibility) and satisfy cooling requirements, the

server must not run while the server cover is removed.

●For more information, see chapter "Important information" on

page 37.

●Only valid for the floorstand model: Do not lift the server by the

front cover in order not to damage the locking clips.

4.4.1 Rack model

4.4.1.1 Extending the server out of the rack

VCAUTION!

●Use the anti-tilt plate to prevent the rack from tipping when installing

the rack. Pulling the server out of the rack without having installed the

anti-tilt plate may cause the rack to tip over.

●Be careful not to pinch fingers or clothes when sliding out the server

or pushing it back. Failure to do so may cause injury.

●For more safety information, see chapter "Important information" on

page 37.

ÊRemove all remaining external cables from the rear connector panel and

expansion cards.

56 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual TX1330 M4

Basic hardware procedures

Figure 4: Extending the server out of the rack

ÊFold down the two quick release levers (1).

ÊPull the server out of the rack until it locks in place (2).

VCAUTION!

Do not use the extended server as a surface on which to put things or as

a work surface, and strictly avoid leaning on or against it.

TX1330 M4 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual 57

Basic hardware procedures

4.4.1.2 Removing the server from the rack

IIn most cases maintenance tasks can be performed while the server is

extended from the rack. However, depending on accessibility or security

guidelines, it may make sense to completely remove the server from the

rack cabinet for maintenance purposes.

VCAUTION!

At least two people are needed to lift the server out of the rack cabinet.

(For Japan, please refer to " 安全上のご注意 ".)

Additionally, a lifter is required in the following cases:

– The server weighs more than 50 kg.

– The server weighs more than 21 kg and is installed above the height

of 25 U.

When using a lifter, this removal procedure needs to be carried out by

maintenance personnel.

For configurations below 32 kg:

At least two people are needed to lift the server

out of the rack cabinet.

For configurations below 55 kg:

At least three people are needed to lift the server

out of the rack cabinet.

For configurations above 55 kg:

At least four people are needed to lift the server

out of the rack cabinet.

58 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual TX1330 M4

Basic hardware procedures

Figure 5: Removing the server from the rack

ÊRelease the locking bars on both rack rails (1).

ÊLift the server out of the rack rails (2) and place it on an even surface.

TX1330 M4 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual 59

Basic hardware procedures

4.4.1.3 Removing the top cover

Figure 6: Removing the top cover (rack server)

ÊOpen the locking lever (1). This will slide the top cover back disengaging the

locking mechanism (2).

Figure 7: Removing the top cover (rack server)

ÊRemove the top cover.

60 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual TX1330 M4

Basic hardware procedures

4.4.1.4 Removing the rack front cover

IYou remove the rack front cover when installing/removing accessible

drives or HDD extension boxes.

Figure 8: Removing the ID card (rack model)

ÊRemove the ID card from the server.

IIt may be necessary to pull out on the ID card rather firmly. However,

do not apply excessive force.

Figure 9: Removing the rack front cover (A)

ÊRemove two screws from the side brackets on either side.

TX1330 M4 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual 61

Basic hardware procedures

Figure 10: Removing the rack front cover (B)

ÊPress down on the locking latch while slightly folding out the rack front cover.

Figure 11: Removing the rack front cover (C)

ÊPress up on the plastic frame to disengage the bottom locking latch (1).

ÊDetach and remove the rack front cover to the front (2).

62 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual TX1330 M4

Basic hardware procedures

4.4.2 Floorstand model

4.4.2.1 Unlocking the server

Figure 12: Removing the key

ÊTurn the keychain counter-clockwise by 90 degrees (1).

ÊRemove the key ring with keys from the server rear (2).

Figure 13: Unlocking the server

ÊInsert the key into the lock on the server front.

ÊTurn the key clockwise to unlock the front and side covers (1).

ÊRemove the key from the server front (2) and set aside for later use.

TX1330 M4 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual 63

Basic hardware procedures

4.4.2.2 Removing the side cover

Figure 14: Removing the side cover (floorstand model)

ÊPull on the locking lever (1). This will slide the side cover back disengaging

the locking mechanism.

ÊRemove the side cover (2) and set aside for later use.

64 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual TX1330 M4

Basic hardware procedures

4.4.2.3 Removing the bay covers

Figure 15: Removing the accessible drive bay cover

ÊFold out the accessible drive bay cover in the direction of the arrow and

remove it.

Figure 16: Storing the accessible drive bay cover

ÊPlace the accessible drive bay cover on the HDD bay cover as shown.

TX1330 M4 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual 65

Basic hardware procedures

Figure 17: Removing the HDD bay cover

ÊFold out the HDD bay cover in the direction of the arrow and remove it.

4.4.2.4 Removing the front cover

IYou remove the front cover when:

– Installing/removing accessible drives or HDD extension boxes

– Converting a floorstand model to a rack model

Figure 18: Removing the ID card (floorstand model)

ÊRemove the ID card from the server.

IIt may be necessary to pull out on the ID card rather firmly. However,

do not apply excessive force.

66 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual TX1330 M4

Basic hardware procedures

Figure 19: Removing the front cover (floorstand model)

ÊPinch the locking clips to disengage the front cover (1, see close-up) while

slightly pulling out.

ÊCarefully fold out the bottom end of the front cover (2).

ÊUnhook and remove the front cover (3).

TX1330 M4 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual 67

Basic hardware procedures

4.5 Reassembling

VCAUTION!

●Before attaching the covers, make sure no unnecessary parts or tools

are left inside the server.

●In order to comply with applicable EMC regulations (regulations on

electromagnetic compatibility) and satisfy cooling requirements, the

server must not run while the top/side cover is removed.

●For further safety information, see chapter "Important information" on

page 37.

4.5.1 Rack model

4.5.1.1 Installing the rack front cover

Figure 20: Installing the rack front cover

ÊFit the rack front cover on the server front.

ÊEnsure that the rack mounting brackets properly engage on both sides of the

chassis as shown in the close-up.

68 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual TX1330 M4

Basic hardware procedures

Figure 21: Installing the rack front cover (B)

ÊFasten the rack front cover to the chassis with two screws on either side.

Figure 22: Installing the ID card (rack server)

ÊInsert and push the ID card into its slot until it locks in place as shown.

TX1330 M4 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual 69

Basic hardware procedures

4.5.1.2 Installing the top cover

Figure 23: Installing the top cover (rack server) (A)

ÊOpen the locking lever on the top cover.

ÊLower the top cover onto the chassis, recessed by 2 cm.

Figure 24: Installing the top cover (rack server) (B)

ÊClose the locking lever on the top cover (1). This will slide the top cover shut

engaging the locking mechanism (2).

70 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual TX1330 M4

Basic hardware procedures

4.5.1.3 Installing the server in the rack

VCAUTION!

At least two people are needed to position the server on the rack rails.

(For Japan, see " 安全上のご注意 ".)

Additionally, a lifter is required in the following cases:

– The server weighs more than 50 kg.

– The server weighs more than 21 kg and is to be installed above the

height of 25 U.

When using a lifter, this installation procedure needs to be carried out by

maintenance personnel.

For configurations below 32 kg:

At least two people are needed to lift the server

into the rack cabinet.

For configurations below 55 kg:

At least three people are needed to lift the server

into the rack cabinet.

For configurations above 55 kg:

At least four people are needed to lift the server

into the rack cabinet.

TX1330 M4 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual 71

Basic hardware procedures

Figure 25: Mounting the server onto the rack rails

ÊFully extend the rack rails until they lock in place (1).

IThe rack rails must click into place so that they can no longer be

moved.

ÊAt a slight angle, lower the server onto the rear mounting point on the rack

rails (2).

ÊFold down the server, while pressing the rail to the server side (3). Ensure

that all six rack mounting bolts are properly seated in the mounting points on

the rack rails and that the locking bars engage (4).

72 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual TX1330 M4

Basic hardware procedures

4.5.1.4 Sliding the server into the rack

Figure 26: Sliding the server into the rack

ÊRelease the locking mechanism of both rack rails (1).

ÊPush the server as far as it will go into the rack (2) until the quick release

levers engage.

VCAUTION!

Be careful with your fingers. You can pinch them when the quick-

release levers change to the release position.

ÊConnect all cables except the power cord to the server rear.

TX1330 M4 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual 73

Basic hardware procedures

4.5.2 Floorstand model

4.5.2.1 Installing the front cover

Figure 27: Installing the front cover (A)

ÊHook the two metal tabs on the upper end of the front cover into the notches

in the chassis.

Figure 28: Installing the front cover (B)

ÊFold down the front cover (1) until the locking clips on the bottom edge

engage (2).

74 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual TX1330 M4

Basic hardware procedures

Figure 29: Installing the ID card (floorstand model)

ÊInsert and push the ID card into its slot until it locks in place as shown.

4.5.2.2 Installing the bay covers

Figure 30: Installing the HDD bay cover

ÊInsert the HDD bay cover with the lower side into the front cover (1).

ÊFold in the HDD bay cover until it locks in place (2).

TX1330 M4 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual 75

Basic hardware procedures

Figure 31: Installing the accessible drive bay cover

ÊInsert the accessible drive bay cover to the upper side of the front cover (1).

ÊFold down the accessible drive bay cover until it locks in place (2).

76 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual TX1330 M4

Basic hardware procedures

4.5.2.3 Installing the side cover

Figure 32: Installing the side cover (floorstand model)

ÊOpen the locking lever on the side cover.

ÊFit the side cover on the chassis, recessed by 2 cm.

ÊClose the locking lever on the side cover (1). This will slide the top cover shut

engaging the locking mechanism (2).

ÊConnect all cables except the power cord to the server rear.

TX1330 M4 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual 77

Basic hardware procedures

4.5.2.4 Locking the server

Figure 33: Locking the server

ÊInsert the key into the lock on the server front (1).

ÊTurn the key counter-clockwise to lock the front and side covers (2).

ÊRemove the key from the server front.

Figure 34: Storing the key ring

ÊInsert the key ring into the slot on the server rear (1).

ÊTurn the key ring clockwise by 90 degrees (2) until it latches in place as

shown (3).

78 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual TX1330 M4

Basic hardware procedures

4.6 Connecting the power cord

VCAUTION!

The server supports a mains voltage in the range of 100 V - 240 V. You

may only operate the server if its rated voltage range corresponds to the

local mains voltage.

Standard power supply

ÊConnect the power cord to the PSU.

ÊIf applicable, connect the mains plug to a grounded mains outlet in the in-

house power supply network.

Figure 35: Securing power cord

ÊThread the cable tie through the eye (1).

ÊPull the cable tie tight to secure the power cord (2).

The insulated connector cannot now be disconnected from the server

accidentally.

You can loosen the cable tie by opening the small locking lever (2).

IIt will take about 60 seconds until the server can be powered on.

TX1330 M4 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual 79

Basic hardware procedures

Redundant power supply

ÊConnect the power cords to the PSUs.

ÊIf applicable, connect the mains plug to a grounded mains outlet in the in-

house power supply network.

ITo provide true phase redundancy, the second PSU should be

connected to a different AC power source from the other PSU. If one

AC power source should fail, the server will still continue to run.

ÊEnsure that the status indicator on the PSU is lit green (see section

"Indicator on hot-plug PSU" on page 469).

Figure 36: Locking the cable clamp of a PSU

ÊPull the cable clamp up (1).

ÊThread the power cord through the cable clamp (2).

ÊPress the cable clamp down until it engages to secure the cable (3).

IIt will take about 60 seconds until the server can be powered on.

80 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual TX1330 M4

Basic hardware procedures

4.7 Switching on the server

VCAUTION!

●Before switching on the server, make sure the top cover is closed. In

order to comply with applicable EMC regulations (regulations on

electromagnetic compatibility) and satisfy cooling requirements, the

server must not run while the top cover is removed.

●For more information, see chapter "Important information" on

page 37.

ÊPress the On/Off button to start up the server.

ÊEnsure that the power-on indicator is lit green.

TX1330 M4 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual 81

Basic hardware procedures

4.8 Handling the system fan module

4.8.1 Removing the system fan module

Removing the standard system fan module

Figure 37: Disconnecting the fan cable

ÊDisconnect the fan cable from the system board connector "FAN1".

Figure 38: Removing the standard system fan module

ÊPress in on the locking tab while slightly lifting up the system fan module (1).

ÊHold the fan module by the two green grips (see orange arrows) and lift it out

of the chassis (2).

82 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual TX1330 M4

Basic hardware procedures

Removing the redundant system fan module

Figure 39: Disconnecting the fan cables

ÊDisconnect the fan cables from the system board connectors "FAN1" (1) and

"FAN4" (2).

Figure 40: Removing the redundant system fan module

ÊPress in on the locking tab while slightly lifting up the system fan module (1).

ÊHold the fan module by the two green grips (see orange arrows) and lift it out

of the chassis (2).

TX1330 M4 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual 83

Basic hardware procedures

4.8.2 Installing the system fan module

Installing the standard system fan module

Figure 41: Installing the standard system fan module

ÊInsert the system fan module into the chassis.

IBe careful not to pinch any cables under the air duct.

ÊFit the four hooks on the system fan module into the keyhole slots in the

chassis.

ÊPress down on the system fan module until the four hooks lock in the narrow

ends of the keyhole slots (see circles).

84 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual TX1330 M4

Basic hardware procedures

Figure 42: Connecting the system fan cable

ÊConnect the fan cable to system board connector "FAN1" (se circle).

Installing the redundant system fan module

Figure 43: Installing the redundant system fan module

ÊInsert the system fan module into the chassis.

IBe careful not to pinch any cables under the air duct.

TX1330 M4 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual 85

Basic hardware procedures

ÊFit the four hooks on the system fan module into the keyhole slots in the

chassis.

ÊPress down on the system fan module until the four hooks lock in the narrow

ends of the keyhole slots (see circles).

Figure 44: Connecting the system fan cable

ÊEnsure that the locking tab on the system fan module is properly engaged

with the upper rim of the chassis rear (1).

ÊConnect the fan cable from fan 1 to system board connector FAN4 (2).

ÊConnect the fan cable from fan 2 to system board connector FAN1 (3).

86 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual TX1330 M4

Basic hardware procedures

4.9 Handling accessible drive bays

4.9.1 Opening the accessible drive locking bar

4.9.1.1 Floorstand model

Figure 45: Opening the accessible drive locking bar (floorstand model)

ÊPress out on the locking latch to disengage the accessible drive locking bar

(1).

ÊFold up the accessible drive locking bar (2).

TX1330 M4 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual 87

Basic hardware procedures

4.9.1.2 Rack model

Figure 46: Opening the accessible drive locking bar (rack model)

ÊPull up the locking latch to disengage the accessible drive locking bar (1).

ÊFold out the accessible drive locking bar (2).

88 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual TX1330 M4

Basic hardware procedures

4.9.2 Closing the accessible drive locking bar

4.9.2.1 Floorstand model

Figure 47: Closing the accessible drive locking bar (floorstand model)

ÊClose the locking bar (1) until it locks in place (2).

TX1330 M4 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual 89

Basic hardware procedures

4.9.2.2 Rack model

Figure 48: Closing the accessible drive locking bar (rack model)

ÊFold in the locking bar (1) until it locks in place (2).

90 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual TX1330 M4

Basic hardware procedures

4.9.3 Accessible drive filler covers

4.9.3.1 Removing accessible drive filler covers

Figure 49: Removing an accessible drive filler cover

ÊHold the accessible drive filler cover by its two handle recesses and pull it

out of the desired installation bays.

VCAUTION!

Always replace filler covers into unused drive bays to comply with

applicable EMC regulations and satisfy cooling requirements.

TX1330 M4 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual 91

Basic hardware procedures

4.9.3.2 Installing accessible drive filler covers

Figure 50: Installing an accessible drive filler cover

ÊHold the accessible drive filler cover by its two handle recesses and insert it

into the empty installation bays with the punched-out arrow symbol facing up

(see circle).

VCAUTION!

Always replace filler covers into unused drive bays to comply with

applicable EMC regulations and satisfy cooling requirements.

92 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual TX1330 M4

Basic hardware procedures

4.9.4 Accessible drive covers

4.9.4.1 Removing accessible drive covers

Figure 51: Removing an accessible drive cover

IRemoving accessible drive covers is illustrated by the example of the

floorstand model. In case of the rack front cover, the procedure is

identical.

ÊTurn the front cover face down.

ÊPress in on the lugs on either side of the drive cover.

ÊFold up (1) and remove the accessible drive cover (2).

TX1330 M4 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual 93

Basic hardware procedures

4.9.4.2 Installing accessible drive covers

Figure 52: Installing accessible drive covers

IInstalling accessible drive covers is illustrated by the example of the

floorstand model. In case of the rack front cover, the procedure is

identical.

ÊEnsure that an accessible drive filler cover has been installed in every empty

drive bay.

ÊTurn the front cover face down.

ÊJoin the two lugs on one edge of the accessible drive cover with the right

inner edge of the front cover (1).

ÊFold down the accessible drive cover until it snaps in place (2).

94 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual TX1330 M4

Basic hardware procedures

4.10 Handling the anti-tilt bracket

IThe anti-tilt bracket is only necessary for the floorstand model.

4.10.1 Installing the anti-tilt bracket

Figure 53: Installing the anti-tilt bracket (A)

ÊFit the anti-tilt bracket onto the bottom edge of the server rear.

TX1330 M4 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual 95

Basic hardware procedures

Figure 54: Installing the anti-tilt bracket (B)

ÊFasten the anti-tilt bracket on the rear of the server with two knurled thumb

screws.

4.10.2 Removing the anti-tilt bracket

ÊLoosen the two knurled thumb screws on the anti-tilt bracket (see figure 54).

ÊRemove the anti-tilt bracket from the rear of the server.

96 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual TX1330 M4

Basic hardware procedures

TX1330 M4 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual 97

5 Basic software procedures

IDepending on your server and the installed features some information is

not valid for your server.

5.1 Starting the maintenance task

5.1.1 Suspending BitLocker functionality

BitLocker Drive Encryption provides protection for operating system and data

drives by encrypting the contents and requiring users to authenticate their

credentials to access the information. In the scenario described here, BitLocker

uses the compatible Trusted Platform Module (TPM) to detect if the computer's

startup process has been modified from its original state.

IFor more information on how to use BitLocker on a computer without a

compatible TPM, see the "BitLocker Drive Encryption" documentation

page at http://technet.microsoft.com/library/cc731549.aspx.

Suspending BitLocker Drive Encryption is a temporary method for removing

BitLocker protection without decrypting the drive Windows is installed on.

Suspend BitLocker before modifying the server’s hardware configuration or

startup files. Resume BitLocker again after the maintenance procedure is

complete.

VCAUTION!

– With BitLocker features enabled, modifying the system configuration

(hardware or firmware settings) may render the system inaccessible.

The system may enter Recovery Mode and require a 48-digits

recovery password to return to normal operation.

Ensure that you suspend BitLocker drive encryption before

maintaining the server.

– When suspended, BitLocker uses a plain text key instead of the

Trusted Platform Module (TPM) to read encrypted files. Keep in mind

that information on this drive is not secure until BitLocker has been

re-enabled.

98 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual TX1330 M4

Basic software procedures

ÊAsk the system administrator to suspend BitLocker-protection on the system

volume, using the BitLocker Drive Encryption control panel item.

IThis will temporarily disable BitLocker for maintenance purposes.

The volume will not be decrypted and no keys will be discarded.

ÊClick Start - Control Panel - System and Security - BitLocker Drive

Encryption to open the BitLocker Drive Encryption.

ÊSelect the system volume, and click Suspend Protection.

ÊClick Yes to confirm that your data will not be protected while BitLocker

is suspended.

IIn order to determine which features are accessible through the

BitLocker setup wizard, it may be necessary to modify the BitLocker

Group Policy settings.

For more information on how to suspend BitLocker drive encryption, see

the Microsoft TechNet library at

http://technet.microsoft.com/library/cc731549.aspx.

For more information, see the Fujitsu web pages.

5.1.2 Disabling the boot watchdog

The boot watchdog determines whether the operating system boots within a

preset time frame. If the watchdog timer expires, the system will automatically

reboot.

If the system is to be started from removable boot media for firmware upgrade

purposes, the boot watchdog needs to be disabled before starting maintenance

task. Otherwise, the boot watchdog might initiate a system reboot before the

flash process is complete.

VCAUTION!

An incomplete firmware upgrade process may render the server

inaccessible or result in damaged/destroyed hardware.

Timer settings can be configured in the BIOS or using the ServerView iRMC

web interface.

Disabling the boot watchdog in the BIOS

ÊEnter the BIOS.

TX1330 M4 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual 99

Basic software procedures

ÊSelect the Server Mgmt menu.

ÊUnder Boot Watchdog set the Action setting to Continue.

ÊSave your changes and exit the BIOS.

IFor more information on BIOS settings, see the corresponding BIOS

Setup Utility reference manual.

Disabling the boot watchdog using the iRMC web interface

ÊLog in to the ServerView iRMC web interface.

ÊSelect the Settings menu.

ÊOpen the Server Management page.

ÊIn the Boot Watchdog group, check the Enable Boot Watchdog option.

The Enable Boot Watchdog option must be selected.

ÊSelect Continue from the Watchdog Action list.

ÊClick Apply for the changes to take effect.

IFor more information on iRMC settings, see the iRMC user guides.

5.1.3 Removing backup and optical disk media

ÊAsk the system administrator to eject all remaining backup or optical media

from the backup or optical disk drive before removing it from the server.

ÊIf the backup media cannot be ejected by conventional means, and it is

mandatory that the cartridge be removed prior to returning the drive for

repair or disposing it, a manual tape extraction needs to be performed.

For more information on "forcible" tape ejection, see the "Tape Facts" pages

available to Fujitsu service partners from the following https address:

https://partners.ts.fujitsu.com/com/service/ps/Servers/PRIMERGY/Pages/

TapeFacts.aspx

For Japan:

Please contact Fujitsu support, if "forcible" tape ejection is necessary.

IFujitsu does not assume responsibility for any damage to the tape

drive, the data cartridge/tape or for the loss of any data resulting from

manual tape extraction procedures.

100 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual TX1330 M4

Basic software procedures

5.1.4 Verifying and configuring the backup software

solution

IThis task only applies to Japan.

Depending on the backup software solution, it may be necessary to disable or

delete the backup drive from the backup software drive list before starting the

maintenance task.

IFor more information on suitable backup software solutions and related

documentation, see the Fujitsu web pages.

5.1.5 Switching on the ID indicator

For easy identification of the server, switch on the ID indicator, especially when

working in a datacenter environment or a server room. The ID indicator can also

be activated via the iRMC web interface and its status is reported to the BMC.

IFor more information, see section "Locating the defective server" on

page 51 or the "ServerView Suite Local Service Concept (LSC)" and

iRMC user guides.

Using the ID button on the front panel

ÊPress the ID button on the front panel to switch on the system identification

LEDs.

IFor more information, see section "Indicators on the front panel" on

page 459.

Using the ID icon in the iRMC web interface

ÊLog in to the iRMC S5 web interface.

The icon that represents the ID indicator LED resides on the right of the

menu bar. Its color symbolizes its status:

blue: the ID LED is on.

grey: the ID LED is off

ÊClick the icon to switch the ID indicator LED on or off.

TX1330 M4 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual 101

Basic software procedures

Using ServerView Operations Manager

ÊIn ServerView Operations Manager Single System View press the Locate

button in the title bar to switch on the ID indicators.

102 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual TX1330 M4

Basic software procedures

5.2 Completing the maintenance task

5.2.1 Updating or recovering the BIOS and the iRMC S5

IFor Japan:

Follow the instructions provided separately.

After replacing the system board, memory or a CPU, it is essential to upgrade

the BIOS and iRMC to the latest version. The latest BIOS and iRMC versions

are available from the Fujitsu support internet pages at:

http://ts.fujitsu.com/support/

For Japan:

http://www.fujitsu.com/jp/products/computing/servers/primergy/downloads/

INote on the boot watchdog

Before updating or recovering the BIOS and iRMC, ensure that the boot

watchdog is disabled, see section "Disabling the boot watchdog" on

page 98.

After updating or recovering the BIOS and iRMC, enable the boot

watchdog again, see section "Enabling the boot watchdog" on page 111.

IFujitsu does not assume responsibility for any damage done to the

server or for the loss of any data resulting from BIOS updates.

5.2.1.1 Updating or recovering the BIOS

BIOS flash procedure

ÊPerform the BIOS flash procedure as described in the "BIOS Setup Utility"

reference manual of your server.

BIOS recovery procedure

ÊPerform the BIOS recovery procedure as described in the "BIOS Setup

Utility" reference manual of your server.

5.2.1.2 Updating the iRMC firmware

ÊEnter the ServerView iRMC web interface.

ÊSelect the Tools menu.

TX1330 M4 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual 103

Basic software procedures

Ê Select Update to open the Update page.

Ê Select iRMC Update.

Ê In the iRMC Update group click Select to search the new firmware.

Ê Select the new firmware and click Start Update.

I For more information on iRMC settings, see the iRMC user guides.

5.2.2 Verifying system information backup/restore

To avoid the loss of non-default settings when replacing the system board, a

backup copy of important system configuration data is automatically stored from

the system board NVRAM to the Chassis ID EPROM. After replacing the

system board the backup data is restored from the Chassis ID board to the new

system board.

In order to verify whether the backup or restore process has been successful,

check the System Event Log (SEL) using the ServerView Operations Manager

(see also section "Viewing and clearing the System Event Log (SEL)" on

page 114).

After replacing the system board

Ê Check the SEL log files as described in section "Viewing and clearing the

System Event Log (SEL)" on page 114 to verify whether the backup data on

the Chassis ID EPROM has been restored to the system board:

Chassis IDPROM: Motherboard Exchange detected

Chassis IDPROM: BMC FW restore successful

Chassis IDPROM: BIOS restore successful

After replacing the front panel or Chassis ID EPROM

ÊCheck the SEL log files as described in section "Viewing and clearing the

System Event Log (SEL)" on page 114 to verify whether a backup copy of

the system board settings has been transferred to the Chassis ID EPROM:

Chassis IDPROM: BMC FW backup successful

104 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual TX1330 M4

Basic software procedures

5.2.3 Updating expansion card firmware

IFor Japan:

Follow the instructions provided separately.

After replacing the expansion card, it is essential to upgrade the firmware to the

latest version without connecting any storage devices. The latest expansion

card firmware version is available from the Fujitsu support web pages at:

http://ts.fujitsu.com/support/

For Japan:

http://www.fujitsu.com/jp/products/computing/servers/primergy/downloads/

INote on the boot watchdog

Before updating expansion card firmware, ensure that the boot watchdog

is disabled, see section "Enabling the boot watchdog" on page 111.

After updating expansion card firmware, enable the boot watchdog

again, see section "Enabling the boot watchdog" on page 111.

IFujitsu does not assume responsibility for any damage done to the

server or for the loss of any data resulting from firmware updates.

Using the ServerView Update Manager

For more information on how to update the expansion card firmware using the

ServerView Update Manager or Update Manager Express (UME), see the

following manuals:

– ServerView Update Manager:

"ServerView Update Management" user guide

– ServerView Update Manager Express:

"Local System Update for PRIMERGY Servers" user guide

Using the flash tool

The latest firmware files are available as ASPs (Autonomous Support

Packages) for Windows or as DOS tools from the Fujitsu support web pages at:

http://ts.fujitsu.com/support/

For Japan:

http://www.fujitsu.com/jp/products/computing/servers/primergy/downloads/

ÊSelect Drivers & Downloads.

ÊFrom the Select Product drop down lists, choose your PRIMERGY server

TX1330 M4 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual 105

Basic software procedures

ÊSelect Server

ÊSelect Fujitsu Server Primergy

ÊSelect Product Group

ÊSelect Product Family

or enter its serial or ident number into the search field.

ÊSelect your operating system and version.

ÊSelect the desired component type (e.g. SAS RAID).

ÊSelect your controller from the device list to expand a compilation of

available drivers and firmware.

ÊSelect the desired file and click Download for further instructions.

5.2.4 Enabling Option ROM scan

In order to configure an expansion card that has been installed or replaced, the

Option ROM of the card has to be enabled in the BIOS. The firmware of the card

is called by the BIOS upon reboot and can be entered and configured.

Option ROM can be enabled permanently (e.g. in case of a boot controller that

may require frequent setup) or temporarily for one-time configuration. When

permanently enabling a controllers’s Option ROM, keep in mind that only two

Option ROMs can be activated in the BIOS at a time.

ÊEnter the BIOS.

ÊFrom the Advanced menu select Option ROM Configuration.

ÊIdentify the desired PCI slot and set its Launch Slot # OpROM setting to

Enabled.

ÊSave your changes and exit the BIOS.

IUp to two Option ROMs can be activated in the BIOS at a time.

For more information on how to access the BIOS and modify settings,

see the corresponding BIOS Setup Utility reference manual.

When the enabled expansion card is initialized during the POST phase of the

boot sequence, a key combination is displayed temporarily to enter the firmware

of the expansion card.

ÊPress the displayed key combination.

106 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual TX1330 M4

Basic software procedures

ÊModify the expansion card firmware options as desired.

ÊSave your changes and exit the firmware.

IThe option ROM of the expansion card can now be disabled in the BIOS.

Exception: If the expansion card controls a permanent boot device, the

Option ROM of the expansion card has to remain enabled.

5.2.5 Reconfiguring the backup software solution

IThis task only applies to Japan.

Disabling backup drives

Depending on the backup software solution, it may be necessary to disable or

delete the backup drive from the backup software drive list and reconfigure

backup jobs after completing the maintenance task.

IMore information on suitable backup software solutions and related

documentation is available from the Fujitsu web pages.

Re-enabling backup drives

If a backup drive has been disabled or deleted from the backup software drive

list as described in section "Verifying and configuring the backup software

solution" on page 100, it has to be re-enabled to complete the maintenance

task.

ÊRe-enable backup drives and revise backup software settings and cronjobs.

IMore information on suitable backup software solutions and related

documentation is available from the Fujitsu web pages.

5.2.6 Resetting the boot retry counter

The boot retry counter is decremented from its preset value every time the

POST watchdog initiates a system reboot. When the value has reached ’0’, the

system will shut down and power off.

TX1330 M4 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual 107

Basic software procedures

5.2.6.1 Viewing the boot retry counter

The current boot retry counter status is available in the BIOS:

ÊEnter the BIOS.

ÊSelect the Management menu.

ÊUnder Boot Retry Counter the current number of remaining boot attempts

is displayed. The value is further decremented with every failed boot attempt

or system reboot resulting from critical system errors.

ÊExit the BIOS.

5.2.6.2 Resetting the boot retry counter

The boot retry counter should be reset to its original value concluding every

service task.

IPlease note, if the customer does not know about the original boot

retry values:

If the system boots up and no further errors occur within 6 hours after that

successful boot attempt, the boot retry counter will automatically be reset

to its default value. Please take into account, that the specified number

of boot attempts can only be determined after this period of time.

If the customer knows about the original boot retry values, proceed as follows

to reset or configure the boot retry counter:

Resetting the boot retry counter in the BIOS

ÊEnter the BIOS.

ÊSelect the Management menu.

ÊUnder Boot Retry Counter press the [+] or [-]keys to specify the maximum

number of boot attempts (0 to 7).

ÊExit the BIOS.

Resetting the boot retry counter using the ServerView Operations

Manager

ÊIn the ServerView Operations Manager Administration view, select Server

Configuration.

108 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual TX1330 M4

Basic software procedures

ÊIf more than one server is managed in SVOM, select the target server and

click Next.

ÊFrom the Server Configuration menu pane, choose Restart Options.

ÊUnder Reboot Retries, specify the maximum number of boot attempts (0 to

7) in the Default for reboot tries field.

Resetting the boot retry counter using iRMC web interface

ÊLog in to the ServerView iRMC web interface.

ÊOpen the Settings menu.

ÊOpen the Server Management page.

ÊThe following boot retry counter settings are available in the Automatic

System Recovery & Restart ( ASR&R) group:

ÊFor Retry Counter Max specify the maximum number of attempts to

boot the operating system (0 to 7).

ÊIn the Retry Counter field the current number of remaining boot attempts

is displayed. Overwrite this value with the maximum number of boot

attempts specified above in order to reset the boot retry counter.

ÊClick Apply for the changes to take effect.

IFor more information on iRMC settings, see the iRMC user guides.

5.2.7 Resetting the error status after replacing memory

modules or CPUs

5.2.7.1 Memory modules

ServerView Operations Manager may report a defective memory module in

case of a memory error.

IImportant note

After replacing a defective memory module, please check if the error

counter has been reset automatically. If the memory slot is still marked

as failed, please reset the error counter manually using one of the

methods below.

TX1330 M4 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual 109

Basic software procedures

Using ServerView Maintenance Tools (Windows only)

ÊLaunch the ServerView Maintenance Tools:

Start > Apps > Fujitsu > Maintenance Tools

ÊChoose the Memory status tab.

ÊSelect the memory module which shows the pre-failure status.

ÊClick on Reset Status.

IThe Reset Status button will only be available if the selected memory

module contains errors.

ÊEnsure that all pre-fail/fail status issues have been resolved in ServerView

Operations Manager.

Using the command line interface (Linux/VMware only)

The memory error counter can be reset using the meclear utility which is part

of the ServerView agents for Linux.

Imeclear (Memory Module Error Counter Reset Utility) allows to reset

the error count collected for a memory module, for example after it has

been replaced.

For more Information, see the meclear manual pages.

ÊLog in as root.

ÊEnter the command below, followed by [ENTER]:

/usr/sbin/meclear

ÊSelect the number of a memory module with a status other than "OK" or

"Not available".

ÊRepeat the step above until all memory modules show the "OK" status.

ÊEnsure that all pre-fail/fail status issues have been resolved in ServerView

Operations Manager.

110 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual TX1330 M4

Basic software procedures

5.2.7.2 CPUs

ServerView Operations Manager may report a defective CPU in case of a

critical error.

IImportant note

After replacing a defective CPU, the error counter must be reset

manually using one of the methods below.

Using ServerView Maintenance Tools (Windows only)

ÊLaunch the ServerView Maintenance Tools:

Start > Apps > Fujitsu > Maintenance Tools

ÊChoose the CPU status tab.

ÊSelect the CPU which shows the pre-failure status.

ÊClick on Reset Status.

ÊEnsure that all pre-fail/fail status issues have been resolved in ServerView

Operations Manager.

Using the command line (Linux only)

Proceed as follows to reset the error counter of a specific CPU:

ÊLog in as root.

ÊEnter the command below, followed by [ENTER]:

– For rack and floorstand servers (RX and TX server series):

/usr/sbin/eecdcp -c oc=0609 oi=<CPU#>

– For blade and scale-out servers (BX and CX server series):

/usr/sbin/eecdcp -c oc=0609 oi=<CPU#> cab=<cabinet nr>

To identify the cabinet number, enter the following command:

/usr/sbin/eecdcp -c oc=E204

I<CPU#> parameters are "0" for CPU 1 and "1" for CPU 2.

ÊIf the error status cannot be reset with the method above, please use the

following procedure for resetting the error counter of all CPUs:

ÊLog in as root.

TX1330 M4 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual 111

Basic software procedures

ÊEnter the commands below, followed by [ENTER]:

1. /etc/init.d/srvmagt stop

/etc/init.d/srvmagt_scs stop

/etc/init.d/eecd stop

/etc/init.d/eecd_mods_src stop

2. cd /etc/srvmagt

3. rm -f cehist.bin

4. /etc/init.d/eecd_mods_src start

/etc/init.d/eecd start

/etc/init.d/srvmagt start

/etc/init.d/srvmagt_scs start

ÊEnsure that all pre-fail/fail status issues have been resolved in ServerView

Operations Manager.

5.2.8 Enabling the boot watchdog

If the boot watchdog has been disabled for firmware upgrade purposes (see

section "Disabling the boot watchdog" on page 98), it has to be re-enabled to

complete the maintenance task.

Timer settings can be configured in the BIOS or using the ServerView iRMC

web interface.

Enabling the boot watchdog in the BIOS

ÊEnter the BIOS.

ÊSelect the Server Mgmt menu.

ÊUnder Boot Watchdog set the Action setting to Reset.

ÊSave your changes and exit the BIOS.

IFor more information on how to access the BIOS and modify settings,

see the corresponding BIOS Setup Utility reference manual.

Enabling the boot watchdog using the iRMC web interface

ÊLog in to the ServerView iRMC web interface.

ÊSelect the Settings menu.

112 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual TX1330 M4

Basic software procedures

ÊOpen the Server Management page.

ÊIn the Boot Watchdog group, check the Enable Boot Watchdog option.

The Enable Boot Watchdog option must be selected.

ÊSelect Reset from the Watchdog Action list.

ÊClick Apply for the changes to take effect.

IFor more information on iRMC settings, see the iRMC user guides.

5.2.9 Enabling replaced components in the BIOS

When a CPU, an expansion card, or a memory module fails, the defective

component will be set to Disabled or Failed in the BIOS. The server will then

reboot with only the intact hardware components remaining in the system

configuration. After replacing the defective component, it needs to be re-

enabled in the BIOS.

ÊEnter the BIOS.

ÊSelect the Advanced menu.

ÊSelect the status menu of the desired component:

–CPUs: CPU Status

IThis option is only available for multi-processor systems.

– Memory: Memory Status

– Expansion cards: PCI Status

ÊReset replaced components to Enable.

ÊSave your changes and exit the BIOS.

IFor more information on how to access the BIOS and modify settings,

see the corresponding BIOS Setup Utility reference manual.

TX1330 M4 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual 113

Basic software procedures

5.2.10 Verifying the memory mode

If a memory module fails, the server will reboot and the defective module will be

disabled. As a result, the current operation mode (e.g. Mirrored Channel mode)

may no longer be available due to a lack of identical memory module pairs. In

this case, the operation mode will automatically revert to Independent Channel

Mode.

IFor more information on memory operation modes available for your

server, see section "Memory sequence" on page 312.

After replacing the defective module(s) the memory operation mode is

automatically reset to its original state. It is recommended to verify that the

operation mode has been correctly.

ÊEnter the BIOS.

ÊSelect the Advanced menu.

ÊSelect Memory Status and verify that none of the memory modules are

marked as Failed.

ÊSelect Memory Configuration to verify Memory Mode of Operation.

ÊSave your changes (if applicable) and exit the BIOS.

IFor more information on how to access the BIOS and modify settings,

see the corresponding BIOS Setup Utility reference manual.

5.2.11 Verifying the system time settings

IThis task only applies to Linux and VMware environments.

After the system board has been replaced, the system time is set automatically.

By default, the RTC (Real Time Clock) time standard is set as the local time.

If a Linux/VMware OS is used and the hardware clock has been configured as

UTC (Universal Time, Coordinated) in the operating system, the BMC local time

may not be mapped correctly.

ÊAfter replacing the system board, ask the system administrator whether the

RTC or UTC time standard is to be used as system time.

IIf the system time (RTC) is set to UTC, the SEL (System Event Log)

time stamps may differ from the local time.

114 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual TX1330 M4

Basic software procedures

ÊEnter the BIOS.

ÊSelect the Main menu.

ÊUnder System Time and System Date specify the correct time and date.

IBy default, the system time set in the BIOS is RTC (Real Time Clock)

local time. If your IT infrastructure relies on universally accepted time

standards, set the System Time to UTC (Universal Time,

Coordinated) instead. Greenwich Mean Time (GMT) can be

considered equivalent to UTC.

ÊSave your changes and exit the BIOS.

IFor more information on how to access the BIOS and modify settings,

see the corresponding BIOS Setup Utility reference manual.

5.2.12 Viewing and clearing the System Event Log (SEL)

5.2.12.1 Viewing the SEL

You can view the System Event Log (SEL) using the ServerView Operations

Manager or the ServerView iRMC web interface:

Viewing the SEL in ServerView Operations Manager

ÊIn ServerView Operations Manager Single System View select

Maintenance from the Information / Operation menu.

ÊUnder Maintenance select System Event Log.

ÊSelect the message type(s) you want to display:

– Critical events

– Major events

– Minor events

– Informational events

INote on the Driver Monitor of the ServerView Operations Manager

The Driver Monitor view gives you an overview of the monitored

components as well as the associated events contained in the system

event log on the managed server.

TX1330 M4 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual 115

Basic software procedures

Under Monitored Components the monitored components are listed. If

a component has the status Warning or Error, you can select it in the list

and click Acknowledge. This confirms the event on the server side. You

may have to log on to the server beforehand. The status of the

component will then be reset to ok. To see the new status you must

refresh the Driver Monitor view with Refresh.

IFor more information on how to view and sort the SEL using ServerView

Operations Manager, see the "ServerView Operations Manager - Server

Management" user guide.

Viewing the SEL using the iRMC web interface

ÊLog in to the ServerView iRMC web interface.

ÊOpen the Logs menu.

ÊClick System Event Log to open the System Event Log page.

All events concerning the system are displayed in a table in the Event Log

Content group.

ÊYou can sort the table based on a column using the arrows in the header

field.

ÊYou can also filter the table using the filter lists in the header of some

columns.

IFor more information on iRMC settings, see the iRMC user guides.

5.2.12.2 Clearing the SEL

You can clear the System Event Log (SEL) using the ServerView iRMC web

interface:

ÊLog in to the ServerView iRMC web interface.

ÊOpen the Logs menu.

ÊClick System Event Log to open the System Event Log page.

All events concerning the system are displayed ina table in the Event Log

Content group.

ÊClick the Clear Logs button below the table to clear the SEL.

IFor more information on iRMC settings, see the iRMC user guides.

116 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual TX1330 M4

Basic software procedures

5.2.13 Updating the NIC configuration file in a Linux and

VMware environment

In order to prevent errors caused by changing network device names (eth<x>),

it is recommended to store the MAC address (hardware address) of a network

interface card in the related NIC configuration file of the Linux/VMware OS.

When replacing a network controller or the system board with onboard LAN

controllers in a server running Linux/VMware OS, the MAC address will change

but not automatically be updated in the definition file.

In order to prevent communication problems, it is necessary to update the

changed MAC address stored in the related ifcfg-eth<x> definition file.

To update the MAC address, proceed as follows:

IProcedures may differ depending on your Linux/VMware OS or the

definition file on the client system. Use the following information as

reference. Ask the system administrator to change the definition file.

ÊAfter replacing a network controller or the system board, switch on and boot

the server as described in section "Switching on the server" on page 80.

The hardware configuration tool for Red Hat Linux, will launch at boot and

detect the new and/or changed hardware on your system.

ÊFor the changes to take effect, you need to reboot the network by entering

the following command:

# service network restart

IIf the system board or network controller offers multiple LAN ports, it is

necessary to update the remaining ifcfg-eth<x> definition files

accordingly.

ÊUpdate the NIC configuration file to reflect the new card sequence and MAC

address.

TX1330 M4 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual 117

Basic software procedures

5.2.14 Resuming BitLocker functionality

If BitLocker Drive Encryption has been suspended for maintenance purposes

(see section "Suspending BitLocker functionality" on page 97), it has to be re-

enabled to complete the service task.

IIf BitLocker Drive Encryption has been suspended prior to replacing

components you won't be asked for a recovery key when rebooting the

server after the maintenance task. However, if BitLocker functionality has

not been suspended, Windows will enter recovery mode and ask you to

input recovery key for further booting.

ÊIn this case, ask the system administrator to enter the recovery key in

order to boot the operating system.

ÊAsk the system administrator to enable the previously suspended BitLocker-

protection on the system volume, using the BitLocker Drive Encryption

control panel item:

ÊClick Start - Control Panel - System and Security - BitLocker Drive

Encryption to open the BitLocker Drive Encryption.

ÊSelect the system volume, and click Resume Protection.

IFor more information on how to resume BitLocker drive encryption, see

the Microsoft TechNet library at

http://technet.microsoft.com/library/cc731549.aspx.

For more information, see the Fujitsu web pages.

5.2.15 Performing a RAID array rebuild

After replacing an HDD that has been combined into a RAID array, RAID rebuild

will be performed completely unattended as a background process.

ÊEnsure that the RAID array rebuild has started normally. Wait until the

progress bar has reached at least one percent.

ÊInform the customer about the remaining rebuild time, based on the

displayed duration estimate.

118 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual TX1330 M4

Basic software procedures

Figure 55: Progress bar (RAID array rebuild)

VCAUTION!

The system is now operational, however, data redundancy will not be

available until the RAID array rebuild is complete. Depending on the

HDD capacity the overall process can take up to several hours, in some

cases even days.

IYou may notice a slight performance impact during rebuild.

5.2.16 Looking for MAC/WWN/GUID and SAS addresses

The customer needs to know the new address of the controller:

– When replacing the system board with an onboard LAN controller

– When adding or replacing a network controller

– When adding or replacing a SAS controller

Different controllers send different addresses:

– LAN controller: MAC (Media Access Control) address

– Fibre channel controller: WWN (World Wide Name) address

– Infiniband/Omni-Path controller: GUID (Globally Unique IDentifier) address

– SAS controller: SAS (Serial Attached SCSI) address

5.2.16.1 Looking for the MAC address of a LAN controller

There are several possible locations where these addresses can be found.

ÊInform the customer about the new or changed MAC address.

TX1330 M4 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual 119

Basic software procedures

Checking the label

ÊIf available, check the label on the controller.

Beside the part number, you may find the MAC address.

Using an UEFI BIOS

ÊEnter the BIOS setup menu.

ÊSelect the Advanced menu.

The addresses are displayed at the Advanced menu main page.

IOnly network controllers supporting the Command Line Protocol

(CLP) will be displayed.

LAN controller always provide the MAC addresses.

Using the iRMC web interface

ÊLog into the ServerView iRMC web interface.

ÊOpen the System menu.

ÊOpen the Network page.

ÊIn the Ethernet Ports group, you will find detailed information on each

network controller in the managed PRIMERGY server, including its MAC

address.

IThis information is only available with the iRMC S5 or above.

Only network controllers supporting the Command Line Protocol

(CLP) will be displayed.

IFor add-in cards the vendors provide documentation and tools, offered

on the Fujitsu support web pages:

http://ts.fujitsu.com/support/

Select the server, select Downloads - More Details - Driver.

Some vendors bundle the documentation together with the driver

package.

5.2.16.2 Looking for the WWN address of a fibre channel controller

There are several possible locations where these addresses can be found.

ÊInform the customer about the new or changed WWN address.

120 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual TX1330 M4

Basic software procedures

Checking the label

ÊIf available, check the label on the controller.

Beside the part number, you may find the WWN address.

Using an UEFI BIOS

ÊEnter the BIOS setup menu.

ÊSelect the Advanced menu.

The addresses are displayed at the Advanced menu main page.

IOnly network controllers supporting the Command Line Protocol

(CLP) will be displayed.

5.2.16.3 Looking for the GUID address of an infiniband or Omni-Path

controller

There are several possible locations where these addresses can be found.

ÊInform the customer about the new or changed GUID address.

Checking the label

ÊIf available, check the label on the controller.

Beside the part number, you may find the GUID address.

5.2.16.4 Looking for SAS addresses of SAS controllers for external

devices

There are several possible locations where these addresses can be found.

ÊInform the customer about the new SAS address. The customer need the

new SAS address, especially when the server is connected to a Fujitsu

Storage ETERNUS system.

Using ServerView RAID Manager

ÊStart the ServerView RAID Manager and log in.

ÊSelect the desired SAS controller.

In the General tab you can find data on the selected object including its SAS

address.

TX1330 M4 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual 121

Basic software procedures

IFor more information, see the "ServerView Operations Manager - Server

Management" user guide and the "ServerView RAID Manager" - user

guide.

5.2.17 Using the Chassis ID Prom Tool

The Chassis ID EPROM located on a dedicated Chassis ID board or on the front

panel board of your server contains system information like server name and

model, housing type, serial number and manufacturing data.

In order to integrate your system into the ServerView management environment

and to enable server installation using the ServerView Installation Manager,

system data needs to be complete and correct.

After replacing the Chassis ID EPROM, system information has to be entered

using the Chassis ID Prom tool. The tool and further instructions are available

to maintenance personnel from the Fujitsu web pages:

https://partners.ts.fujitsu.com/com/service/ps/Servers/PRIMERGY/

ÊSelect your PRIMERGY system from the main area of the page.

ÊFrom the categories selection, choose Software & Tools Documentation.

ÊIn the Tools area click Tools: Chassis-IDProm Tool to download the file

(tool-chassis-Idprom-Tool.zip).

IFor Japan:

Follow the instructions provided separately.

Note on Advanced Thermal Design (ATD)

IIf the Advanced Thermal Design (ATD) option is available and has been

enabled for your server, please set information within the Chassis ID

Prom Tool accordingly.

The ATD option can only be ordered from the manufacturer as a factory

preset. To find out if your server is ATD-enabled, check for the ATD logo

on the identification rating plate.

For ATD logo and more information on Advanced Thermal Design (ATD),

see the operating manual of your server.

VCAUTION!

Please note that you can only set the ATD flag. Resetting the ATD flag

using the Chassis ID Prom Tool is not possible!

122 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual TX1330 M4

Basic software procedures

5.2.18 Configuring LAN teaming

Use ServerView Operations Manager to obtain more information on existing

LAN teams:

ÊIn ServerView Operations Manager Single System View select System

Status from the Information/Operation menu.

ÊUnder Network Interfaces select LAN Teaming.

ÊThe Network Interfaces (Summary) overview shows all configured LAN

teams and their components. Choose a LAN team to display further details:

–LAN Team Properties: Properties of the selected LAN team

–LAN Team Statistics: Available statistics about the selected LAN team

IFor more information, see the "ServerView Operations Manager - Server

Management" user guide.

5.2.18.1 After replacing/upgrading LAN controllers

ÊYou need to restore the configuration for the LAN Teaming, using the LAN

driver utility or OS teaming software.

Ensure that the controllers have been assigned as primary or secondary

according to your requirements.

IFor more information, see the relevant LAN driver manual.

5.2.18.2 After replacing a system board

IThe following procedure must be done for each system board that is

replaced.

ÊConfirm with the customer whether the onboard LAN controller you have

replaced has been used as part of a LAN teaming configuration.

ÊIf LAN teaming has been active, you will need to restore the configuration

using the LAN driver utility or OS teaming software.

IFor more information, see the relevant LAN driver manual.

TX1330 M4 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual 123

Basic software procedures

5.2.19 Switching off the ID indicator

Press the ID button on the front panel, or use the iRMC web interface or

ServerView Operations Manager to switch off the ID indicator after the

maintenance task has been concluded successfully.

IFor more information, see section "Locating the defective server" on

page 51 or the "ServerView Suite Local Service Concept (LSC)" and

"iRMC S5 - Web Interface" user guides.

Using the ID button on the front panel

ÊPress the ID button on the front panel to switch off the ID indicators.

Using the ID icon in the RMC web interface

ÊLog in to the iRMC S5 web interface.

The icon that represents the ID indicator LED resides on the right of the

menu bar. Its color symbolizes its status:

blue: the ID LED is on.

grey: the ID LED is off

ÊClick the icon to switch the ID indicator LED on or off.

Using ServerView Operations Manager

ÊIn ServerView Operations Manager Single System View and press the

Locate button in the title bar to switch off the ID indicator.

5.2.20 Specifying the chassis model

In order to have your server displayed correctly as a rack system in the

ServerView management user interface after a chassis conversion, the chassis

model setting needs to be updated.

This can be accomplished using the ServerView Installation Manager or

Maintenance Tools:

Using the ServerView Installation Manager

ÊBoot the system from the ServerView Suite DVD. The ServerView

Installation Manager is being started.

124 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual TX1330 M4

Basic software procedures

ÊSelect your preferred user interface language.

ÊUnder Status backup media select No status backup and click Continue.

ÊSelect Maintenance.

ÊSelect Server Configuration Manager.

ÊCheck the box for rack model and save the setting by clicking Save.

Using the ServerView Maintenance Tools

On Windows-based servers with ServerView agents installed, proceed as

follows:

ÊClick Start, point to All Programs, and then point to Fujitsu - ServerView

Suite - Agents - Maintenance Tools.

ÊIn the Maintenance Tools menu pane, click the Chassis Model

Configuration tab.

ÊUnder Convert to click the Rack Model button.

ÊClick Exit to close the Maintenance Tools menu pane.

IFor more information on installing ServerView agents, see the

"ServerView Operations Manager - Installation ServerView Agents for

Windows" user guide.

5.2.21 Performing a fan test

INotes on replacing a defective fan

After replacing a defective system fan or PSU containing a defective fan,

the fan error indicators will stay lit until the next fan test. By default, a fan

test is automatically started every 24 hours. The first automatic fan test

being performed after replacing a fan will turn off the fan error indicator.

If you want to start the fan test manually, you can do so by following the

description below:

Executing the fan test via the iRMC web interface

ÊLog into the iRMC web interface.

The System menu is displayed on default.

ÊOpen the Cooling page.

TX1330 M4 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual 125

Basic software procedures

ÊExpand the Cooling Devices group.

ÊClick Start Fan Test

IFor more information on iRMC settings, see the iRMC user guides.

Executing the fan test via ServerView Operations Manager

ÊOpen the ServerView Operations Manager and log in.

ÊUnder Administration select Server Configuration.

ÊIn the hierarchy tree of the Server list tab, select the server to be configured.

ÊIn the right-hand side of the window, specify the details on the selected

server and confirm your entries by clicking GO....

In the left-hand section of the window, the Configuration tab is being

activated.

ÊIn the navigation area of the Configuration tab, select Other Settings.

ÊUnder Daily Fan Test, set the daily fan test time to a few minutes from the

current time. (Ensure to note down your previous setting.)

ÊClick Save Page.

The fan test will be started at the specified time.

ÊAfter the fan test is complete, restore the time setting to its initial value and

click Save Page.

In case of maintenance done by Fujitsu engineers in Japan:

Executing the fan test via Chassis ID Prom Tool

IPlease follow the instructions provided separately.

126 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual TX1330 M4

Basic software procedures

TX1330 M4 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual 127

6 Power supply unit (PSU)

Safety notes

VCAUTION!

●Do not disassemble the PSU. Doing so may cause electric shock.

●Areas around the PSU may remain extremely hot after shutdown.

After shutting down the server, wait for hot components to cool down

before removing the PSU.

●When installing a PSU, ensure that the connector of the PSU is not

damaged or bent.

●The PSU is heavy, so handle it carefully. If you drop it by mistake,

injuries may result.

●For more information, see chapter "Important information" on

page 37.

128 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual TX1330 M4

Power supply unit (PSU)

6.1 Basic information

The server can be equipped:

– with a standard PSU (permanently built-in)

The PSU adjusts automatically to any mains voltage in the range of 100 V -

240 V.

– or up to two hot-plug PSUs

In its basic configuration, the server has one PSU that adjusts automatically

to any mains voltage in the range of 100 V - 240 V. Besides the PSU, a

second PSU can be installed optionally to serve as a redundant power

supply. If one PSU fails, the second PSU in the redundant configuration

ensures operation can continue uninterrupted and the defective PSU can be

replaced during operation (hot-plug).

– or one hot-plug PSU and one Fujitsu battery unit (FJBU)

Besides the PSU, an FJBU can be installed optionally as a modular UPS.

When power fail happened, the server can operate by FJBU battery for a

while. The FJBU can be replaced during operation (hot-plug).

VCAUTION!

The server supports a mains voltage in the range of 100 V - 240 V. You

may only operate the server if its rated voltage range corresponds to the

local mains voltage.

Assembly rules

– Always install a dummy cover into an unused PSU bay to comply with

applicable EMC regulations and satisfy cooling requirements.

– For a redundant power supply configuration you need always two PSUs with

the same power class.

TX1330 M4 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual 129

Power supply unit (PSU)

6.2 Standard power supply

6.2.1 Replacing the standard PSU

6.2.1.1 Preliminary steps

Ê"Locating the defective server" on page 51

Ê"Suspending BitLocker functionality" on page 97

Ê"Shutting down the server" on page 53

Ê"Disconnecting the power cord" on page 54

Ê"Getting access to the component" on page 55

ÊRemove the system fan module, see section "Removing the system fan

module" on page 81

Field Replaceable Unit

(FRU)

Hardware: 10 minutes

Tools: Phillips PH2 / (+) No. 2 screw driver

130 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual TX1330 M4

Power supply unit (PSU)

6.2.1.2 Removing the defective standard PSU

Figure 56: Disconnecting the power cables

ÊOpen the cable clamps (1).

ÊDisconnect the power cables from the system board (2).

TX1330 M4 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual 131

Power supply unit (PSU)

Figure 57: Removing the screws

ÊRemove the five screws (see circles).

Figure 58: Taking out the standard PSU

ÊPush the PSU a few centimeters toward the inside (1) to disengage the

locking mechanism.

ÊLift the PSU out of the chassis (2).

132 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual TX1330 M4

Power supply unit (PSU)

Figure 59: Removing the installation frame from the PSU (A)

ÊRemove the two screws (see circles).

Figure 60: Removing the installation frame from the PSU (B)

ÊRemove the installation frame from the PSU.

TX1330 M4 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual 133

Power supply unit (PSU)

6.2.1.3 Installing the new standard PSU

Figure 61: Attaching the installation frame to the PSU

ÊAttach the installation frame to the PSU.

Figure 62: Securing the installation frame to the PSU

ÊFasten the installation frame to the PSU with two screws (see circles).

134 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual TX1330 M4

Power supply unit (PSU)

Figure 63: Installing the standard PSU

ÊInsert the PSU so that the two hooks on the server floor (see close-up) rest

in the recesses in the installation frame (1).

ÊPush the PSU towards the rear of the chassis (2).

ÊFasten the PSU to the chassis with five screws (see figure 57).

TX1330 M4 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual 135

Power supply unit (PSU)

Figure 64: Connecting the power cables

ÊConnect the power cables to the system board:

IFor the cable plans, see chapter "Appendix B" on page 477.

ÊRun the power cables through the cable clamps as shown.

6.2.1.4 Concluding steps

ÊInstall the system fan module, see section "Installing the system fan module"

on page 83.

Ê"Reassembling" on page 67

Ê"Connecting the power cord" on page 78

Ê"Switching on the server" on page 80

1PSU power cable to connector "PWR MAIN".

2Power signal cable to connector "PC98".

136 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual TX1330 M4

Power supply unit (PSU)

Ê"Resuming BitLocker functionality" on page 117

Ê"Performing a fan test" on page 124

6.3 Redundant power supply

Figure 65: PSU bays

6.3.1 Installing a hot-plug PSU

6.3.1.1 Preliminary steps

No steps needed.

Customer Replaceable Unit

(CRU)

Hardware: 5 minutes

Tools: tool-less

PSU 1

PSU 2

TX1330 M4 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual 137

Power supply unit (PSU)

6.3.1.2 Removing the dummy cover

Figure 66: Removing the dummy cover

ÊPress in on both release latches (1) and remove the PSU dummy cover (2).

VCAUTION!

Keep the dummy cover for future use. If a PSU is removed and not

immediately replaced by a new one, a dummy cover must be installed in

the bay again to comply with applicable EMC regulations and satisfy

cooling requirements.

6.3.1.3 Installing a hot-plug PSU

Figure 67: Folding up the handle

ÊPush the handle of the PSU halfway upward in the direction of the arrow.

138 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual TX1330 M4

Power supply unit (PSU)

Figure 68: Installing the PSU

ÊPush the PSU into its bay (1) as far as it will go until the release latch snaps

in place.

ÊFold down the handle on the PSU (2).

IEnsure that the PSU engages correctly in the bay and is locked in

position. This is the only way to prevent the PSU from sliding out of its

bay and being damaged during transportation.

Figure 69: Installing the cable clamp

ÊPush the cable clamp into the corresponding hole until it clicks in.

ÊIf applicable, configure the redundant power supply.

TX1330 M4 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual 139

Power supply unit (PSU)

6.3.1.4 Concluding steps

Ê"Connecting the power cord" on page 78

Ê"Performing a fan test" on page 124

6.3.2 Removing a hot-plug PSU

Note for servers using CMA (Cable Management Arm)

Regarding of removing PSUs, additional tasks are needed, due to an

interference between CMA stopper and the PSUs.

Figure 70: Unlocking the CMA stopper

ÊPush the lock spring inward to unlock the CMA stopper.

VCAUTION!

In case of not enough space at the under side, unlock the CMA

stopper of the server below and pull out the CMA to the rear side.

Customer Replaceable Unit

(CRU)

Hardware: 5 minutes

Tools: tool-less

140 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual TX1330 M4

Power supply unit (PSU)

Figure 71: Removing the CMA stopper

ÊRemove the CMA stopper with the mounted crossbar.

ÊHold the CMA stopper, the crossbar and the CMA including cables in the one

hand.

Figure 72: Removing the PSU

ÊRemove the PSU and install the dummy cover carefully.

ÊMount the complete assembly (CMA stopper, the crossbar and the CMA)

again into the rail.

TX1330 M4 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual 141

Power supply unit (PSU)

6.3.2.1 Preliminary steps

ÊOnly when replacing a PSU in a non-redundant configuration: "Shutting

down the server" on page 53.

ÊRemove the power cord from the hot-plug PSU, see section "Disconnecting

the power cord" on page 54.

6.3.2.2 Removing a hot-plug PSU

Figure 73: Removing the PSU

ÊPush the handle of the PSU halfway upward in the direction of the arrow (1).

ÊPress in on the green locking latch (2).

ÊWhile keeping the green locking latch pressed, pull the PSU out of its bay

(3).

VCAUTION!

Never leave the bay for the hot-plug PSU empty for more than two

minutes during operation. Otherwise, excessive temperatures could

damage system components.

142 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual TX1330 M4

Power supply unit (PSU)

6.3.2.3 Installing a dummy cover

Figure 74: Installing the dummy cover

ÊInsert the dummy cover into the empty bay with the impressed arrow symbol

facing to the left (see circle).

ÊPush the PSU dummy cover into its bay until it locks in place.

VCAUTION!

Always install dummy covers into unused bays to comply with

applicable EMC regulations and satisfy cooling requirements.

6.3.2.4 Concluding steps

ÊNo steps needed.

TX1330 M4 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual 143

Power supply unit (PSU)

6.3.3 Replacing hot-plug PSUs

VCAUTION!

●When replacing a hot-plug PSU in a non-redundant PSU

configuration, the server must be switched off first.

●Ensure to replace a defective hot-plug PSU by a new module of the

same type.

Note for servers using CMA (Cable Management Arm)

Regarding of replacing PSUs, additional tasks are needed, due to an

interference between CMA stopper and the PSUs.

ÊPush the lock spring inward to unlock the CMA stopper (see figure 70).

VCAUTION!

In case of not enough space at the under side, unlock the CMA

stopper of the server below and pull out the CMA to the rear side.

ÊRemove the CMA stopper with the mounted crossbar (see figure 71).

ÊHold the CMA stopper, the crossbar and the CMA including cables in the one

hand.

ÊRemove the PSU (see figure 72) and install the new PSU carefully.

ÊMount the complete assembly (CMA stopper, the crossbar and the CMA)

again into the rail.

Customer Replaceable Unit

(CRU)

Hardware: 5 minutes

Tools: tool-less

144 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual TX1330 M4

Power supply unit (PSU)

6.3.3.1 Preliminary steps

Ê"Locating the defective server" on page 51

Ê"Locating the defective component" on page 52

ÊCheck which PSU is defective.

A PSU is defective when the PSU status indicator lights orange. For more

information, see section "Indicator on hot-plug PSU" on page 469.

ÊOnly when replacing a PSU in a non-redundant configuration: "Shutting

down the server" on page 53

ÊRemove the power cord from the defective PSU, see section "Disconnecting

the power cord" on page 54

6.3.3.2 Removing the defective hot-plug PSU

ÊRemove the hot-plug PSU, see section "Removing a hot-plug PSU" on

page 141.

6.3.3.3 Installing the new hot-plug PSU

ÊInstall the hot-plug PSU, see section "Installing a hot-plug PSU" on

page 137.

6.3.3.4 Concluding steps

ÊConnect the power cord to the new hot-plug PSU and secure it with a cable

tie, see section "Connecting the power cord" on page 78.

ÊOnly when replacing a hot-plug PSU in a non-redundant configuration:

"Switching on the server" on page 80

Ê"Performing a fan test" on page 124

TX1330 M4 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual 145

Power supply unit (PSU)

6.3.4 Replacing the power distribution board

6.3.4.1 Preliminary steps

Ê"Locating the defective server" on page 51

Ê"Suspending BitLocker functionality" on page 97

Ê"Shutting down the server" on page 53

Ê"Disconnecting the power cord" on page 54

Ê"Getting access to the component" on page 55

ÊRemove the system fan module, see section "Removing the system fan

module" on page 81

6.3.4.2 Removing the defective power distribution board

ÊRemove all PSUs, see section "Removing a hot-plug PSU" on page 141.

Field Replaceable Unit

(FRU)

Hardware: 15 minutes

Tools: tool-less

146 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual TX1330 M4

Power supply unit (PSU)

Figure 75: Disconnecting all cables from the power distribution board

ÊDisconnect all cables from the power distribution board.

Figure 76: Removing the power distribution board

ÊLoosen the captive screw (1).

ÊPush the power distribution board in direction of the arrows (2).

ÊRemove the power distribution board (3).

TX1330 M4 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual 147

Power supply unit (PSU)

6.3.4.3 Installing the new power distribution board

Figure 77: Installing the power distribution board

ÊInsert the new power distribution board (1).

ÊPush the power distribution board in direction of the arrow (5).

ÊFasten the captive screw (6).

148 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual TX1330 M4

Power supply unit (PSU)

Figure 78: Connecting the power distribution board

ÊConnect the cables to the power distribution board:

IFor the cable plans, see chapter "Appendix B" on page 477.

ÊInstall the PSUs, see section "Installing a hot-plug PSU" on page 136.

6.3.4.4 Concluding steps

ÊInstall the system fan module, see section "Installing the system fan module"

on page 83

Ê"Reassembling" on page 67

Ê"Connecting the power cord" on page 78

Ê"Switching on the server" on page 80

Ê"Resuming BitLocker functionality" on page 117

1PSU signal cable to connector "P20"

2Power cable (from backplanes) to connector "P22"

3PSU power cable (from system board) to connector "P21"

TX1330 M4 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual 149

Power supply unit (PSU)

6.4 Fujitsu battery unit (FJBU)

6.4.1 Installing the FJBU

6.4.1.1 Preliminary steps

No steps needed.

6.4.1.2 Removing the dummy cover

ÊRemove the dummy cover, see section "Removing the dummy cover" on

page 137.

Customer Replaceable Unit

(CRU)

Hardware: 5 minutes

Tools: tool-less

150 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual TX1330 M4

Power supply unit (PSU)

6.4.1.3 Installing an FJBU

Figure 79: Installing a FJBU

ÊPush the FJBU into its bay (1) as far as it will go until the locking latch snaps

in place (2).

VCAUTION!

Ensure that the FJBU properly engages in its bay and is locked in

position in order to prevent it from sliding out of the chassis during

transportation.

6.4.1.4 Concluding steps

ÊNo steps needed.

ITo execute auto shutdown after power fail, you should install the FJBU

management software. How to install and configure the FJBU

management software, see the FJBU user guide.

TX1330 M4 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual 151

Power supply unit (PSU)

6.4.2 Removing the FJBU

Note for servers using CMA (Cable Management Arm)

Regarding of replacing the FJBU, additional tasks are needed, due to an

interference between CMA stopper and the FJBU.

ÊPush the lock spring inward to unlock the CMA stopper (see figure 70).

VCAUTION!

In case of not enough space at the under side, unlock the CMA

stopper of the server below and pull out the CMA to the rear side.

ÊRemove the CMA stopper with the mounted crossbar (see figure 71).

ÊHold the CMA stopper, the crossbar and the CMA including cables in the one

hand.

ÊRemove the FJBU (see figure 72) and install the new FJBU carefully.

ÊMount the complete assembly (CMA stopper, the crossbar and the CMA)

again into the rail.

6.4.2.1 Preliminary steps

ÊNo steps needed.

Customer Replaceable Unit

(CRU)

Hardware: 5 minutes

Tools: tool-less

152 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual TX1330 M4

Power supply unit (PSU)

6.4.2.2 Removing an FJBU

Figure 80: Removing a FJBU

ÊPress in on the green locking latch (1).

ÊWhile keeping the green locking latch pressed, pull the FJBU out of its bay

(2).

VCAUTION!

Never leave the bay for the FJBU empty. Install a new FJBU or install the

dummy cover.

6.4.2.3 Installing a dummy cover

ÊInstall the dummy cover, see section "Installing a dummy cover" on

page 142.

TX1330 M4 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual 153

Power supply unit (PSU)

6.4.3 Replacing the FJBU

Note for servers using CMA (Cable Management Arm)

Regarding of replacing the FJBU, additional tasks are needed, due to an

interference between CMA stopper and the FJBU.

ÊPush the lock spring inward to unlock the CMA stopper (see figure 70).

VCAUTION!

In case of not enough space at the under side, unlock the CMA

stopper of the server below and pull out the CMA to the rear side.

ÊRemove the CMA stopper with the mounted crossbar (see figure 71).

ÊHold the CMA stopper, the crossbar and the CMA including cables in the one

hand.

ÊRemove the FJBU (see figure 72) and install the new FJBU carefully.

ÊMount the complete assembly (CMA stopper, the crossbar and the CMA)

again into the rail.

6.4.3.1 Preliminary steps

Ê"Locating the defective server" on page 51

6.4.3.2 Removing the defective FJBU

ÊRemove the FJBU, see section "Removing an FJBU" on page 152.

6.4.3.3 Installing the new FJBU

ÊInstall the FJBU, see section "Installing an FJBU" on page 150.

Customer Replaceable Unit

(CRU)

Hardware: 5 minutes

Tools: tool-less

154 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual TX1330 M4

Power supply unit (PSU)

6.4.3.4 Concluding steps

ÊNo steps needed.

TX1330 M4 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual 155

Power supply unit (PSU)

6.5 Converting a standard power supply to a

redundant power supply

The standard power supply can be replaced by a redundant power supply. The

redundant power supply consists of up to two PSUs. The upgrade kit contains

only one PSU (for PSU redundancy the second PSU must be additionally

ordered).

The upgrade kit for the redundant power supply consists of the following parts:

– PSU cage with power distribution board

– two power cables

– one hot-plug PSU

– dummy cover (if only one PSU is installed, you have to install the dummy

cover in the second bay)

– several screws

– one fan module

6.5.1 Preliminary steps

Ê"Suspending BitLocker functionality" on page 97

Ê"Shutting down the server" on page 53

Ê"Disconnecting the power cord" on page 54

Ê"Getting access to the component" on page 55

ÊRemove the system fan module, see section "Removing the system fan

module" on page 81

Field Replaceable Unit

(FRU)

Hardware: 10 minutes

Tools: Phillips PH2 / (+) No. 2 screw driver

156 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual TX1330 M4

Power supply unit (PSU)

6.5.2 Removing the standard PSU

ÊRemove the standard PSU, see section "Removing the defective standard

PSU" on page 130.

6.5.3 Installing the upgrade kit

Installing the PSU cage

Figure 81: Installing the PSU cage

ÊInsert the PSU cage into the chassis (1).

ÊPush the PSU cage towards the rear of the chassis (2).

ÊFasten the PSU cage with one screw (3).

TX1330 M4 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual 157

Power supply unit (PSU)

Figure 82: Securing the PSU cage

ÊFasten the PSU cage to the chassis with five screws (see circles)

Connecting the power distribution board

ÊConnect the cables to the power distribution board (see figure 78).

158 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual TX1330 M4

Power supply unit (PSU)

Figure 83: Connecting cables to the system board

ÊConnect the cables to the system board:

ÊRun the cables through the corresponding cable clamps (see circles).

ÊConnect the power cables to the corresponding accessible drives /

backplanes.

IFor the cable plan, see chapter "Appendix B" on page 477.

Installing hot-plug PSU and dummy cover

ÊInstall the hot-plug PSU, see section "Installing a hot-plug PSU" on

page 137.

IThe PSU must be installed in the first bay. The dummy cover must be

installed in the second bay.

ÊInstall the dummy cover, see section "Installing a dummy cover" on

page 142.

1PSU power cable to connector "PWR MAIN".

2PSU signal cable to connector "P30".

TX1330 M4 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual 159

Power supply unit (PSU)

6.5.4 Concluding steps

ÊInstall the system fan module, see section "Installing the system fan module"

on page 83

Ê"Reassembling" on page 67

Ê"Connecting the power cord" on page 78

Ê"Switching on the server" on page 80

Ê"Resuming BitLocker functionality" on page 117

160 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual TX1330 M4

Power supply unit (PSU)

TX1330 M4 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual 161

7 Hard disk drives (HDD) / solid

state drives (SSD)

Safety notes

VCAUTION!

●Before removing several HDD/SSD modules, make sure that all

HDD/SSD modules can be reinstalled into their original bay.

Otherwise, data may be lost.

●Do not touch the circuitry on boards or soldered parts. Hold circuit

boards by their metallic areas or edges.

●Before removing an HDD, wait for about 30 seconds until the disk has

stopped spinning completely.

●When an HDD is starting up, a resonant noise may be audible for a

short while. This does not indicate a failure.

●Depending on the operating system, you can configure the write

cache settings for the HDDs. If a power failure should occur while the

write cache is enabled, cached data may be lost.

●When disposing of, transferring, or returning an HDD or SSD, wipe

out the data on the drive for your own security.

●Rough handling of HDDs may damage the stored data. To cope with

any unexpected problems, always back up important data. When

backing up data to another HDD, you should make backups on a file

or partition basis.

●Be careful not to hit the HDD or bring it into contact with metallic

objects.

●Handle the HDD and SSD on a shock and vibration free surface.

●Do not use the HDD and SSD in extremely hot or cold locations, or

locations with extreme temperature changes.

●Never attempt to disassemble the HDD or SSD.

●For more information, see chapter "Important information" on

page 37.

162 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual TX1330 M4

Hard disk drives (HDD) / solid state drives (SSD)

7.1 Basic information

The HDD or SSD and the installation frame together make up the HDD module

or SSD module.

The server is shipped with one of the following HDD or SSD subsystems:

– 3.5-inch HDD subsystem:

Up to four, eight or 12 3.5-inch SAS/SATA HDD modules can be installed.

The HDD module is connected to the HDD backplane wirelessly. This allows

HDD modules to be plugged in or pulled out easily.

If the server has a corresponding RAID configuration, defective HDD/SSD

modules can also be replaced during operation.

– 2.5-inch HDD/SSD subsystem:

Up to eight, 16, or 24 2.5-inch SAS/SATA HDD/SSD modules can be

installed. The HDD/SSD module is connected to the HDD backplane

wirelessly. This allows HDD/SSD modules to be plugged in or pulled out

easily. I

f the server has a corresponding RAID configuration, defective HDD/SSD

modules can also be replaced during operation.

IIn the configuration with up to 12x 3.5-inch HDDs or 24x 2.5-inch

HDD/SSDs, up to four PCIe SSDs can be installed in the 8x 2.5

HDD/SSD extension box.

IFor information on RAID controllers controlling the HDD/SSD modules

see chapter "Expansion cards and backup units" on page 269.

TX1330 M4 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual 163

Hard disk drives (HDD) / solid state drives (SSD)

IIn the following sections the figures are shown for the TX1330 M4 (rack

model).

The only difference to a TX1330 M4 (floorstand model) in horizontal

position: the accessible drive cage is turned around clockwise for 90

degrees.

Figure 84: Rack model versus floorstand model with drive cage turned

164 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual TX1330 M4

Hard disk drives (HDD) / solid state drives (SSD)

7.2 Handling HDDs or SSDs without installation

frame

7.2.1 2.5-inch HDD/SSD and 2.5-inch installation frame

Installing a 2.5-inch HDD/SSD in a 2.5-inch installation frame

Figure 85: Installing the 2.5-inch HDD/SSD in the 2.5-inch installation frame (A)

ÊLay the 2.5-inch HDD/SSD into the 2.5-inch installation frame as shown.

Customer Replaceable Unit

(CRU)

Hardware: 5 minutes

Tools: Phillips PH1 / (+) No. 1 screw driver

TX1330 M4 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual 165

Hard disk drives (HDD) / solid state drives (SSD)

Figure 86: Installing the 2.5-inch HDD/SSD in the 2.5-inch installation frame (B)

ÊFasten the 2.5-inch HDD/SSD with four screws.

Removing a 2.5-inch HDD/SSD from a 2.5-inch installation frame

ÊProceed in reversed order.

166 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual TX1330 M4

Hard disk drives (HDD) / solid state drives (SSD)

7.2.2 2.5-inch HDD/SSD and 3.5-inch installation frame

IIn order to use 2.5-inch HDD/SSD, you can install a 2.5-inch HDD/SSD

in the 3.5-inch installation frame.

Installing a 2.5-inch HDD/SSD in a 3.5-inch installation frame

Figure 87: 2.5-inch HDD/SSD and 3.5-inch installation frame

ÊLay the 2.5-inch HDD/SSD into the 3.5-inch installation frame as shown.

Customer Replaceable Unit

(CRU)

Hardware: 5 minutes

Tools: Phillips PH1 / (+) No. 1 screw driver

TX1330 M4 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual 167

Hard disk drives (HDD) / solid state drives (SSD)

Figure 88: Installing the 2.5-inch HDD/SSD in the 3.5-inch installation frame (A)

Figure 89: Installing the 2.5-inch HDD/SSD in the 3.5-inch installation frame (B)

ÊFasten the 2.5-inch HDD/SSD with four screws.

Removing a 2.5-inch HDD/SSD from a 3.5-inch installation frame

ÊPlease proceed in reversed order.

168 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual TX1330 M4

Hard disk drives (HDD) / solid state drives (SSD)

7.2.3 3.5-inch HDD and 3.5-inch installation frame

Installing a 3.5-inch HDD in a 3.5-inch installation frame

Figure 90: Installing the 3.5-inch HDD in the 3.5-inch installation frame (A)

ÊLay the 3.5-inch HDD into the 3.5-inch installation frame as shown.

Customer Replaceable Unit

(CRU)

Hardware: 5 minutes

Tools: Phillips PH1 / (+) No. 1 screw driver

TX1330 M4 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual 169

Hard disk drives (HDD) / solid state drives (SSD)

Figure 91: Installing the 3.5-inch HDD in the 3.5-inch installation frame (B)

ÊFasten the 3.5-inch HDD with four screws.

Removing a 3.5-inch HDD from a 3.5-inch installation frame

ÊPlease proceed in reversed order.

170 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual TX1330 M4

Hard disk drives (HDD) / solid state drives (SSD)

7.3 3.5-inch HDD configurations

7.3.1 Equipping the 3.5-inch HDD bays

The HDD bays can be equipped with 3.5-inch HDD modules or 2.5-inch

HDD/SSD modules, see section "2.5-inch HDD/SSD and 3.5-inch installation

frame" on page 166.

7.3.2 Backplane overview

Figure 92: 3.5-inch HDD SAS backplanes - rack model

Figure 93: 3.5-inch HDD SAS backplanes - floorstand model

1SAS backplane 1 in HDD cage 1 (basic configuration)

2SAS backplane 2 in HDD cage 2 (optional)

3SAS backplane 3 in optional 4x 3.5-inch HDD extension box

TX1330 M4 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual 171

Hard disk drives (HDD) / solid state drives (SSD)

7.3.3 Configuration with up to four HDD modules

Figure 94: Configuration with up to four 3.5-inch HDDs

IThe HDD numbering as listed in the ServerView RAID Manager differs

from the HDD mounting order:

With one SAS controller

Position Logical drive

number

ServerView RAID Manager display name

(Enclosure number: Port number)

[0] 0 Vendor Product (0)

[1] 1 Vendor Product (1)

[2] 2 Vendor Product (2)

[3] 3 Vendor Product (3)

172 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual TX1330 M4

Hard disk drives (HDD) / solid state drives (SSD)

7.3.4 Configuration with up to eight HDD modules

Figure 95: Configuration with up to eight 3.5-inch HDDs

With one SAS controller

Position Logical drive

number

ServerView RAID Manager display name

(Enclosure number: Port number)

[0] 0 Vendor Product (0)

[1] 1 Vendor Product (1)

[2] 2 Vendor Product (2)

[3] 3 Vendor Product (3)

[4] 4 Vendor Product (4)

[5] 5 Vendor Product (5)

[6] 6 Vendor Product (6)

[7] 7 Vendor Product (7)

TX1330 M4 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual 173

Hard disk drives (HDD) / solid state drives (SSD)

7.3.5 Configuration with up to 12 HDD modules

Figure 96: Configuration with up to 12 3.5-inch HDDs

With SAS expander board and one SAS controller

Position Logical drive

number

ServerView RAID Manager display name

(Enclosure number: Port number)

[0] 0 Vendor Product (0)

[1] 1 Vendor Product (1)

[2] 2 Vendor Product (2)

[3] 3 Vendor Product (3)

[4] 4 Vendor Product (4)

[5] 5 Vendor Product (5)

[6] 6 Vendor Product (6)

[7] 7 Vendor Product (7)

[8] 8 Vendor Product (1:8)

[9] 9 Vendor Product (1:9)

[10] 10 Vendor Product (1:10)

[11] 11 Vendor Product (1:11)

174 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual TX1330 M4

Hard disk drives (HDD) / solid state drives (SSD)

7.3.6 Configuration with additional PCIe SSDs

Figure 97: Configuration with up to eight 3.5-inch HDDs/SSDs and up to four PCIe SSDs

With SAS expander board and one SAS controller

With the 4x 2.5-inch PCIe SSD backplane

Position Logical drive

number

ServerView RAID Manager display name

(Enclosure number: Port number)

[0] 0 Vendor Product (1:0)

[1] 1 Vendor Product (1:1)

[2] 2 Vendor Product (1:2)

[3] 3 Vendor Product (1:3)

[4] 4 Vendor Product (1:4)

[5] 5 Vendor Product (1:5)

[6] 6 Vendor Product (1:6)

[7] 7 Vendor Product (1:7)

Position Logical drive

number

ServerView RAID Manager display name

(Enclosure number: Port number)

[0] 16 SSD PCIe3 Main (1):

SSD PCIe3 Capacity Main 2.5" H-P EP (0)

[1] 17 SSD PCIe3 Main (2):

SSD PCIe3 Capacity Main 2.5" H-P EP (0)

PCIe SSD

HDD/SSD

TX1330 M4 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual 175

Hard disk drives (HDD) / solid state drives (SSD)

[2] 18 SSD PCIe3 Main (3):

SSD PCIe3 Capacity Main 2.5" H-P EP (0)

[3] 19 SSD PCIe3 Main (4):

SSD PCIe3 Capacity Main 2.5" H-P EP (0)

Position Logical drive

number

ServerView RAID Manager display name

(Enclosure number: Port number)

176 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual TX1330 M4

Hard disk drives (HDD) / solid state drives (SSD)

7.3.7 Installing 3.5-inch HDD modules

7.3.7.1 Preliminary steps

ÊIf applicable, "Getting access to the component" on page 55.

ÊLocate the correct drive bay, see section "3.5-inch HDD configurations" on

page 170.

7.3.7.2 Removing a 3.5-inch HDD dummy module

Figure 98: Removing a 3.5-inch dummy module

ÊPress both tabs together (1) and pull the dummy module out of its bay (2).

VCAUTION!

Save the dummy module for future use.

Always replace dummy modules into unused HDD bays to comply

with applicable EMC regulations and satisfy cooling requirements.

Customer Replaceable Unit

(CRU)

Hardware:

5minutes

Tools: tool-less

TX1330 M4 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual 177

Hard disk drives (HDD) / solid state drives (SSD)

7.3.7.3 Installing a 3.5-inch HDD module

Figure 99: Opening the 3.5-inch HDD module locking lever

ÊPinch the green locking clip (1) and open the locking lever (2).

Figure 100: Installing the 3.5-inch HDD module

ÊInsert the HDD module into a drive bay and carefully push back as far as it

will go (1).

ÊClose the locking lever to lock the HDD in place (2).

ÊWhen using a RAID array, add the additional HDD/SSD to the RAID array.

IConfiguring the RAID array, see the documentation of the RAID

controller, used in your configuration, see section "Documents you

need at hand" on page 33.

178 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual TX1330 M4

Hard disk drives (HDD) / solid state drives (SSD)

7.3.7.4 Concluding steps

ÊIf applicable, "Reassembling" on page 67.

IPlease refer to your controller manual to configure the installed HDD.

7.3.8 Removing 3.5-inch HDD modules

7.3.8.1 Preliminary steps

ÊIf the HDD module to be removed is combined into a RAID array, proceed

as follows:

Customer Replaceable Unit

(CRU)

Hardware:

5minutes

Tools: tool-less

RAID level Procedure

RAID 0

VCAUTION!

RAID 0 provides no data redundancy.

In case of an HDD/SSD module is defect, all data

are lost!

RAID 1

RAID 5

Removing an HDD from a RAID 1 or RAID 5 array will not

result in data loss.

However, the removed drive needs to be replaced

immediately by an HDD module of the same or larger

capacity.

IAfter replacing the HDD module, RAID rebuild will

be performed as a background process, see

section "Performing a RAID array rebuild" on

page 117.

TX1330 M4 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual 179

Hard disk drives (HDD) / solid state drives (SSD)

In order to permanently remove an operational HDD module that is part of a

RAID array from the server, you first need to delete the array using

ServerView RAID Manager.

VCAUTION!

All data on all HDDs in the array will be lost when deleting the RAID

array! Be sure to back up your data before deleting a RAID array.

For more information, see the "ServerView Suite RAID Management"

user guide.

ÊIf applicable, "Getting access to the component" on page 55.

7.3.8.2 Removing a 3.5-inch HDD module

ÊPinch the green locking clips and open the locking lever (see figure 99).

ÊPull the HDD module out a few centimeters.

ÊWait about 30 seconds to allow the HDD to spin down.

IThis period is necessary for the RAID controller to recognize that an

HDD module has been removed and for the HDD to come to a stop.

ÊPull the HDD module completely out of its bay.

7.3.8.3 Installing a 3.5-inch HDD dummy module

VCAUTION!

If the removed HDD module is not replaced immediately, always replace

a dummy module into the unused HDD bay to comply with applicable

EMC regulations and satisfy cooling requirements.

180 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual TX1330 M4

Hard disk drives (HDD) / solid state drives (SSD)

Figure 101: Installing a 3.5-inch HDD dummy module

ÊPush the dummy module into the empty bay until it engages.

7.3.8.4 Concluding steps

ÊIf applicable, "Reassembling" on page 67.

TX1330 M4 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual 181

Hard disk drives (HDD) / solid state drives (SSD)

7.3.9 Replacing a 3.5-inch HDD module

VCAUTION!

●Only remove an HDD/SSD module during operation if the drive is not

currently being accessed. Observe the indicators for the

corresponding HDD/SSD modules, see section "Indicators on the

hot-plug HDD/SSD module" on page 463.

●An HDD/SSD module can be replaced while the system is in

operation.

RAID configuration with a RAID controller:

Modular Host Bus Adapter with "Integrated RAID" (IR). RAID levels 0

and 1 are supported for internal HDD configurations.

– Modular RAID 0/1 controller with "MegaRAID functionality"

(integrated MegaRAID). RAID levels 0, 1,10,5 and 50 are

supported for internal HDD configurations.

– Modular RAID 5/6 controller with "MegaRAID functionality"

(MegaRAID). RAID levels 0, 1, 10, 5, 50, 6 and 60 are supported

for internal HDD configurations. As an option, a flash backup unit

(FBU) can save the memory content even if the power fails.

Cache memory size of up to 8 GB is available.

RAID configuration without a RAID controller:

Please follow the instruction of each software e.g. VSAN, Storage

Spaces, and Storage Spaces Direct, provided separately to use the

software RAID function of OS or Hypervisor.

●All HDD/SSD modules (drives) must be uniquely identified so that

they can be reinstalled in their original bays later. If this is not done,

existing data can be lost.

Customer Replaceable Unit

(CRU)

Hardware: 5 minutes

Tools: Installation frame included: tool-less

Installation frame excluded: Phillips (+1) No. 1 screw driver

182 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual TX1330 M4

Hard disk drives (HDD) / solid state drives (SSD)

7.3.9.1 Preliminary steps

Ê"Locating the defective server" on page 51

ÊIf applicable, "Getting access to the component" on page 55.

Ê"Locating the defective component" on page 52

7.3.9.2 Removing a 3.5-inch HDD module

ÊRemove the HDD module, see section "Removing a 3.5-inch HDD module"

on page 179.

ÊIf applicable, remove the HDD from the installation frame, see section

"Handling HDDs or SSDs without installation frame" on page 164.

7.3.9.3 Installing a 3.5-inch HDD module

ÊIf applicable, install the HDD in the installation frame, see section "Handling

HDDs or SSDs without installation frame" on page 164.

ÊInstall the HDD module, see section "Installing a 3.5-inch HDD module" on

page 182.

7.3.9.4 Concluding steps

ÊIf applicable, "Reassembling" on page 67.

ÊIf the HDD/SSD is configured using a RAID controller with a RAID level

higher than "0", the rebuild will start automatically, see section"Performing a

RAID array rebuild" on page 117.

TX1330 M4 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual 183

Hard disk drives (HDD) / solid state drives (SSD)

7.3.10 Replacing a 3.5-inch backplane

7.3.10.1 Preliminary steps

Ê"Locating the defective server" on page 51

Ê"Shutting down the server" on page 53

Ê"Disconnecting the power cord" on page 54

Ê "Getting access to the component" on page 55

ÊIf applicable, "Removing the bay covers" on page 64

ÊRelease all HDD/SSD modules and pull them out a few centimeters, see

section "Removing 3.5-inch HDD modules" on page 178

VThe HDD modules need not to be removed completely. But if you

want to remove them nevertheless, check if all HDD modules are

uniquely identified so that you can reinsert them into their original

bays.

ÊRelease all dummy modules and pull them out a few centimeters, see

section "Removing a 3.5-inch HDD dummy module" on page 176

ÊDisconnect all cables from the defective SAS backplane.

7.3.10.2 Removing the 3.5-inch HDD bay top cover

IThe 3.5-inch HDD front cover does not need to be removed in order to

replace a 3.5-inch HDD SAS backplane. In the figures, the front cover

has been removed for illustration purposes only.

Field Replaceable Unit

(FRU)

Hardware:15 minutes

Tools: Phillips PH2 / (+) No. 2 screw driver

184 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual TX1330 M4

Hard disk drives (HDD) / solid state drives (SSD)

Figure 102: Removing the 3.5-inch HDD bay top cover (A)

ÊRemove five screws from the 3.5-inch HDD bay top cover (see blue circles).

ÊRemove one screw from the intrusion switch holder (see orange circle).

TX1330 M4 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual 185

Hard disk drives (HDD) / solid state drives (SSD)

Figure 103: Removing the 3.5-inch HDD bay top cover (B)

ÊSlide back the intrusion switch holder until it disengages from the HDD bay

top cover (1).

ÊRemove the intrusion switch holder (2) and set aside.

ÊLeave the intrusion switch cable connected to the system board.

186 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual TX1330 M4

Hard disk drives (HDD) / solid state drives (SSD)

Figure 104: Removing the 3.5-inch HDD bay top cover (C)

ÊCarefully fold up the 3.5-inch HDD bay top cover to disengage it from the

SAS backplane below (1).

ÊRemove the 3.5-inch HDD bay top cover from the chassis (2).

TX1330 M4 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual 187

Hard disk drives (HDD) / solid state drives (SSD)

7.3.10.3 Removing a 3.5-inch HDD SAS backplane

Figure 105: Removing the 3.5-inch HDD SAS backplane

ÊPull up the SAS backplane and remove it from the HDD bay in a vertical

motion.

IPlease be careful not to damage the components of the SAS

backplane by the metal frame of HDD bay (see close-up).

188 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual TX1330 M4

Hard disk drives (HDD) / solid state drives (SSD)

7.3.10.4 Installing a 3.5-inch HDD SAS backplane

Figure 106: Installing the new 4x 3.5-inch HDD SAS backplane (A)

ÊFit the SAS backplane into the guide on the outer wall of the HDD bay (see

close-up) and lower it into the bottom rim.

IPlease be careful not to damage the components of the SAS

backplane by the metal frame of HDD bay (see close-up).

TX1330 M4 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual 189

Hard disk drives (HDD) / solid state drives (SSD)

Figure 107: Installing the new 4x 3.5-inch HDD SAS backplane (B)

ÊEnsure that the 4x 3.5-inch HDD SAS backplane is properly seated into the

bottom rim and side guide (see arrows).

ÊEnsure that the upper edge of the SAS backplane is flush with the HDD bay

divider wall (see dashed line).

190 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual TX1330 M4

Hard disk drives (HDD) / solid state drives (SSD)

7.3.10.5 Installing the 3.5-inch HDD bay top cover

Figure 108: Installing the 3.5-inch HDD bay top cover (A)

ÊLower the 3.5-inch HDD bay top cover onto the HDD bays (1).

ÊPlace the 3.5-inch HDD bay top cover on the latches of the 4x 3.5-inch HDD

SAS backplane (2).

VCAUTION!

Ensure that the latches of the 4x 3.5-inch HDD SAS backplane are

properly seated in the openings in the HDD bay top cover.

TX1330 M4 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual 191

Hard disk drives (HDD) / solid state drives (SSD)

Figure 109: Installing the 3.5-inch HDD bay top cover (B)

ÊPlace the intrusion switch holder on the HDD bay top cover as shown (1).

ÊPush the intrusion switch holder under the front chassis rim so that the hole

of screws can match with (2).

Figure 110: Installing the 3.5-inch HDD bay top cover (C)

ÊFasten the HDD bay top cover to the chassis with five screws (see blue

circles).

ÊFasten the intrusion switch holder on the HDD bay top cover with one screw

(see orange circle).

192 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual TX1330 M4

Hard disk drives (HDD) / solid state drives (SSD)

7.3.10.6 Connecting cables

Figure 111: Connecting cables to the SAS backplane (example 4. 3.5-inch HDDs)

ÊConnect the cables to the backplane:

IFor the cable plan, see chapter "Appendix B" on page 477.

7.3.10.7 Concluding steps

ÊInsert all HDD/SSD modules, see section "Installing 3.5-inch HDD modules"

on page 176.

IMake sure that you reinstall the HDD/SSD module in the bay it was

located before the HDD backplane replacement.

Ê"Installing the SAS expander board" on page 251

Ê"Installing a system fan" on page 266

Ê"Reassembling" on page 67

Ê"Connecting the power cord" on page 78

Ê"Switching on the server" on page 80

1If applicable, riser card power cable

2If applicable, OOB cable

3SAS cable

4Power cable

TX1330 M4 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual 193

Hard disk drives (HDD) / solid state drives (SSD)

7.3.11 Upgrading configuration from up to four to up to

eight 3.5-inch HDDs

7.3.11.1 Preliminary steps

Ê"Suspending BitLocker functionality" on page 97

Ê"Shutting down the server" on page 53

Ê"Disconnecting the power cord" on page 54

Ê"Getting access to the component" on page 55

ÊRemove all HDD/SSD modules, see section "Removing 2.5-inch HDD/SSD

modules" on page 207.

7.3.11.2 Removing the 3.5-inch HDD bay top cover

ÊRemove the 3.5-inch HDD bay top cover, see section "Removing the 3.5-

inch HDD bay top cover" on page 183).

Upgrade and Repair Unit

(URU)

Hardware:20 minutes

Tools: Phillips PH2 / (+) No. 2 screw driver

194 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual TX1330 M4

Hard disk drives (HDD) / solid state drives (SSD)

7.3.11.3 Removing the 4x 3.5-inch HDD front panel

Figure 112: Removing the 4x 3.5-inch HDD front panel

ÊRemove four screws from the 4x 3.5-inch HDD front panel (see circles).

ÊPull up the 4x 3.5-inch HDD front panel to disengage it from the chassis (see

arrow).

ÊRemove the 4x 3.5-inch HDD front panel.

TX1330 M4 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual 195

Hard disk drives (HDD) / solid state drives (SSD)

7.3.11.4 Installing the second 3.5-inch HDD SAS backplane

Figure 113: Installing the second 3.5-inch HDD SAS backplane

ÊFit the SAS backplane into the guide on the outer wall of the HDD bay (see

close-up) and lower it into the bottom rim.

IPlease be careful not to damage the components of the SAS

backplane by the metal frame of HDD bay (see close-up).

ÊEnsure that the SAS backplane is properly seated into the bottom rim and

side guide.

ÊEnsure that the upper edge of the SAS backplane is flush with the HDD bay

divider wall (see dashed line).

196 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual TX1330 M4

Hard disk drives (HDD) / solid state drives (SSD)

7.3.11.5 Installing the 8x 3.5-inch HDD front panel

Figure 114: Securing the 8x 3.5-inch HDD front panel

ÊFit the three hooks on the HDD front panel into the slots in the server front

(see orange arrows).

ÊFirmly press down on the HDD front panel until its upper edge is flush with

the chassis (see blue arrow).

ÊFasten the HDD front panel to the server front with four M3 x 4.5 mm screws

(see circles).

7.3.11.6 Installing the 3.5-inch HDD bay top cover

ÊInstall the HDD bay top cover, see section "Installing the 3.5-inch HDD bay

top cover" on page 190.

TX1330 M4 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual 197

Hard disk drives (HDD) / solid state drives (SSD)

7.3.11.7 Connecting cables

Figure 115: Connecting cables to the SAS backplane 2 (example 8x 3.5-inch HDDs)

ÊConnect the cables to the backplane:

IFor more information about connecting SAS cables to the corresponding

controller see section "Expansion cards and riser card" on page 279.

IFor the cable plan, see chapter "Appendix B" on page 477.

1If applicable, SAS expander board power cable

2If applicable, OOB cable

3SAS cable

4Power cable

198 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual TX1330 M4

Hard disk drives (HDD) / solid state drives (SSD)

7.3.11.8 Concluding steps

ÊInstall all removed HDD/SSD modules, see section "Installing 2.5-inch

HDD/SSD modules" on page 205.

IFor detailed information on HDD mounting order, see section "3.5-

inch HDD configurations" on page 170.

Ê"Reassembling" on page 67

Ê"Connecting the power cord" on page 78

Ê"Resuming BitLocker functionality" on page 117

Ê"Switching on the server" on page 80

TX1330 M4 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual 199

Hard disk drives (HDD) / solid state drives (SSD)

7.4 2.5-inch HDD/SSD configurations

7.4.1 Backplane overviews

Figure 116: Example three backplanes - rack model

Figure 117: Example three backplanes - floorstand model

IThis numbering is based on "Configuration with up to 24 HDDs/SSDs" on

page 202.

1SAS backplane 1 in HDD cage 1 (basic configuration)

2SAS backplane 2 in optional HDD cage 2

3SAS backplane 3 in optional 8x 2.5-inch HDD/SSD extension box

200 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual TX1330 M4

Hard disk drives (HDD) / solid state drives (SSD)

7.4.2 Configuration with up to eight HDDs/SSDs

Figure 118: Configuration with up to eight 2.5-inch HDDs/SSDs

With one SAS controller

Position Logical drive number ServerView RAID Manager display name

(Enclosure number: Port number)

[0] 0 Vendor Product (0)

[1] 1 Vendor Product (1)

[2] 2 Vendor Product (2)

[3] 3 Vendor Product (3)

[4] 4 Vendor Product (4)

[5] 5 Vendor Product (5)

[6] 6 Vendor Product (6)

[7] 7 Vendor Product (7)

TX1330 M4 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual 201

Hard disk drives (HDD) / solid state drives (SSD)

7.4.3 Configuration with up to 16 HDDs/SSDs

Figure 119: Configuration with up to 16 2.5-inch HDDs/SSDs

With SAS expander board and one SAS controller

Position Logical drive number ServerView RAID Manager display name

(Enclosure number: Port number)

[0] 0 Vendor Product (0)

[1] 1 Vendor Product (1)

[2] 2 Vendor Product (2)

[3] 3 Vendor Product (3)

[4] 4 Vendor Product (4)

[5] 5 Vendor Product (5)

[6] 6 Vendor Product (6)

[7] 7 Vendor Product (7)

[8] 8 Vendor Product (8)

[9] 9 Vendor Product (9)

[10] 10 Vendor Product (10)

[11] 11 Vendor Product (11)

[12] 12 Vendor Product (12)

[13] 13 Vendor Product (13)

[14] 14 Vendor Product (14)

[15] 15 Vendor Product (15)

202 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual TX1330 M4

Hard disk drives (HDD) / solid state drives (SSD)

7.4.4 Configuration with up to 24 HDDs/SSDs

Figure 120: Configuration with up to 24 2.5-inch HDDs/SSDs with HDD extension box

With SAS expander board and one SAS controller

Position Logical drive

number

ServerView RAID Manager display name

(Enclosure number: Port number)

[0] 0 Vendor Product (1:0)

[1] 1 Vendor Product (1:1)

[2] 2 Vendor Product (1:2)

[3] 3 Vendor Product (1:3)

[4] 4 Vendor Product (1:4)

[5] 5 Vendor Product (1:5)

[6] 6 Vendor Product (1:6)

[7] 7 Vendor Product (1:7)

[8] 8 Vendor Product (1:8)

[9] 9 Vendor Product (1:9)

[10] 10 Vendor Product (1:10)

[11] 11 Vendor Product (1:11)

[12] 12 Vendor Product (1:12)

[13] 13 Vendor Product (1:13)

[14] 14 Vendor Product (1:14)

TX1330 M4 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual 203

Hard disk drives (HDD) / solid state drives (SSD)

7.4.5 Configuration with additional PCIe SSDs

Figure 121: Configuration with up to 16 2.5-inch HDDs/SSDs and up to four PCIe SSDs

With SAS expander board and one SAS controller

[15] 15 Vendor Product (1:15)

[16] 16 Vendor Product (1:16)

[17] 17 Vendor Product (1:17)

[18] 18 Vendor Product (1:18)

[19] 19 Vendor Product (1:19)

[20] 20 Vendor Product (1:20)

[21] 21 Vendor Product (1:21)

[22] 22 Vendor Product (1:22)

[23] 23 Vendor Product (1:23)

Position Logical drive

number

ServerView RAID Manager display name

(Enclosure number: Port number)

[0] 0 Vendor Product (1:0)

[1] 1 Vendor Product (1:1)

[2] 2 Vendor Product (1:2)

[3] 3 Vendor Product (1:3)

Position Logical drive

number

ServerView RAID Manager display name

(Enclosure number: Port number)

HDD/SSD PCIe SSD

204 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual TX1330 M4

Hard disk drives (HDD) / solid state drives (SSD)

With the 4x 2.5-inch PCIe SSD backplane

[4] 4 Vendor Product (1:4)

[5] 5 Vendor Product (1:5)

[6] 6 Vendor Product (1:6)

[7] 7 Vendor Product (1:7)

[8] 8 Vendor Product (1:8)

[9] 9 Vendor Product (1:9)

[10] 10 Vendor Product (1:10)

[11] 11 Vendor Product (1:11)

[12] 12 Vendor Product (1:12)

[13] 13 Vendor Product (1:13)

[14] 14 Vendor Product (1:14)

[15] 15 Vendor Product (1:15)

Position Logical drive

number

ServerView RAID Manager display name

(Enclosure number: Port number)

[0] 16 SSD PCIe3 Main (1):

SSD PCIe3 Capacity Main 2.5" H-P EP (0)

[1] 17 SSD PCIe3 Main (2):

SSD PCIe3 Capacity Main 2.5" H-P EP (0)

[2] 18 SSD PCIe3 Main (3):

SSD PCIe3 Capacity Main 2.5" H-P EP (0)

[3] 19 SSD PCIe3 Main (4):

SSD PCIe3 Capacity Main 2.5" H-P EP (0)

Position Logical drive

number

ServerView RAID Manager display name

(Enclosure number: Port number)

TX1330 M4 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual 205

Hard disk drives (HDD) / solid state drives (SSD)

7.4.6 Installing 2.5-inch HDD/SSD modules

7.4.6.1 Preliminary steps

ÊIf applicable, "Getting access to the component" on page 55.

ÊLocate the correct drive bay, see section "2.5-inch HDD/SSD configurations"

on page 199.

7.4.6.2 Removing a 2.5-inch HDD/SSD dummy module

Figure 122: Removing a 2.5-inch HDD/SSD dummy module

ÊPress both tabs together (1) and pull the dummy module out of its bay (2).

VCAUTION!

Keep the dummy module for future use.

Always replace dummy modules into unused HDD/SSD bays to comply

with applicable EMC regulations and satisfy cooling requirements.

Customer Replaceable Unit

(CRU)

Hardware: 5 minutes

Tools: tool-less

206 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual TX1330 M4

Hard disk drives (HDD) / solid state drives (SSD)

7.4.6.3 Installing a 2.5-inch HDD/SSD module

Figure 123: Opening the 2.5-inch HDD/SSD module locking lever

ÊPinch the green locking clips (1) and open the locking lever (2).

Figure 124: Installing the 2.5-inch HDD/SSD module

ÊInsert the HDD/SSD module into a drive bay and carefully push back as far

as it will go (1).

ÊClose the locking lever to lock the HDD in place (2).

ÊWhen using a RAID array, add the additional HDD/SSD to the RAID array.

IConfiguring the RAID array, see the documentation of the RAID

controller, used in your configuration, see section "Documents you

need at hand" on page 33.

TX1330 M4 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual 207

Hard disk drives (HDD) / solid state drives (SSD)

7.4.6.4 Concluding steps

ÊIf applicable, "Reassembling" on page 67

7.4.7 Removing 2.5-inch HDD/SSD modules

7.4.7.1 Preliminary steps

ÊIf the HDD/SSD module to be removed is combined into a RAID array,

please proceed as follows:

In order to permanently remove an operational HDD module that is part of a

RAID array from the server, you first need to delete the array using

ServerView RAID Manager.

Customer Replaceable Unit

(CRU)

Hardware: 5 minutes

Tools: tool-less

RAID level Procedure

RAID 0

VCAUTION!

RAID 0 provides no data redundancy.

In case of an HDD module is defect, all data are

lost!

RAID 1

RAID 5

Removing an HDD module from a RAID 1 or RAID 5 array

will not result in data loss.

However, the removed drive needs to be replaced

immediately by an HDD module of the same or larger

capacity.

IAfter replacing the HDD module, RAID rebuild will

be performed as a background process see

section "Performing a RAID array rebuild" on

page 117.

208 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual TX1330 M4

Hard disk drives (HDD) / solid state drives (SSD)

VCAUTION!

All data on all HDDs/SSDs in the array will be lost when deleting the

array! Be sure to back up your data before deleting a RAID array.

For more information, refer to the "ServerView Suite RAID

Management" user guide.

ÊIf applicable, "Getting access to the component" on page 55.

7.4.7.2 Removing a 2.5-inch HDD/SSD module

ÊPinch the green locking clips and open the locking lever (see figure 118 on

page 200).

ÊPull the HDD/SSD module out a few centimeters.

ÊWait about 30 seconds to allow the HDD to spin down.

IThis is not necessary when removing an SSD.

IThis period is necessary for the RAID controller to recognize that an

HDD module has been removed and for the HDD to come to a stop.

ÊPull the HDD/SSD module completely out of its bay.

TX1330 M4 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual 209

Hard disk drives (HDD) / solid state drives (SSD)

7.4.7.3 Installing a 2.5-inch HDD/SSD dummy module

VCAUTION!

If the removed HDD/SSD module is not replaced immediately, always

replace a dummy module into the unused HDD/SSD bay to comply with

applicable EMC regulations and satisfy cooling requirements.

Figure 125: Installing a 2.5-inch HDD/SSD dummy module

ÊPush the HDD dummy module into the drive bay until it locks in place.

7.4.7.4 Concluding steps

ÊIf applicable, "Reassembling" on page 67

210 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual TX1330 M4

Hard disk drives (HDD) / solid state drives (SSD)

7.4.8 Replacing a 2.5-inch HDD/SSD module

VCAUTION!

●Only remove an HDD/SSD module during operation if the drive is not

currently being accessed. Observe the indicators for the

corresponding HDD/SSD modules, see section "Indicators on the

hot-plug HDD/SSD module" on page 463.

●An HDD/SSD module can be replaced while the system is in

operation.

RAID configuration with a RAID controller:

Modular Host Bus Adapter with "Integrated RAID" (IR). RAID levels 0

and 1 are supported for internal HDD configurations.

– Modular RAID 0/1 controller with "MegaRAID functionality"

(integrated MegaRAID). RAID levels 0, 1, 10, 5 and 50 are

supported for internal HDD configurations.

– Modular RAID 5/6 controller with "MegaRAID functionality"

(MegaRAID). RAID levels 0, 1, 10, 5, 50, 6 and 60 are supported

for internal HDD configurations. As an option, a flash backup unit

(FBU) can save the memory content even if the power fails.

Cache memory size of up to 8 GB is available.

RAID configuration without a RAID controller:

Please follow the instruction of each software e.g. VSAN, Storage

Spaces, and Storage Spaces Direct, provided separately to use the

software RAID function of OS or Hypervisor.

●All HDD/SSD modules (drives) must be uniquely identified so that

they can be reinstalled in their original bays later. If this is not done,

existing data can be lost.

Customer Replaceable Unit

(CRU)

Hardware: 5 minutes

Tools: Installation frame included: tool-less

Installation frame excluded: Phillips (+1) No. 1 screw driver

TX1330 M4 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual 211

Hard disk drives (HDD) / solid state drives (SSD)

7.4.8.1 Preliminary steps

Ê"Locating the defective server" on page 51

ÊIf applicable, "Getting access to the component" on page 55.

Ê"Locating the defective component" on page 52

7.4.8.2 Removing the defective 2.5-inch HDD/SSD module

ÊRemove the HDD/SSD module, see section "Removing a 2.5-inch

HDD/SSD module" on page 208.

ÊIf applicable, remove the HDD/SSD from the installation frame, see section

"Handling HDDs or SSDs without installation frame" on page 164.

7.4.8.3 Installing the new 2.5-inch HDD/SSD module

ÊIf applicable, install the HDD/SSD in the installation frame, see section

"Handling HDDs or SSDs without installation frame" on page 164.

ÊInstall the HDD/SSD module, see section "Installing 2.5-inch HDD/SSD

modules" on page 205.

7.4.8.4 Concluding steps

ÊIf the HDD/SSD is configured using a RAID controller with a RAID level

higher than "0", the rebuild will start automatically, see section"Performing a

RAID array rebuild" on page 117.

ÊIf applicable, "Reassembling" on page 67

212 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual TX1330 M4

Hard disk drives (HDD) / solid state drives (SSD)

7.4.9 Replacing a 2.5-inch backplane

7.4.9.1 Preliminary steps

Ê"Locating the defective server" on page 51

Ê"Shutting down the server" on page 53

Ê"Disconnecting the power cord" on page 54

Ê"Getting access to the component" on page 55

ÊRelease all HDD/SSD modules and pull them out a few centimeters, see

section "Removing 2.5-inch HDD/SSD modules" on page 207.

VCUATION!

The HDD modules need not to be removed completely. But if you

want to remove them nevertheless, check if all HDD modules are

uniquely identified so that you can reinsert them into their original

bays.

ÊRelease all dummy modules and pull them out a few centimeters, see

section "Removing a 3.5-inch HDD dummy module" on page 176

Ê"Removing a system fan" on page 262

ÊIf applicable, "Removing the SAS expander board" on page 255

ÊDisconnect all cables from the defective SAS backplane.

7.4.9.2 Removing the 2.5-inch HDD/SSD bay top cover

IThe 2.5-inch HDD/SSD front cover does not need to be removed in order

to replace a 2.5-inch HDD/SSD SAS backplane. In the figures, the front

cover has been removed for illustration purposes only.

Field Replaceable Unit

(FRU)

Hardware: 10 minutes

Tools: Phillips PH2 / (+) No. 2 screw driver

TX1330 M4 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual 213

Hard disk drives (HDD) / solid state drives (SSD)

Figure 126: Removing the intrusion switch holder (A)

ÊRemove one screw from the intrusion switch holder as shown.

214 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual TX1330 M4

Hard disk drives (HDD) / solid state drives (SSD)

Figure 127: Removing the intrusion switch holder (B)

ÊPush back the intrusion switch holder until it disengages from the HDD bay

top cover (1).

ÊRemove the intrusion switch holder (2) and set aside.

ÊLeave the intrusion switch cable connected to the system board.

TX1330 M4 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual 215

Hard disk drives (HDD) / solid state drives (SSD)

Figure 128: Removing the 2.5-inch HDD/SSD bay top cover

ÊRemove five screws from the 2.5-inch HDD/SSD bay top cover (1).

ÊRemove the 2.5-inch HDD/SSD bay top cover from the chassis (2).

216 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual TX1330 M4

Hard disk drives (HDD) / solid state drives (SSD)

7.4.9.3 Removing a 2.5-inch HDD/SSD SAS backplane

IThe 2.5-inch HDD/SSD front cover does not need to be removed in order

to replace a 2.5-inch HDD/SSD SAS backplane. In the figures, the front

cover has been removed for illustration purposes only.

Figure 129: Removing the 2.5-inch HDD cage

ÊLift the 2.5-inch HDD/SSD cage containing the defective HDD backplane out

of the HDD bay.

TX1330 M4 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual 217

Hard disk drives (HDD) / solid state drives (SSD)

Figure 130: Removing the defective 2.5-inch HDD/SSD SAS backplane (A)

ÊRemove four screws from the defective 2.5-inch HDD/SSD SAS backplane

(see circles).

Figure 131: Removing the defective 2.5-inch HDD/SSD SAS backplane (B)

ÊFold up the defective 2.5-inch HDD/SSD SAS backplane (1) and at a slight

angle, remove it from the recesses in the HDD cage (2).

218 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual TX1330 M4

Hard disk drives (HDD) / solid state drives (SSD)

7.4.9.4 Installing a 2.5-inch HDD/SSD SAS backplane

Figure 132: Installing the new 2.5-inch HDD/SSD SAS backplane (A)

ÊAt a slight angle, fit the new 2.5-inch HDD/SSD SAS backplane into the six

recesses in the HDD cage (1).

ÊFold down the 2.5-inch HDD/SSD SAS backplane (2).

Figure 133: Installing the new 2.5-inch HDD/SSD SAS backplane (B)

ÊSecure the 2.5-inch HDD/SSD SAS backplane in the HDD cage with four

screws (see circles).

TX1330 M4 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual 219

Hard disk drives (HDD) / solid state drives (SSD)

IThe 2.5-inch HDD/SSD front cover does not need to be removed in order

to replace a 2.5-inch HDD/SSD SAS backplane. In the figures, the front

cover has been removed for illustration purposes only.

Figure 134: Installing the 2.5-inch HDD/SSD cage

ÊLower the 2.5-inch HDD/SSD cage into the HDD installation bay as shown

(1).

ÊEnsure that the four rubber bolts on the bottom of the cage properly engage

with the corresponding dents in the chassis floor (2).

7.4.9.5 Installing the 2.5-inch HDD/SSD bay top cover

IThe 2.5-inch HDD/SSD front cover does not need to be removed in order

to replace a 2.5-inch HDD/SSD SAS backplane. In the figures, the front

cover has been removed for illustration purposes only.

220 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual TX1330 M4

Hard disk drives (HDD) / solid state drives (SSD)

Figure 135: Installing the 2.5-inch HDD/SSD bay top cover

ÊLower the 2.5-inch HDD/SSD bay top cover onto the HDD installation bays

(1).

ÊEnsure that the four rubber bolts on top of the cage properly engage with the

corresponding dents in the HDD bay top cover.

ÊFasten the HDD bay top cover to the chassis with five screws (2).

TX1330 M4 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual 221

Hard disk drives (HDD) / solid state drives (SSD)

Figure 136: Installing the intrusion switch holder (A)

ÊPlace the intrusion switch holder on the HDD bay top cover as shown (1).

ÊPush the intrusion switch holder under the front chassis rim as far as it will

go(2).

Figure 137: Installing the intrusion switch holder (B)

ÊFasten the intrusion switch holder on the HDD bay top cover with one screw.

222 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual TX1330 M4

Hard disk drives (HDD) / solid state drives (SSD)

7.4.9.6 Connecting cables

Example 8x 2.5-inch HDD/SSD configuration (backplane 1)

Figure 138: Connecting cables to the backplane (example 8x 2.5-inch HDD/SSD)

ÊConnect the cables to the backplane:

IFor the cable plan, see chapter "Appendix B" on page 477.

Configuration with SAS expander board

ÊFor the cabling with a SAS expander board, see section "Connecting cables

to the SAS expander board" on page 252.

IFor the cable plan, see chapter "Appendix B" on page 477.

1If applicable, riser card power cable

2SAS cable to backplane connector "X9"

3If applicable, OOB cable

4Power cable

5SAS cable to backplane connector "X10"

TX1330 M4 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual 223

Hard disk drives (HDD) / solid state drives (SSD)

7.4.9.7 Concluding steps

ÊIf applicable, "Installing the SAS expander board" on page 251

Ê"Installing a system fan" on page 266

ÊInsert all HDD/SSD modules, see section "Installing 3.5-inch HDD modules"

on page 176.

IMake sure that you reinstall the HDD/SSD module in the bay it was

located before the HDD backplane replacement.

Ê"Reassembling" on page 67

Ê"Connecting the power cord" on page 78

Ê"Switching on the server" on page 80

7.4.10 Upgrading configuration from up to eight to up to

16 2.5-inch HDDs/SSDs

7.4.10.1 Preliminary steps

Ê"Suspending BitLocker functionality" on page 97

Ê"Shutting down the server" on page 53

Ê"Disconnecting the power cord" on page 54

Ê"Getting access to the component" on page 55

ÊRemove all HDD/SSD modules, see section "Removing 2.5-inch HDD/SSD

modules" on page 207.

Upgrade and Repair Unit

(URU)

Hardware:20 minutes

Tools: Phillips PH2 / (+) No. 2 screw driver

224 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual TX1330 M4

Hard disk drives (HDD) / solid state drives (SSD)

7.4.10.2 Removing the 8x 2.5-inch HDD/SSD front panel

Figure 139: Removing the 8x 2.5-inch HDD/SSD front panel

ÊRemove four screws from the 8x 2.5-inch HDD/SSD front panel.

ÊPull up the 8x 2.5-inch HDD/SSD front panel to disengage it from the

chassis.

ÊRemove the 8x 2.5-inch HDD/SSD front panel.

7.4.10.3 Removing the 2.5-inch HDD/SSD bay top cover

ÊRemove the 2.5-inch HDD/SSD bay cover, see section "Removing the 2.5-

inch HDD/SSD bay top cover" on page 212.

7.4.10.4 Installing the second 2.5-inch HDD/SSD SAS backplane

ÊInstall the second 2.5-inch HDD/SSD SAS backplane and the second HDD

cage, see section "Installing a 2.5-inch HDD/SSD SAS backplane" on

page 218.

TX1330 M4 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual 225

Hard disk drives (HDD) / solid state drives (SSD)

7.4.10.5 Installing the 2.5-inch HDD/SSD bay top cover

ÊInstall the 2.5-inch HDD/SSD bay top cover, see section "Installing the 2.5-

inch HDD/SSD bay top cover" on page 219.

7.4.10.6 Installing the 16x 2.5-inch HDD/SSD front panel

Figure 140: Securing the 16x 2.5-inch HDD/SSD front panel

ÊFit the three hooks on the 2.5-inch HDD/SSD front panel into the slots in the

server front (see orange arrows).

ÊFirmly press down on the HDD front panel until its upper edge is flush with

the chassis (see blue arrow).

ÊFasten the HDD front panel to the server front with four screws (see circles).

226 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual TX1330 M4

Hard disk drives (HDD) / solid state drives (SSD)

7.4.10.7 Connecting cables

Figure 141: Connecting cables to the backplane (example 16x 2.5-inch HDD/SSD)

ÊConnect the cables to the backplane:

IFor the cable plan, see chapter "Appendix B" on page 477.

7.4.10.8 Installing the expander board

ÊInstall the expander board, see section "Installing the SAS expander board"

on page 251.

1SAS expander board power cable

2SAS cable to backplane connector "X10"

3If applicable, OOB cable

4Power cable

5SAS cable to backplane connector "X9"

TX1330 M4 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual 227

Hard disk drives (HDD) / solid state drives (SSD)

7.4.10.9 Concluding steps

ÊInstall all removed HDD/SSD modules, see section "Installing 2.5-inch

HDD/SSD modules" on page 205.

IFor detailed information on HDD mounting order, see section "2.5-

inch HDD/SSD configurations" on page 199.

Ê"Reassembling" on page 67

Ê"Connecting the power cord" on page 78

Ê"Switching on the server" on page 80

Ê"Resuming BitLocker functionality" on page 117

228 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual TX1330 M4

Hard disk drives (HDD) / solid state drives (SSD)

7.5 HDD extension boxes

7.5.1 HDD extension boxes overview

7.5.1.1 8x 2.5-inch HDD/SSD extension box

IThe 8x 2.5-inch HDD/SSD extension box can be equipped with a 8x 2.5-

inch HDD/SSD backplane or a 4x 2.5-inch PCIe backplane.

Figure 142: 8x 2.5-inch HDD/SSD extension box

IThe 8x 2.5-inch HDD/SSD extension box occupies accessible drive bays

2 and 3.

7.5.1.2 4x 3.5-inch HDD extension box

Figure 143: 4x 3.5-inch HDD extension box

IThe 4x 3.5-inch HDD extension box occupies accessible drive bays 1, 2

and 3.

TX1330 M4 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual 229

Hard disk drives (HDD) / solid state drives (SSD)

7.5.2 Installing the 8x 2.5-inch HDD/SSD extension box

7.5.2.1 Preliminary steps

Ê"Suspending BitLocker functionality" on page 97

Ê"Shutting down the server" on page 53

Ê"Disconnecting the power cord" on page 54

Ê"Getting access to the component" on page 55

7.5.2.2 Removing accessible drive dummy covers

ÊRemove accessible drive filler covers from the required bays, see section

"Accessible drive filler covers" on page 90.

ÊRemove accessible drive covers, see section "Accessible drive covers" on

page 92.

7.5.2.3 Installing the HDD/SSD or PCIe SSD backplane

ÊIf applicable, install the HDD/SSD backplane or the PCIe backplane on the

8x 2.5-inch HDD/SSD extension box, see section "Installing the new

HDD/SSD backplane" on page 239.

Upgrade and Repair Unit

(URU)

Hardware:10 minutes

Tools: Slotted screw driver (for bending in or out accessible drive mounting

brackets)

230 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual TX1330 M4

Hard disk drives (HDD) / solid state drives (SSD)

7.5.2.4 Installing the 8x 2.5-inch HDD/SSD extension box

Figure 144: Bending in mounting brackets

ÊUsing a screw driver, bend the four mounting brackets of the middle

installation bay (bay 2) inwards (see close-up):

ÊBend in the lower two mounting brackets on each side of the drive cage.

ÊOpen the accessible drive locking bar, see section "Opening the accessible

drive locking bar" on page 86.

TX1330 M4 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual 231

Hard disk drives (HDD) / solid state drives (SSD)

Figure 145: Inserting the 8x 2.5-inch HDD/SSD extension box

ÊInsert the 8x 2.5-inch HDD/SSD extension box into installation bays 2 and 3

and carefully push in until it lines up with the front panel.

ÊClosing the locking bar, see section "Closing the accessible drive locking

bar" on page 88.

232 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual TX1330 M4

Hard disk drives (HDD) / solid state drives (SSD)

7.5.2.5 Connecting cables

Example with 8x 2.5-inch HDD/SSD backplane

Figure 146: Connecting the 8x 2.5-inch HDD/SSD extension box

ÊConnect the cables to the backplane:

IFor more information about connecting SAS cables to the SAS expander

board, see section "Connecting cables to the SAS expander board" on

page 252.

IFor the cable plan, see chapter "Appendix B" on page 477.

1SAS cable to backplane connector "X9"

2Power cable

3If applicable, OOB cable

4SAS cable to backplane connector "X10"

TX1330 M4 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual 233

Hard disk drives (HDD) / solid state drives (SSD)

Example with 4x 2.5-inch PCIe SSD backplane

Figure 147: Connecting the PCIe cables to the backplane

ÊConnect the cables to the backplane:

IFor more information about connecting SAS cables to the PRAID

EP5x0i, see section "Installing expansion cards" on page 279.

IFor the cable plan, see chapter "Appendix B" on page 477.

1Power cable

2If applicable, OOB cable

3Oculink cable (black) to backplane connector "P3-X4"

4Oculink cable (green) to backplane connector "P2-X3"

5Oculink cable (yellow) to backplane connector "P1-X2"

6Oculink cable (red) to backplane connector "P0-X1"

234 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual TX1330 M4

Hard disk drives (HDD) / solid state drives (SSD)

7.5.2.6 Installing HDDs/SSDs modules into the 8x 2.5-inch HDD/SSD

extension box

ÊInstall HDD modules or HDD dummy modules into the additional HDD bays,

see sections "Installing a 2.5-inch HDD/SSD module" on page 206 and

"Installing a 2.5-inch HDD/SSD dummy module" on page 209.

IFor detailed information on HDD mounting order, see section "2.5-

inch HDD/SSD configurations" on page 199.

7.5.2.7 Concluding steps

Ê"Reassembling" on page 67

Ê"Connecting the power cord" on page 78

Ê"Resuming BitLocker functionality" on page 117

Ê"Switching on the server" on page 80

7.5.3 Removing the 8x 2.5-inch HDD/SSD extension box

7.5.3.1 Preliminary steps

Ê"Suspending BitLocker functionality" on page 97

Ê"Shutting down the server" on page 53

Ê"Disconnecting the power cord" on page 54

ÊRemove all HDD modules from the HDD extension box, see section

"Removing 2.5-inch HDD/SSD modules" on page 207.

Ê"Getting access to the component" on page 55

Upgrade and Repair Unit

(URU)

Hardware:10 minutes

Tools: tool-less

TX1330 M4 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual 235

Hard disk drives (HDD) / solid state drives (SSD)

7.5.3.2 Removing the 8x 2.5-inch HDD/SSD extension box

ÊRemove all cables from the 8x 2.5-inch HDD/SSD extension box backplane.

ÊOpen the accessible drive locking bar, see section "Opening the accessible

drive locking bar" on page 86.

Figure 148: Removing the 8x 2.5-inch HDD/SSD extension box

ÊCarefully pull the 8x 2.5-inch HDD/SSD extension box out of its installation

bays.

ÊClose the locking bar, see section "Closing the accessible drive locking bar"

on page 88.

236 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual TX1330 M4

Hard disk drives (HDD) / solid state drives (SSD)

7.5.3.3 Installing accessible drive dummy covers

ÊInstall accessible drive filler covers into empty drive bays, see section

"Accessible drive filler covers" on page 90.

ÊInstall accessible drive covers into the front cover, see section "Accessible

drive covers" on page 92.

7.5.3.4 Concluding steps

Ê"Reassembling" on page 67

Ê"Connecting the power cord" on page 78

Ê"Resuming BitLocker functionality" on page 117

Ê"Switching on the server" on page 80

7.5.4 Replacing the HDD/SSD backplane or PCIe SSD

backplane on the 8x 2.5-inch HDD/SSD extension

box

7.5.4.1 Preliminary steps

Ê"Locating the defective server" on page 51

Ê"Shutting down the server" on page 53

Ê"Disconnecting the power cord" on page 54

ÊRemove all HDD/SSD modules from the HDD extension box, see section

"Removing 2.5-inch HDD/SSD modules" on page 207.

Ê"Getting access to the component" on page 55

ÊUnlock and pull the 8x 2.5-inch HDD/SSD extension box out of its installation

bays, see section "Removing the 8x 2.5-inch HDD/SSD extension box" on

page 234.

Upgrade and Repair Unit

(URU)

Hardware:10 minutes

Tools: Phillips PH2 / (+) No. 2 screw driver

TX1330 M4 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual 237

Hard disk drives (HDD) / solid state drives (SSD)

7.5.4.2 Removing the defective HDD/SSD backplane

8x 2.5-inch HDD/SSD backplane

Figure 149: Removing the HDD/SSD backplane (A)

ÊRemove the four screws (see circles).

Figure 150: Removing the HDD/SSD backplane (B)

ÊFold up the HDD/SSD backplane and at a slight angle (1), remove it from the

recesses in the HDD extension box (2).

238 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual TX1330 M4

Hard disk drives (HDD) / solid state drives (SSD)

4x 2.5-inch PCIe SSD backplane

Figure 151: Removing the PCIe SSD backplane (A)

ÊRemove the two screws (see circles).

Figure 152: Removing the PCIe SSD backplane (B)

ÊFold up the PCIe SSD backplane and at a slight angle (1), remove it from

the recesses in the PCIe SSD extension box (2).

TX1330 M4 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual 239

Hard disk drives (HDD) / solid state drives (SSD)

7.5.4.3 Installing the new HDD/SSD backplane

8x 2.5-inch HDD/SSD backplane

Figure 153: Installing the HDD/SSD backplane

ÊAt a slight angle, fit the HDD/SSD backplane into the six recesses in the

HDD extension box (1).

ÊFold down the HDD/SSD backplane (2).

ÊFasten the HDD/SSD backplane with four screws (see figure 149).

240 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual TX1330 M4

Hard disk drives (HDD) / solid state drives (SSD)

4x 2.5-inch PCIe SSD backplane

Figure 154: Installing the PCIe SSD backplane

ÊAt a slight angle, fit the PCIe SSD backplane into the three recesses in the

PCIe SSD extension box (1).

ÊFold down the PCIe SSD backplane (2).

ÊFasten the PCIe SSD backplane with two screws (see figure 151).

7.5.4.4 Concluding steps

ÊInstall the 8x 2.5-inch HDD/SSD extension box, see section "Installing the

8x 2.5-inch HDD/SSD extension box" on page 229.

Ê"Reassembling" on page 67

ÊReinstall all HDDs/SSDs into their original bays in the HDD extension box,

see section "Installing 2.5-inch HDD/SSD modules" on page 205.

Ê"Connecting the power cord" on page 78

Ê"Switching on the server" on page 80

TX1330 M4 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual 241

Hard disk drives (HDD) / solid state drives (SSD)

7.5.5 Installing the 4x 3.5-inch HDD extension box

7.5.5.1 Preliminary steps

Ê"Suspending BitLocker functionality" on page 97

Ê"Shutting down the server" on page 53

Ê"Disconnecting the power cord" on page 54

Ê"Getting access to the component" on page 55

7.5.5.2 Removing accessible drive dummy covers

ÊRemove accessible drive filler covers from the required bays, see section

"Accessible drive filler covers" on page 90.

ÊRemove accessible drive covers, see section "Accessible drive covers" on

page 92.

7.5.5.3 Installing the ultraslim ODD into the HDD extension box

ÊIf applicable, install the ultraslim ODD into the new 4x 3.5-inch HDD

extension box, see section "Installing the ultraslim ODD" on page 360.

7.5.5.4 Installing the HDD backplane

ÊIf applicable, install the HDD backplane on the 4x 3.5-inch HDD extension

box, see section "Installing the new HDD backplane" on page 249.

Upgrade and Repair Unit

(URU)

Hardware:10 minutes

Tools: Slotted screw driver (for bending in or out accessible drive mounting

brackets)

242 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual TX1330 M4

Hard disk drives (HDD) / solid state drives (SSD)

7.5.5.5 Installing the 4x 3.5-inch HDD extension box

Figure 155: Bending in mounting brackets

ÊUsing a screw driver, bend the mounting brackets of the top and middle

installation bays (bay 1 and bay 2) inwards (see close-up):

ÊBend in the four mounting brackets on each side of the drive cage.

ÊOpen the accessible drive locking bar, see section "Opening the accessible

drive locking bar" on page 86.

TX1330 M4 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual 243

Hard disk drives (HDD) / solid state drives (SSD)

Figure 156: Inserting the 4x 3.5 HDD extension box

ÊIf applicable, route the cables of the ultraslim ODD through the bay.

ÊInsert the 4x 3.5-inch HDD extension box into installation bays 1 to 3 and

carefully push in until it lines up with the front panel.

ÊClose the locking bar, see section "Closing the accessible drive locking bar"

on page 88.

244 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual TX1330 M4

Hard disk drives (HDD) / solid state drives (SSD)

7.5.5.6 Connecting cables

Figure 157: Connecting cables to the 4x 3.5-inch HDD extension box

ÊConnect the cables to the backplane:

ÊIf applicable, connect the SATA cable of the ultraslim ODD to the system

board (see section "Installing the ultraslim ODD" on page 360).

IFor the cable plan, see chapter "Appendix B" on page 477.

1If applicable, OOB cable

2SAS cable

IFor more information about connecting SAS cables to the

SAS expander board, see section "Installing the SAS

expander board" on page 251.

3Power cable

TX1330 M4 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual 245

Hard disk drives (HDD) / solid state drives (SSD)

7.5.5.7 Installing HDD modules into the 4x 3.5-inch HDD extension box

ÊInstall HDD modules or HDD dummy modules into the additional HDD bays,

see sections "Installing a 3.5-inch HDD module" on page 177 and "Installing

a 3.5-inch HDD dummy module" on page 179.

IFor detailed information on HDD mounting order, see section "3.5-

inch HDD configurations" on page 170.

7.5.5.8 Concluding steps

Ê"Reassembling" on page 67

Ê"Connecting the power cord" on page 78

Ê"Resuming BitLocker functionality" on page 117

Ê"Switching on the server" on page 80

7.5.6 Removing the 4x 3.5-inch HDD extension box

7.5.6.1 Preliminary steps

Ê"Suspending BitLocker functionality" on page 97

Ê"Shutting down the server" on page 53

Ê"Disconnecting the power cord" on page 54

ÊRemove all HDD modules from the HDD extension box, see section

"Removing 3.5-inch HDD modules" on page 178.

Ê"Getting access to the component" on page 55

Upgrade and Repair Unit

(URU)

Hardware:10 minutes

Tools: tool-less

246 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual TX1330 M4

Hard disk drives (HDD) / solid state drives (SSD)

7.5.6.2 Removing the 4x 3.5-inch HDD extension box

ÊRemove all cables from the 4x 3.5-inch HDD extension box backplane.

ÊIf applicable, remove all cables from the slimline ODD.

ÊOpen the accessible drive locking bar, see section "Opening the accessible

drive locking bar" on page 86.

Figure 158: Removing the HDD extension box

ÊCarefully pull the 4x 3.5-inch HDD extension box out of its installation bays.

ÊClose the locking bar, see section "Closing the accessible drive locking bar"

on page 88.

TX1330 M4 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual 247

Hard disk drives (HDD) / solid state drives (SSD)

7.5.6.3 Installing accessible drive dummy covers

ÊInstall accessible drive filler covers into empty drive bays, see section

"Installing accessible drive filler covers" on page 91.

ÊInstall accessible drive covers into the front cover, see section "Installing

accessible drive covers" on page 93.

7.5.6.4 Concluding steps

Ê"Reassembling" on page 67

Ê"Connecting the power cord" on page 78

Ê"Resuming BitLocker functionality" on page 117

Ê"Switching on the server" on page 80

7.5.7 Replacing the HDD backplane on the 4x 3.5-inch

HDD extension box

7.5.7.1 Preliminary steps

Ê"Locating the defective server" on page 51

Ê"Shutting down the server" on page 53

Ê"Disconnecting the power cord" on page 54

ÊRemove all HDD modules from the HDD extension box, see section

"Removing 3.5-inch HDD modules" on page 178.

Ê"Getting access to the component" on page 55

Upgrade and Repair Unit

(URU)

Hardware:10 minutes

Tools: Phillips PH2 / (+) No. 2 screw driver

248 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual TX1330 M4

Hard disk drives (HDD) / solid state drives (SSD)

7.5.7.2 Removing the defective HDD backplane

ÊUnlock and pull the 4x 3.5-inch HDD extension box out of its installation

bays, see section "Removing the 4x 3.5-inch HDD extension box" on

page 245.

Figure 159: Removing the HDD backplane (A)

ÊRemove the two screws (see circles).

Figure 160: Removing the HDD backplane (B)

ÊRemove the screw (see circle).

ÊRemove the bracket.

TX1330 M4 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual 249

Hard disk drives (HDD) / solid state drives (SSD)

Figure 161: Removing the HDD backplane (C)

ÊPull out the HDD backplane in the direction of the arrow.

7.5.7.3 Installing the new HDD backplane

Figure 162: Installing the HDD backplane (A)

ÊFit the HDD backplane into the guides.

ÊPush the HDD backplane in the direction of the arrow.

250 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual TX1330 M4

Hard disk drives (HDD) / solid state drives (SSD)

Figure 163: Installing the HDD backplane (B)

ÊPlace the bracket (see arrow) and fasten it with one screw (see circle).

ÊFasten the HDD backplane with two screws (see figure 159 on page 248).

ÊInstall the 4x 3.5-inch HDD extension box, see section "Installing the 4x 3.5-

inch HDD extension box" on page 241.

7.5.7.4 Concluding steps

Ê"Reassembling" on page 67

ÊInstall all HDDs into their original bays in the HDD extension box, see section

"Installing 3.5-inch HDD modules" on page 176.

Ê"Connecting the power cord" on page 78

Ê"Switching on the server" on page 80

TX1330 M4 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual 251

Hard disk drives (HDD) / solid state drives (SSD)

7.6 SAS expander board

7.6.1 Installing the SAS expander board

7.6.1.1 Preliminary steps

Ê"Suspending BitLocker functionality" on page 97

Ê"Shutting down the server" on page 53

Ê"Disconnecting the power cord" on page 54

Ê"Getting access to the component" on page 55

7.6.1.2 Installing the SAS expander board

Figure 164: Installing the SAS expander board

ÊPosition the SAS expander board on the SAS expander holder. Notice the

recesses and hooks (see arrows).

ÊPush the SAS expander board in the direction of the arrow (1).

ÊFasten the SAS expander board with one screw M3 x 4.5 mm (see circle).

Field Replaceable Unit

(FRU)

Hardware: 10 minutes

Tools: Phillips PH2 / (+) No. 2 screw driver

252 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual TX1330 M4

Hard disk drives (HDD) / solid state drives (SSD)

7.6.1.3 Connecting cables to the SAS expander board

2.5-inch HDD/SSD configurations

Figure 165: Connecting cables to expander board (example 24x 2.5-inch HDDs/SSDs)

ÊConnect the cables to the SAS expander board:

IFor the cable plan, see chapter "Appendix B" on page 477.

Cable Connector on

backplane/controller

Connector on

SAS expander board

1SAS cable Backplane 1: X9 X10

2SAS cable Backplane 1: X10 X11

3SAS cable Backplane 2: X9 X12

4SAS cable Backplane 2: X10 X13

5SAS cable Backplane 3: X9 X14

6SAS cable Backplane 3: X10 X15

7SAS cable SAS controller: MLC1 X1

8SAS cable SAS controller: MLC2 X2

9Power cable Backplane 2: X17 X3

SAS MLC1

SAS MLC2

TX1330 M4 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual 253

Hard disk drives (HDD) / solid state drives (SSD)

3.5-inch HDD/SSD configurations

Figure 166: Connecting cables to expander board (example 12x 3.5-inch HDDs)

ÊConnect the cables to the SAS expander board:

IFor the cable plan, see chapter "Appendix B" on page 477.

Cable Connector on

backplane/controller

Connector on

SAS expander board

1SAS cable Backplane 1: X9 X10

2SAS cable Backplane 2: X9 X11

3SAS cable Backplane 3: X9 X12

4SAS cable SAS controller: MLC1 X1

5SAS cable SAS controller: MLC2 X2

6Power cable Backplane 2: X17 X3

SAS MLC1

SAS MLC2

254 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual TX1330 M4

Hard disk drives (HDD) / solid state drives (SSD)

7.6.1.4 Installing the SAS expander holder

Figure 167: Installing the SAS expander holder (A)

ÊTake note of the two recesses (see circles).

Figure 168: Installing the SAS expander holder (B)

ÊPlace the expander board that the two hooks fit with the two recesses (see

oval).

ÊFasten the expander board with the knurled screw (see circle)

ÊRoute the intrusion switch cable as shown (1).

TX1330 M4 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual 255

Hard disk drives (HDD) / solid state drives (SSD)

7.6.1.5 Concluding steps

Ê"Reassembling" on page 67

Ê"Connecting the power cord" on page 78

Ê"Resuming BitLocker functionality" on page 117

Ê"Switching on the server" on page 80

7.6.2 Removing the SAS expander board

7.6.2.1 Preliminary steps

Ê"Suspending BitLocker functionality" on page 97

Ê"Shutting down the server" on page 53

Ê"Disconnecting the power cord" on page 54

Ê"Getting access to the component" on page 55

Field Replaceable Unit

(FRU)

Hardware: 10 minutes

Tools: Phillips PH2 / (+) No. 2 screw driver

256 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual TX1330 M4

Hard disk drives (HDD) / solid state drives (SSD)

7.6.2.2 Removing the SAS expander holder

Figure 169: Removing the SAS expander holder

ÊRemove the intrusion switch cable from the cable clamp (1).

ÊRemove the knurled screw (see circle).

ÊSlide the SAS expander board holder in the direction of the arrow and take

it out of the chassis.

ÊDisconnect all cables from the expander board.

TX1330 M4 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual 257

Hard disk drives (HDD) / solid state drives (SSD)

7.6.2.3 Removing the SAS expander board

Figure 170: Removing the SAS expander board

ÊRemove one screw (see circle).

ÊPush the SAS expander board in the direction of the arrow.

ÊTake off the SAS expander board from the SAS expander holder.

7.6.2.4 Concluding steps

Ê"Reassembling" on page 67

Ê"Connecting the power cord" on page 78

Ê"Resuming BitLocker functionality" on page 117

Ê"Switching on the server" on page 80

258 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual TX1330 M4

Hard disk drives (HDD) / solid state drives (SSD)

7.6.3 Replacing the SAS expander board

7.6.3.1 Preliminary steps

Ê"Locating the defective server" on page 51

Ê"Suspending BitLocker functionality" on page 97

Ê"Shutting down the server" on page 53

Ê"Disconnecting the power cord" on page 54

Ê"Getting access to the component" on page 55

7.6.3.2 Removing the defective SAS expander board

Ê"Removing the SAS expander board" on page 255

7.6.3.3 Installing the new SAS expander board

Ê"Installing the SAS expander board" on page 251

7.6.3.4 Concluding steps

Ê"Reassembling" on page 67

Ê"Connecting the power cord" on page 78

Ê"Resuming BitLocker functionality" on page 117

Ê"Switching on the server" on page 80

Field Replaceable Unit

(FRU)

Hardware:10 minutes

Tools: Phillips PH2 / (+) No. 2 screw driver

TX1330 M4 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual 259

8Fans

Safety notes

VCAUTION!

●Do not damage or modify internal cables or devices. Doing so may

cause a device failure, fire, or electric shock.

●Devices and components inside the server remain hot after

shutdown. After shutting down the server, wait for hot components to

cool down before installing or removing internal options.

●Circuit boards and soldered parts of internal options are exposed and

can be damaged by static electricity. Always discharge static build-up

(e.g. by touching a grounded object) before handling electrostatic-

sensitive devices (ESDs).

●Do not touch the circuitry on boards or soldered parts. Hold circuit

boards by their metallic areas or edges.

●If devices are installed or disassembled using methods other than

those outlined in this chapter, the warranty will be invalidated.

●The procedure of installation on this notes might change depending

on a configuration of options.

●For more information, see chapter "Important information" on

page 37.

8.1 Basic information

Two variants of system fan modules can be equipped:

– The standard system fan module contains one fan in an air duct

– The redundant system fan module contains two fans in an air duct

The system fan modules direct the airflow directly onto the CPU heat sink and

the memory slots.

IAdditional fans in PSUs are integral parts of the PSUs and cannot be

replaced separately.

260 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual TX1330 M4

Fans

8.1.1 Standard system fan module

Figure 171: Standard system fan module

VCAUTION!

Since the system fan is not redundant it has to be replaced immediately

in case of defects or prefailure events.

1 Air duct

2 System fan 1, 120 x 38 mm

3 Breakouts

TX1330 M4 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual 261

Fans

8.1.2 Redundant system fan module

Figure 172: Redundant system fan module

1 Air duct

2 System fan 1, 120 x 38 mm

3 Breakouts

4 System fan 2, 120 x 38 mm

262 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual TX1330 M4

Fans

8.2 Replacing the system fan

8.2.1 Preliminary steps

Ê"Locating the defective server" on page 51

Ê"Shutting down the server" on page 53

Ê"Disconnecting the power cord" on page 54

Ê"Getting access to the component" on page 55

ÊRemove the system fan module, see section "Removing the system fan

module" on page 81

8.2.2 Removing a system fan

8.2.2.1 Removing the fan cable

Figure 173: Standard system fan: Removing the fan cable from the guidings

Upgrade and Repair Unit

(URU)

Hardware: 10 minutes

Tools: tool-less

TX1330 M4 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual 263

Fans

Figure 174: Redundant system fan: Removing the fan cable from the guidings

ÊRemove the fan cable from the corresponding guiding(s).

1 Guiding for the fan cable from system fan 1

2 Guiding for the fan cable from system fan 2

3 Label system fan 1

4 Label system fan 2

264 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual TX1330 M4

Fans

8.2.2.2 Removing the defective system fan

IThe following description is valid for all system fans.

Figure 175: Removing the safety pins from the snap rivets

ÊRemove the safety pins (see circles) from the four snap rivets on the air duct.

TX1330 M4 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual 265

Fans

Figure 176: Removing the system fan from the air duct

ÊPull the system fan from the snap rivets (1).

ÊRemove the system fan from the air duct (2).

266 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual TX1330 M4

Fans

8.2.3 Installing a system fan

8.2.3.1 Installing the new system fan

ÊInsert the system fan into the air duct.

ITake note of the mounting direction! The labels of all system fans

must show to the rear (see figure 174).

Figure 177: Installing the system fan in the air duct

ÊPush the system fan on the snap rivets (1).

INotice the position of the fan cable. Ensure that the fan cable is not

pressed.

ÊInsert and tightly push the four safety pins into the snap rivets (2).

ÊTake note of the air flow (3).

8.2.3.2 Running the fan cables

ÊInsert the fan cable in the corresponding guidings (see figure 173 and figure

174).

TX1330 M4 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual 267

Fans

8.2.4 Concluding steps

Ê"Installing the standard system fan module" on page 83

Ê"Reassembling" on page 67

Ê"Connecting the power cord" on page 78

Ê"Switching on the server" on page 80

IWhen a system fan module fails, the remaining fans will start operating

at full speed. After the defective fan module has been replaced, all fans

will continue to run at full speed for a couple of minutes, before resetting

to a lower speed.

Ensure that all system fans reset to a normal operating speed.

Ê"Performing a fan test" on page 124

268 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual TX1330 M4

Fans

TX1330 M4 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual 269

9 Expansion cards and backup

units

Safety notes

VCAUTION!

●Do not damage or modify internal cables or devices. Doing so may

cause a device failure, fire, or electric shock.

●Devices and components inside the server remain hot after

shutdown. After shutting down the server, wait for hot components to

cool down before installing or removing internal options.

●Circuit boards and soldered parts of internal options are exposed and

can be damaged by static electricity. Always discharge static build-up

(e.g. by touching a grounded object) before handling electrostatic-

sensitive devices (ESDs).

●Do not touch the circuitry on boards or soldered parts. Hold circuit

boards by their metallic areas or edges.

●If devices are installed or disassembled using methods other than

those outlined in this chapter, the warranty will be invalidated.

●For more information, see chapter "Important information" on

page 37.

270 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual TX1330 M4

Expansion cards and backup units

9.1 Basic information

The system board is equipped with four expansion slots.

Figure 178: PCI slot overview

IAn additional PCI 32-bit slot is available with an optional riser card. This

riser card can be mounted on two spacer bolts positioned under slot 1. In

this case a PCI adapter board occupies slot 1 (see section "Installing the

new riser card" on page 291).

IFor the latest information on supported expansion cards, refer to your

server’s hardware configurator available online at the following address:

http://ts.fujitsu.com/products/standard_servers/index.html

In Japan:

http://jp.fujitsu.com/platform/server/primergy/system/

PCI

slot

Type Length / Form

factor

Function

1 PCIe Gen3 x1 (mech. x4) 167,65 mm /

low profile

Slot for optional PCIe

expansion cards

2PCIe Gen3 x4 (notched)

(mech. x4)

167,65 mm /

low profile

Slot for optional PCIe

expansion cards

3PCIe Gen3 x8 (notched)

(mech. X8)

167,65 mm /

low profile

Dedicated slot for boot

controllers

4PCIe Gen3 x8

(notched)(mech. X8)

167,65 mm /

low profile

Dedicated slot for PCIe

graphics card

Slot 2

Slot 1

Slot 4

Slot 3

RCVR

2 /

3.1 Gen 2

Battery

TPM

IntrSATA ODD

FAN2

FAN3

HDD LED

Intel

i210

Indicate

SATA

0-3

CSS FAN1

M.2

SSD1

M.2

SSD2

TX1330 M4 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual 271

Expansion cards and backup units

9.2 Handling slot brackets

9.2.1 Installing a slot bracket

IUse the low profile bracket perforated for relevant controllers.

Figure 179: Perforated and non-perforated slot brackets

Installing the slot bracket

ÊPlace the controller on the mounting tabs on the slot bracket.

ÊFasten the slot bracket to the controller with two screws.

Upgrade and Repair Unit

(URU)

Hardware: 5 minutes

Tools: Phillips PH2 / (+) No. 2 screw driver

1 Full height bracket non-perforated

2 Full height bracket perforated

3 Low profile bracket perforated

272 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual TX1330 M4

Expansion cards and backup units

Example: EP4x0i

Figure 180: Placing the slot bracket

ÊPlace the controller on the slot bracket (see arrow).

ÊSecure the slot bracket to the expansion card with two screws (see circles).

9.2.2 Removing a slot bracket

Removing the slot bracket

ÊRemove the two screws.

ÊRemove the controller from the mounting tabs on the slot bracket.

Upgrade and Repair Unit

(URU)

Hardware: 5 minutes

Tools: Phillips PH2 / (+) No. 2 screw driver

TX1330 M4 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual 273

Expansion cards and backup units

9.3 Handling SFP+ transceiver modules

A network adapter is equipped with one or two SFP+ (small form-factor

pluggable) transceiver modules. SFP+ transceiver modules are hot-pluggable.

9.3.1 Installing the SFP+ transceiver modules

Preparing the SFP+ transceiver module

Figure 181: Removing the protective cap

ÊRemove the SFP+ transceiver module from its protective packaging.

ÊRemove the protective cap from the new/additional SFP+ transceiver

module.

VCAUTION!

– Always keep the protective caps attached to the SFP+ transceiver

modules and fiber-optic cable connectors until you are ready to

make a connection.

– Keep the protective cap for future use.

Upgrade and Repair Unit

(URU)

Hardware: 5 minutes

Tools: tool-less

274 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual TX1330 M4

Expansion cards and backup units

Figure 182: Unlatching the locking bail

ÊCarefully unlatch and fold down the locking bail on the SFP+ transceiver

module.

Inserting the SFP+ transceiver module

Figure 183: Inserting the SFP+ transceiver module

ÊInsert and slide the SFP+ transceiver module into the socket connector as

far as it will go.

IIf only one slot is equipped with a SFP+ transceiver module, use the

left connector as shown.

TX1330 M4 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual 275

Expansion cards and backup units

Figure 184: Latching the locking bail

ÊCarefully fold up and latch the locking bail.

Figure 185: Installing the protective cap

ÊIf the SFP+ transceiver module is not immediately connected to an LC

connector, attach the protective cap to the SFP+ transceiver module.

276 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual TX1330 M4

Expansion cards and backup units

Installing the secondary SFP+ transceiver module

Figure 186: Installing the secondary SFP+ transceiver module

ÊIf applicable, install the secondary SFP+ transceiver module accordingly.

9.3.2 Removing an SFP+ transceiver module

A network adapter is equipped with one or two SFP+ (small form-factor

pluggable) transceiver modules. SFP+ transceiver modules are hot-pluggable.

Upgrade and Repair Unit

(URU)

Hardware: 5 minutes

Tools: tool-less

TX1330 M4 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual 277

Expansion cards and backup units

Figure 187: Removing the protective cap

ÊIf present, remove the protective cap from the SFP+ transceiver module.

VCAUTION!

Save the protective cap for future use.

Figure 188: Unlatching the locking bail

ÊCarefully unlatch and fold down the locking bail on the SFP+ transceiver

module to eject the transceiver from the socket connector.

278 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual TX1330 M4

Expansion cards and backup units

Figure 189: Removing the SFP+ transceiver module

ÊPull the SFP+ transceiver module out of its socket connector.

ÊAttach the protective cap to the SFP+ transceiver module.

IPlace the removed SFP+ transceiver module in an antistatic bag or

other protective environment.

TX1330 M4 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual 279

Expansion cards and backup units

9.4 Expansion cards and riser card

9.4.1 Installing expansion cards

9.4.1.1 Preliminary steps

Ê"Suspending BitLocker functionality" on page 97

Ê"Shutting down the server" on page 53

Ê"Disconnecting the power cord" on page 54

Ê"Getting access to the component" on page 55

ÊRemove the system fan module, see section "Removing the system fan

module" on page 81

ÊIf applicable, remove the SAS expander holder without disconnecting

cables, see section "Removing the SAS expander holder" on page 256.

Position the SAS expander holder on the HDD cages to get more space.

Upgrade and Repair Unit

(URU)

Hardware: 5 minutes

Software: 5 minutes

Tools: Phillips PH2 / (+) No. 2 screw driver

280 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual TX1330 M4

Expansion cards and backup units

9.4.1.2 Removing a PCI slot cover

Figure 190: Removing the slot cover

ÊFold up the locking handle on the slot cover clamp (1).

ÊRemove the slot cover clamp (2).

ÊRemove the slot cover (3).

VCAUTION!

Keep the slot cover for future use.

Always replace slot covers into unused PCI slot openings to comply

with applicable EMC regulations and satisfy cooling requirements.

TX1330 M4 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual 281

Expansion cards and backup units

9.4.1.3 Installing an expansion card

IIf an optional FBU will be installed in the system, install a TFM on the

RAID controller, before proceeding.

ÊRemove the expansion card from its protective packaging.

IFor further instructions regarding controller settings, see the

accompanying documentation.

ÊIf applicable, attach the required slot bracket to the expansion card, see

section "Installing a slot bracket" on page 271.

ÊIf applicable, connect internal cables to the expansion card.

IFor the cable plan, see chapter "Appendix B" on page 477.

Figure 191: Installing the expansion card

ÊCarefully insert the expansion card into the desired PCI slot and press down

firmly until it is fully seated in the slot (1).

ÊClip on the slot cover clamp (2).

ÊFold down the locking handle on the slot cover clamp until it locks in place

(3).

ÊIf applicable, connect a FBU to the expansion card, see section "Installing

an FBU" on page 299.

282 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual TX1330 M4

Expansion cards and backup units

Example PRAID EP5x0i

Figure 192: Connecting cables - PRAID EP5x0ixi

ÊConnect the cables to the PRAID EP5x0i:

ÊInstall the PRAID EP5x0i in slot 3, see section "Installing expansion cards"

on page 279.

1If applicable, FBU cable

2HDD LED cable

TX1330 M4 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual 283

Expansion cards and backup units

Figure 193: PRAID EP5x0i - Connecting cables (B)

ÊConnect the cables of the PRAID EP5x0i:

For Oculink cables:

IFor the cable plan, see chapter "Appendix B" on page 477.

1If applicable, FBU cable to the FBU

2HDD LED cable to connector "HDD LED" on the system board

3SAS cables or Oculink cables to the backplanes (depending on the

configuration)

Color Connector on EP5x0i Connector on PCIe

SSD backplane

red C0 P3_X4

yellow C1 P2_X3

green C2 P1_X2

black C3 P0_X1

284 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual TX1330 M4

Expansion cards and backup units

9.4.1.4 Concluding steps

ÊIf applicable, install the SAS expander holder, see section "Installing the

SAS expander holder" on page 254

ÊIf applicable, remove break-outs from the system fan module (see figure 171

or figure 172).

ÊInstall the system fan module, see section "Installing the system fan module"

on page 83

Ê"Reassembling" on page 67

ÊConnect all external cables to the replaced expansion card.

Ê"Connecting the power cord" on page 78

Ê"Switching on the server" on page 80

Ê"Updating expansion card firmware" on page 104

Ê"Enabling Option ROM scan" on page 105

Ê"Enabling the boot watchdog" on page 111

Ê"Resuming BitLocker functionality" on page 117

ÊIf applicable, "After replacing/upgrading LAN controllers" on page 122

TX1330 M4 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual 285

Expansion cards and backup units

9.4.2 Removing expansion cards

9.4.2.1 Preliminary steps

Ê"Suspending BitLocker functionality" on page 97

Ê"Shutting down the server" on page 53

Ê"Disconnecting the power cord" on page 54

ÊRemove all external cables from the expansion card to be removed.

Ê"Getting access to the component" on page 55

ÊRemove the system fan module, see section "Removing the system fan

module" on page 81

ÊIf applicable, remove the SAS expander holder without disconnecting

cables, see section "Removing the SAS expander holder" on page 256.

Position the SAS expander holder on the HDD cages to get more space.

Upgrade and Repair Unit

(URU)

Hardware: 5 minutes

Tools: tool-less

286 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual TX1330 M4

Expansion cards and backup units

9.4.2.2 Removing an expansion card

ÊIf applicable, disconnect internal cables from the expansion card.

Figure 194: Removing an expansion card

ÊFold up the locking handle on the slot cover clamp (1).

ÊRemove the slot cover clamp (2).

ÊCarefully remove the expansion card from its slot (3).

TX1330 M4 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual 287

Expansion cards and backup units

9.4.2.3 Installing the slot cover

VCAUTION!

Always replace slot covers into unused PCI slot openings to comply with

applicable EMC regulations and satisfy cooling requirements.

Figure 195: Installing a slot cover

ÊInsert a slot cover into the unused PCI slot opening (1).

ÊClip on the slot cover clamp (2).

ÊFold down the locking handle on the slot cover clamp until it locks in place

(3).

9.4.2.4 Concluding steps

ÊIf applicable, install the SAS expander holder, see section "Installing the

SAS expander holder" on page 254

ÊInstall the system fan module, see section "Installing the system fan module"

on page 83

Ê"Reassembling" on page 67

Ê"Connecting the power cord" on page 78

Ê"Switching on the server" on page 80

Ê"Resuming BitLocker functionality" on page 117

288 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual TX1330 M4

Expansion cards and backup units

9.4.3 Replacing expansion cards

Note on network settings recovery

IWhen replacing network controllers or the system board, network

configuration settings in the operating system will be lost and replaced

by default values. This applies to all static IP address and LAN teaming

configurations.

Ensure to note down your current network settings before replacing a

network controller or the system board.

9.4.3.1 Preliminary steps

Ê"Locating the defective server" on page 51

Ê"Suspending BitLocker functionality" on page 97

Ê"Shutting down the server" on page 53

Ê"Disconnecting the power cord" on page 54

Ê"Getting access to the component" on page 55

ÊRemove the system fan module, see section "Removing the system fan

module" on page 81

ÊIf applicable, remove the SAS expander holder without disconnecting

cables, see section "Removing the SAS expander holder" on page 256.

Position the SAS expander holder on the HDD cages to get more space.

Ê"Locating the defective component" on page 52

ÊRemove all external cables from the expansion card to be replaced.

9.4.3.2 Removing an expansion card

ÊRemove the expansion card, see section "Removing expansion cards" on

page 285.

Upgrade and Repair Unit

(URU)

Hardware: 5 minutes

Software: 5 minutes

Tools: Phillips PH2 / (+) No. 2 screw driver (only for installing slot brackets)

TX1330 M4 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual 289

Expansion cards and backup units

ÊIf applicable, "Removing an SFP+ transceiver module" on page 276.

ÊIf the slot bracket on the defective expansion card is to be reused:

"Removing a slot bracket" on page 272.

9.4.3.3 Installing the new expansion card

ÊIf applicable, "Installing a slot bracket" on page 271.

ÊIf applicable, "Installing the SFP+ transceiver modules" on page 273.

ÊInstall the expansion card, see section "Installing an expansion card" on

page 281.

9.4.3.4 Concluding steps

ÊIf applicable, install the SAS expander holder, see section "Installing the

SAS expander holder" on page 254

ÊInstall the system fan module, see section "Installing the system fan module"

on page 83.

Ê"Reassembling" on page 67

ÊConnect all external cables to the replaced expansion card.

Ê"Connecting the power cord" on page 78

Ê"Switching on the server" on page 80

Ê"Enabling replaced components in the BIOS" on page 112

ÊInform the customer about changed WWN, MAC and SAS addresses, see

section "Looking for MAC/WWN/GUID and SAS addresses" on page 118.

Ê"Updating the NIC configuration file in a Linux and VMware environment" on

page 116

Ê"Updating expansion card firmware" on page 104

Ê"Resuming BitLocker functionality" on page 117

ÊIf applicable, reconfigure your network settings in the operation system

according to the original configuration of the replaced controller (expansion

card or onboard).

IConfiguration of network settings should be performed by the

customer. For more information, see section "Note on network

settings recovery" on page 288.

290 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual TX1330 M4

Expansion cards and backup units

ÊIf applicable, restore LAN teaming configurations, see section "After

replacing/upgrading LAN controllers" on page 122.

9.4.4 Replacing the riser card

9.4.4.1 Preliminary steps

Ê"Locating the defective server" on page 51

Ê"Suspending BitLocker functionality" on page 97

Ê"Shutting down the server" on page 53

Ê"Disconnecting the power cord" on page 54

ÊRemove all external cables from the expansion card installed in the riser

card slot.

Ê"Getting access to the component" on page 55

ÊRemove the system fan module, see section "Removing the system fan

module" on page 81

ÊIf applicable, remove the SAS expander holder without disconnecting

cables, see section "Removing the SAS expander holder" on page 256.

Position the SAS expander holder on the HDD cages to get more space.

9.4.4.2 Removing the defective riser card

ÊRemove the expansion card from the riser card slot, see section "Removing

an expansion card" on page 286.

Upgrade and Repair Unit

(URU)

Hardware: 5 minutes

Tools: Phillips PH2 / (+) No. 2 screw driver

TX1330 M4 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual 291

Expansion cards and backup units

Figure 196: Removing the riser card

ÊDisconnect the power cable (1).

ÊRemove the two screws (2).

ÊRemove the riser card (3).

ÊRemove the PCI adapter board from slot 1 (4).

9.4.4.3 Installing the new riser card

Figure 197: Preparing the riser card

ÊFold the cable under the riser card (1).

ÊAngle the PCI adapter board (2).

292 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual TX1330 M4

Expansion cards and backup units

Figure 198: Installing the riser card

ÊInsert the PCI adapter board in slot 1 (1).

ÊFit the riser card onto the two spacer bolts (2).

ÊFasten the riser card with the two screws (3).

ÊConnect the power cable (4).

ÊInstall the expansion card in the riser card slot, see section "Installing

expansion cards" on page 279.

9.4.4.4 Concluding steps

ÊIf applicable, install the SAS expander holder, see section "Installing the

SAS expander holder" on page 254

ÊInstall the system fan module, see section "Installing the system fan module"

on page 83

Ê"Reassembling" on page 67

ÊWhen working on a rack-mounted server:

"Sliding the server into the rack" on page 72

ÊConnect all external cables to the expansion card installed in the riser card

slot.

Ê"Connecting the power cord" on page 78

Ê"Switching on the server" on page 80

TX1330 M4 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual 293

Expansion cards and backup units

9.4.5 Replacing a TFM

IDepending on the RAID controller, different TFM kits are available.

9.4.5.1 Preliminary steps

Ê"Locating the defective server" on page 51

Ê"Shutting down the server" on page 53

Ê"Disconnecting the power cord" on page 54

Ê"Getting access to the component" on page 55

ÊRemove the system fan module, see section "Removing the system fan

module" on page 81

9.4.5.2 Removing the defective TFM

ÊRemove the depending expansion card, see section "Removing expansion

cards" on page 285.

Example RAID controller

Figure 199: Disconnecting the FBU adapter cable from the TFM

ÊDisconnect the FBU adapter cable from the TFM.

Upgrade and Repair Unit

(URU)

Hardware: 10 minutes

Tools: Phillips PH1 / (+) No. 1 screw driver

294 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual TX1330 M4

Expansion cards and backup units

Figure 200: Removing the TFM

ÊRemove the two screws (1).

ÊRemove the TFM (2).

INote for replacing the TFM:

The two spacer bolts can remain on the RAID controller.

TX1330 M4 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual 295

Expansion cards and backup units

9.4.5.3 Installing the new TFM

Example RAID controller

Figure 201: Mounting the TFM (A)

ÊIf no TFM has been installed before: fit the two spacer bolts on the RAID

controller.

296 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual TX1330 M4

Expansion cards and backup units

Figure 202: Mounting the TFM (B)

ÊFasten the TFM on the RAID controller with two screws from the TFM kit.

Figure 203: Mounting the TFM (C)

ÊConnect the FBU adapter cable to the TFM.

ÊInstall the expansion card, see section "Installing expansion cards" on

page 279.

ÊConnect the SAS cables to their original connectors on the SAS RAID

controller.

TX1330 M4 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual 297

Expansion cards and backup units

9.4.5.4 Concluding steps

ÊInstall the system fan module, see section "Installing the system fan module"

on page 83

Ê"Reassembling" on page 67

Ê"Connecting the power cord" on page 78

Ê"Switching on the server" on page 80

298 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual TX1330 M4

Expansion cards and backup units

9.5 Flash Backup Unit (FBU)

The FBU backs up the memory contents of the RAID controller in the event of

a power failure. Up to two FBUs can be installed in the system.

VCAUTION!

Depending on the RAID controller, different FBUs are available. In

configurations with PRAID EP5x0i, an FBU345 is required.

Figure 204: Position of the shoulder screw caps

Pos. Component

1FBU 1

2FBU 2

TX1330 M4 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual 299

Expansion cards and backup units

9.5.1 Installing an FBU

9.5.1.1 Preliminary steps

Ê"Shutting down the server" on page 53

Ê"Disconnecting the power cord" on page 54

Ê"Getting access to the component" on page 55

ÊRemove the system fan module, see section "Removing the system fan

module" on page 81

ÊIf applicable, remove the SAS expander holder without disconnecting

cables, see section "Removing the SAS expander holder" on page 256.

Position the SAS expander holder on the HDD cages to get more space.

Upgrade and Repair Unit

(URU)

Hardware: 5 minutes

Tools: FBU: tool-less

300 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual TX1330 M4

Expansion cards and backup units

9.5.1.2 Preparing the FBU

Figure 205: Installing the FBU in the FBU holder

ÊAt a slight angle, fit the FBU under the right retaining bracket of the holder.

ÊPush in the FBU until it locks in place.

ÊEnsure that the FBU is properly seated in the FBU holder.

TX1330 M4 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual 301

Expansion cards and backup units

Figure 206: Connecting the FBU adapter cable to the FBU

ÊConnect the FBU cable to the FBU adapter cable.

302 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual TX1330 M4

Expansion cards and backup units

9.5.1.3 Installing the FBU

Figure 207: Installing the FBU with the FBU holder

ÊPlace the FBU holder to the three shoulder screw caps in the chassis.

ÊPush the FBU holder direction of the arrow until it engages.

ÊEnsure that the locking handle on the FBU holder properly snaps in place

(see close-up).

TX1330 M4 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual 303

Expansion cards and backup units

Example FBU (PRAID EP4x0i) and FBU 345 (PRAID EP5x0i)

Figure 208: Example configuration with FBU and FBU 345

9.5.1.4 Concluding steps

ÊIf applicable, install the SAS expander holder, see section "Installing the

SAS expander holder" on page 254

ÊInstall the system fan module, see section "Installing the system fan module"

on page 83

Ê"Reassembling" on page 67

Ê"Connecting the power cord" on page 78

Ê"Switching on the server" on page 80

Ê"Updating expansion card firmware" on page 104.

Pos. Component

1 FBU 345 with PRAID EP5x0i

2 FBU with PRAID EP4x0i

304 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual TX1330 M4

Expansion cards and backup units

9.5.2 Removing an FBU

VCAUTION!

●Dispose of used battery properly. Keep away from children.

●Do not throw flash backup units into the trash can. Batteries must be

disposed of in accordance with local regulations concerning special

waste.

9.5.2.1 Preliminary steps

Ê"Shutting down the server" on page 53

Ê"Disconnecting the power cord" on page 54

Ê"Getting access to the component" on page 55

ÊIf applicable, remove the SAS expander holder without disconnecting

cables, see section "Removing the SAS expander holder" on page 256.

Position the SAS expander holder on the HDD cages to get more space.

Upgrade and Repair Unit

(URU)

Hardware: 5 minutes

Tools: tool-less

TX1330 M4 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual 305

Expansion cards and backup units

9.5.2.2 Removing the FBU

Figure 209: Removing the FBU holder from the chassis

ÊLift up the green locking handle on the FBU holder (1) while sliding the FBU

holder in the direction of the arrow as far as it will go (2).

IAfter that, the shoulder screw caps on the chassis will rest in the wide

ends of the keyhole slots on the FBU holder.

ÊLift the FBU holder out of the chassis (3).

306 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual TX1330 M4

Expansion cards and backup units

Figure 210: Disconnecting the FBU adapter cable from the FBU cable

ÊDisconnect the FBU cable from the FBU.

TX1330 M4 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual 307

Expansion cards and backup units

9.5.2.3 Removing the FBU from the FBU holder

Figure 211: Removing the FBU from the FBU holder

ÊPull the FBU at a slight angle out of the holder.

9.5.2.4 Concluding steps

ÊIf applicable, install the SAS expander holder, see section "Installing the

SAS expander holder" on page 254

Ê"Reassembling" on page 67

Ê"Connecting the power cord" on page 78

Ê"Switching on the server" on page 80

308 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual TX1330 M4

Expansion cards and backup units

9.5.3 Replacing an FBU

VCAUTION!

●Dispose of used battery properly. Keep away from children.

●Do not throw battery backup units into the trash can. Batteries must

be disposed of in accordance with local regulations concerning

special waste.

9.5.3.1 Preliminary steps

Ê"Locating the defective server" on page 51

Ê"Shutting down the server" on page 53

Ê"Disconnecting the power cord" on page 54

Ê"Getting access to the component" on page 55

ÊRemove the system fan module, see section "Removing the system fan

module" on page 81

ÊIf applicable, remove the SAS expander holder without disconnecting

cables, see section "Removing the SAS expander holder" on page 256.

Position the SAS expander holder on the HDD cages to get more space.

Ê"Locating the defective component" on page 52

9.5.3.2 Removing the defective FBU

ÊRemove the FBU with the FBU holder, see section "Removing an FBU" on

page 304.

ÊRemove the FBU from the FBU holder, see section "Removing the FBU from

the FBU holder" on page 307.

Upgrade and Repair Unit

(URU)

Hardware: 10 minutes

Tools: tool-less

TX1330 M4 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual 309

Expansion cards and backup units

9.5.3.3 Installing a new FBU

ÊInstall the FBU into the FBU holder, see section "Preparing the FBU" on

page 300.

ÊInstall the FBU with the FBU holder, see section "Installing the FBU" on

page 302.

9.5.3.4 Concluding steps

ÊIf applicable, install the SAS expander holder, see section "Installing the

SAS expander holder" on page 254

ÊInstall the system fan module, see section "Installing the system fan module"

on page 83

Ê"Reassembling" on page 67

Ê"Connecting the power cord" on page 78

Ê"Switching on the server" on page 80

Ê"Updating expansion card firmware" on page 104

310 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual TX1330 M4

Expansion cards and backup units

TX1330 M4 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual 311

10 Main memory

Safety notes

VCAUTION!

●Do not install unsupported third party memory modules. For more

information on supported memory modules, see section "Basic

information" on page 312. Doing so may cause electric shock, a fire,

or failures.

●Memory modules remain hot after shutdown. Wait for components to

cool down before installing or removing memory modules to prevent

burns.

●Do not insert and remove memory modules repeatedly. Doing so may

cause failures.

●If the memory module has not been correctly inserted, it may cause

a fire. Insert the memory module with attention.

●Pressing out the securing clips on the memory module connector will

eject the installed memory module. To prevent damage and injuries

eject memory modules carefully without applying excessive force.

●For more information, see chapter "Important information" on

page 37.

312 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual TX1330 M4

Main memory

10.1 Basic information

Figure 212: Memory slots overview

The system board is equipped with 4 memory connectors

The system has to be equipped with at least one memory module.

10.1.1 Memory sequence

10.1.1.1 Population rules

– Populate memory slot 1 / channel A (DIMM 1A) first.

– Within all channels memory slot 1 must be populated prior to slot 2.

– For maximum performance, populate both channels with the same amount

of memory (symmetric dual channel configuration).

– If memory modules with different capacities are used:

– Install modules with higher capacities first.

– Within a channel, install modules in descending order of capacity.

– If memory modules with different speeds are used, the lowest clock rate

applies for all DIMMs.

CPU

RCVR

PWD CLR

nal connectors

LAN 1

Management

LAN / USB 2.0

LAN 2 /

VGA

Shared LAN 1 /

USB 2.0

Serial

Micro

Frontpanel

OOB

USB 2

PWR1

Front USB

USB 1

ROC

FAN4

P30

PC98

PWR MAIN

iRMC

Intel

i210

DIMM1B

DIMM2B

DIMM1A

DIMM2A

DIMM1A

DIMM1B

DIMM2B

DIMM2A

TX1330 M4 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual 313

Main memory

Supported memory modules

– DDR4-2666 unbuffered single rank (SR) or dual rank (DR) UDIMMs with

ECC

– Support for up to four UDIMM modules

– Supported capacities: 4 GB, 8 GB, 16 GB

– Maximum amount of RAM: 64 GB

10.1.1.2 Modes of operation

– The maximum performance can be achieved in a symmetric dual-channel

configuration. Therefore both channels have to be populated with the same

amount of memory. The DRAM device technology (1 Gbit / 2 Gbit / 4 Gbit)

may vary from one channel to the other.

– If the amount of memory differs between the two channels, the system board

will run in dual-channel asymmetric mode.

– Regardless of the mode, all DIMMs will run at the highest common

frequency that is allowed by the SPD Data of the DIMMs and the maximum

speed of the selected configuration.

– Single-channel mode is used if one memory module is populated in

DIMM 1A.

Channel A B

Slot ID 1A 2A 1B 2B

DIMM #

2o o

3ooo

4oooo

Table 3: Mounting order - dual channel mode and single channel mode: Single CPU

314 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual TX1330 M4

Main memory

10.2 Installing memory modules

10.2.1 Preliminary steps

Ê"Suspending BitLocker functionality" on page 97

Ê"Shutting down the server" on page 53

Ê"Disconnecting the power cord" on page 54

Ê"Getting access to the component" on page 55

ÊRemove the system fan module, see section "Removing the system fan

module" on page 81

10.2.2 Selecting the memory slot

ÊChoose the memory slot according to the configuration rules in "Basic

information" on page 312.

10.2.3 Installing a memory module

Figure 213: Opening the securing clips

ÊPress the securing clips on both sides of the memory slot concerned

outward.

Upgrade and Repair Unit

(URU)

Hardware: 5 minutes

Tools: tool-less

TX1330 M4 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual 315

Main memory

Figure 214: Installing a memory module

ÊAlign the notch on the bottom of the module with the crossbar in the slot.

ÊPress down on the memory module until the securing clips snap into the

cutouts at each end of the module.

10.2.4 Concluding steps

ÊInstall the system fan module, see section "Installing the system fan module"

on page 83

Ê"Reassembling" on page 67

Ê"Connecting the power cord" on page 78

Ê"Switching on the server" on page 80

Ê"Resuming BitLocker functionality" on page 117

10.3 Removing memory modules

10.3.1 Preliminary steps

Ê"Suspending BitLocker functionality" on page 97

Ê"Shutting down the server" on page 53

Ê"Disconnecting the power cord" on page 54

Upgrade and Repair Unit

(URU)

Hardware: 5 minutes

Tools: tool-less

316 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual TX1330 M4

Main memory

Ê"Getting access to the component" on page 55

ÊRemove the system fan module, see section "Removing the system fan

module" on page 81

10.3.2 Removing a memory module

Figure 215: Removing memory modules (A)

ÊEject the desired memory module by pressing out the securing clips at each

end of the memory slot.

Figure 216: Removing memory modules (B)

ÊRemove the ejected memory module.

10.3.3 Concluding steps

ÊInstall the system fan module, see section "Installing the system fan module"

on page 83

Ê"Reassembling" on page 67

Ê"Connecting the power cord" on page 78

Ê"Switching on the server" on page 80

Ê"Resuming BitLocker functionality" on page 117

TX1330 M4 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual 317

Main memory

10.4 Replacing the memory modules

10.4.1 Preliminary steps

Ê"Locating the defective server" on page 51

Ê"Suspending BitLocker functionality" on page 97

Ê"Shutting down the server" on page 53

Ê"Disconnecting the power cord" on page 54

Ê"Getting access to the component" on page 55

ÊRemove the system fan module, see section "Removing the system fan

module" on page 81

Ê"Locating the defective component" on page 52).

10.4.2 Removing the defective memory module

ÊRemove the memory module, see section "Removing a memory module" on

page 316.

10.4.3 Installing the new memory module

ÊInstall the memory module, see section "Installing a memory module" on

page 314.

Upgrade and Repair Unit

(URU)

Hardware: 5 minutes

Software: 5 minutes

Tools: tool-less

318 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual TX1330 M4

Main memory

10.4.4 Concluding steps

ÊInstall the system fan module, see section "Installing the system fan module"

on page 83

Ê"Reassembling" on page 67

Ê"Connecting the power cord" on page 78

Ê"Switching on the server" on page 80

Ê"Resetting the error status after replacing memory modules or CPUs" on

page 108

Ê"Enabling replaced components in the BIOS" on page 112

Ê"Resuming BitLocker functionality" on page 117

TX1330 M4 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual 319

11 Processor (CPU)

Safety notes

VCAUTION!

●Do not install unsupported CPUs. For more information on supported

CPUs, see section "Basic information" on page 320.

●Circuit boards and soldered parts of internal options are exposed and

can be damaged by static electricity. Always discharge static build-up

(e.g. by touching a grounded object) before handling electrostatic-

sensitive devices (ESDs).

●Do not touch the circuitry on boards or soldered parts. Hold circuit

boards by their metallic areas or edges.

●When removing or installing CPUs, be careful not to touch or bend

the spring contacts on the CPU sockets.

●Never touch the underside of the CPUs. Even minor soiling such as

grease from the skin can impair the CPU’s operation or destroy the

CPUs.

●For more information, see chapter "Important information" on

page 37.

320 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual TX1330 M4

Processor (CPU)

11.1 Basic information

The system board D3673 offers one socket for Intel Xeon CPUs.

Supported CPUs

– Intel Xeon E3-12nnV6 series CPUs and Pentium G4560, Core i3-7100

– Socket type: LGA 1150 package

– Thermal Design Power (TDP) class: up to 80 W

IFor system relevant information, see the hardware configurator of your

server available online at the following address:

http://ts.fujitsu.com/products/standard_servers/index.html

For Japan:

http://www.fujitsu.com/jp/products/computing/servers/primergy/

11.2 Upgrading or replacing the CPU

VCAUTION!

CPUs are modules which are extremely sensitive to electro-static

discharges and therefore must always be handled with care. After a CPU

has been removed from its protective sleeve or from its socket, place it

with its smooth side down on a non-conducting, antistatic surface. Never

push a CPU over a surface.

11.2.1 Preliminary steps

ÊIf applicable, "Locating the defective server" on page 51

Ê"Suspending BitLocker functionality" on page 97

Ê"Shutting down the server" on page 53

Field Replaceable Unit

(FRU)

Hardware: 15 minutes

Software: 5 minutes

Tools: Phillips PH2 / (+) No. 2 screw driver

TX1330 M4 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual 321

Processor (CPU)

Ê"Disconnecting the power cord" on page 54

Ê"Getting access to the component" on page 55

ÊRemove the system fan module, see section "Removing the system fan

module" on page 81

11.2.2 Removing the heat sink

Figure 217: Removing the heat sink

ÊLoosen the four captive screws on the heat sink in a crossover pattern (1-4).

ÊCarefully twist the heat sink back and forth to detach it from the CPU.

IThis may be necessary due to the adhesive quality of the thermal

paste located between the heat sink and CPU.

VCAUTION!

Pay special attention not to damage any system board components

surrounding the CPU socket.

ÊLift the heat sink out of the chassis.

322 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual TX1330 M4

Processor (CPU)

ÊClean residual thermal paste from the CPU surface using a lint-free cloth

and store the CPU in a save place.

11.2.3 Removing the CPU

Figure 218: Opening the socket lever

ÊUnlatch the socket lever by pushing it down and away from the socket (1).

ÊFold back the socket lever (2).

TX1330 M4 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual 323

Processor (CPU)

Figure 219: Opening the load plate

ÊRotate the socket lever to lift the load plate away from the socket.

ÊMake sure that the load plate is in the fully open position.

324 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual TX1330 M4

Processor (CPU)

Figure 220: Removing the CPU

ÊCarefully remove the CPU from its socket in a vertical motion.

VCAUTION!

Be careful not to touch or bend the spring contacts on the CPU

socket.

11.2.4 Installing the CPU

ÊConfirm that the CPU model number printed on the top of the CPU fits with

the requirements.

ÊIf applicable, remove the protective cap from the bottom side of the CPU.

TX1330 M4 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual 325

Processor (CPU)

Figure 221: Installing the CPU

ÊHold the CPU with your thumb and index finger.

ÊMake sure that the notches on the CPU align with the posts on the socket

(see close-up).

ÊLower the CPU straight down without tilting or sliding it in the socket.

VCAUTION!

– Ensure that the CPU is level in the socket.

– Be careful not to touch or bend the pins on the CPU socket.

– Never touch the underside of the CPU. Even minor soiling such

as grease from the skin can impair the CPU’s operation or destroy

the CPU.

– Ensure not to scrape or dent the CPU edges.

326 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual TX1330 M4

Processor (CPU)

Figure 222: Closing the load plate (A)

ÊLower the load plate over the CPU while leaving the socket lever in the open

position.

TX1330 M4 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual 327

Processor (CPU)

Figure 223: Closing the load plate (B)

ÊLower the socket lever while making sure that the front edge of the load plate

slides under the shoulder screw cap (see close-up) as the lever is lowered.

Figure 224: Closing the socket release lever

ÊLatch the socket lever under the load plate tab.

328 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual TX1330 M4

Processor (CPU)

11.2.5 Applying thermal paste

IFor Japan, the service engineer must follow the instruction provided

separately.

IIf the CPU upgrade or replacement kit contains a new CPU heat sink, a

thin layer of thermal compound has already been pre-applied to its lower

surface. In this case, please proceed with section "Installing the CPU

heat sink" on page 330.

Figure 225: Thermal paste syringe

One thermal compound syringe (FTS-FSP:P304000004) contains thermal

paste for three CPUs.

In order to determine the correct amount of thermal paste (equal to 1.0 gram),

divide the grey area of the syringe up into three equal segments.

IAdd graduation marks to the syringe using a permanent marker to help

you apply the thermal paste.

TX1330 M4 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual 329

Processor (CPU)

Figure 226: Applying thermal paste

ÊApply a small point-shaped amount of thermal paste (1.0 gram, see

description above) to the center of the CPU surface as shown.

VCAUTION!

Do not mix different types of thermal paste.

330 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual TX1330 M4

Processor (CPU)

11.2.6 Installing the CPU heat sink

Figure 227: Installing the heat sink

ÊCarefully seat the heat sink on the four threaded holes as shown.

VCAUTION!

– Ensure that the screws on the heat sink are properly seated on the

threaded holes.

– Ensure that the heat sink cooling fins match the direction of the

airflow!

ÊFasten the four captive screws on the heat sink in a crossover pattern (screw

torque: 0.6 Nm, not applicable for Japan) (1-4).

TX1330 M4 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual 331

Processor (CPU)

11.2.7 Concluding steps

ÊInstall the system fan module, see section "Installing the system fan module"

on page 83

Ê"Reassembling" on page 67

Ê"Connecting the power cord" on page 78

Ê"Switching on the server" on page 80

IWhen the system is powered on after a CPU has been replaced or

upgraded, the Global Error indicator will start flashing with the

message CPU has been changed.

This only indicates that the CPU configuration has been altered.

There is no technical problem.

Proceed as follows:

ÊRestart your server.

ÊAs soon as the startup screen appears, press the [F2] function

key to enter the BIOS.

If a password is assigned, enter the password and press [Enter].

ÊSelect the Save & Exit menu.

ÊSelect Save Changes and Exit or Save Changes and Reset.

ÊVerify that the Global Error indicator stops flashing.

ÊIf applicable, "Updating or recovering the BIOS and the iRMC S5" on

page 102

Ê"Resetting the error status after replacing memory modules or CPUs" on

page 108

Ê"Enabling replaced components in the BIOS" on page 112

Ê"Resuming BitLocker functionality" on page 117

332 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual TX1330 M4

Processor (CPU)

11.3 Replacing the heat sink

11.3.1 Preliminary steps

ÊIf applicable, "Locating the defective server" on page 51

Ê"Shutting down the server" on page 53

Ê"Disconnecting the power cord" on page 54

Ê"Getting access to the component" on page 55

ÊRemove the system fan module, see section "Removing the system fan

module" on page 81

11.3.2 Removing the defective heat sink

ÊRemove the CPU heat sink, see section "Removing the heat sink" on

page 321.

ÊRemove the residual thermal paste from the CPU surface.

ÊClean the CPU surface using a lint-free cloth.

11.3.3 Installing the new heat sink

ÊRemove the protective cover on the underside of the new heat sink.

VCAUTION!

Do not touch the thermal paste on the underside of the heat sink.

ÊInstall the CPU heat sink, see section "Installing the CPU heat sink" on

page 330.

Field Replaceable Unit

(FRU)

Hardware: 15 minutes

Tools: Phillips PH2 / (+) No. 2 screw driver

TX1330 M4 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual 333

Processor (CPU)

11.3.4 Concluding steps

ÊInstall the system fan module, see section "Installing the system fan module"

on page 83

Ê"Reassembling" on page 67

Ê"Connecting the power cord" on page 78

Ê"Switching on the server" on page 80

11.4 Handling the protective cover

11.4.1 Installing the protective cover

Figure 228: Attaching the protective socket cover

ÊCarefully lower the protective socket cover onto the CPU socket in a vertical

motion until it snaps in place.

334 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual TX1330 M4

Processor (CPU)

Figure 229: Closing the load plate (A)

ÊLower the load plate over the CPU cover while leaving the socket lever in its

open position.

TX1330 M4 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual 335

Processor (CPU)

Figure 230: Closing the load plate (B)

ÊLower the socket lever while making sure that the front edge of the load plate

slides under the shoulder screw cap (see close-up) as the lever is lowered.

Figure 231: Latching the socket lever

ÊLatch the socket lever under the load plate tab.

336 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual TX1330 M4

Processor (CPU)

11.4.2 Removing the protective cover

Figure 232: Opening socket release lever

ÊUnlatch the socket release lever by pushing it down and away from the

socket (1).

ÊFold back the socket release lever (2).

TX1330 M4 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual 337

Processor (CPU)

Figure 233: Opening the load plate

ÊPress down on the socket lever to lift the load plate away from the socket.

ÊFully open the load plate.

338 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual TX1330 M4

Processor (CPU)

Figure 234: Removing the protective cover

ÊRemove the protective cover from the CPU socket. Proceed as follows:

ÊPlace your thumb against the front edge of the protective socket cover

and rest your index finger on the rear grip.

ÊLift the front edge of the socket to disengage the cover from the socket

and lift the cover up and away from the socket.

VCAUTION!

ÊBe careful not to touch or bend the pins on the CPU socket.

ÊSave the socket cover for future use. Always replace the socket

cover if you remove the CPU from the socket.

TX1330 M4 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual 339

12 Accessible drives

Safety notes

VCAUTION!

●Before installing an accessible drive, acquaint yourself with the

drive's user documentation.

●When inserting an accessible drive into the server, ensure not to

pinch or strain any connected cables.

●When installing an accessible drive, hold it by its sides. Applying force

to the top of the casing may cause failures.

●When disposing of, transferring, or returning a backup drive, ensure

that all backup media has been removed from the drive.

●Circuit boards and soldered parts of internal options are exposed and

can be damaged by static electricity. Always discharge static build-up

(e.g. by touching a grounded object) before handling electrostatic-

sensitive devices (ESDs).

●Do not touch the circuitry on boards or soldered parts. Hold circuit

boards by their metallic areas or edges.

●For more information, see chapter "Important information" on

page 37.

340 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual TX1330 M4

Accessible drives

12.1 Basic information

Accessible drive bays

PRIMERGY TX1330 M4 server offers three 5.25-inch accessible drive bays for

ODDs and backup drives.

Figure 235: Accessible drives mounting order (rack model)

Figure 236: Accessible drives mounting order (floorstand model)

5.25 inch x 1.6 inch

TX1330 M4 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual 341

Accessible drives

Mounting order for accessible drives

Figure 237: Accessible drive configurations

Order Accessible drive Drive bay Max. Occupied Interface

1ODD (full height) Bay 1 11.6" x 5.25" SATA

1Slimline ODD

in Multibay Bay 1 10.5" x 5.25 SATA

2 Backup drive LTo Bay 3

if occupied: Bay 2 or 1 1 1.6" x 5.25" SAS

3RDX drive USB Bay 3

if occupied: Bay 2 or 1 21.6" x 5.25 USB 3.0

43.5-inch SAS HDD box

(4x HDD, ODD) Bays 2+3 1 3.2" x 5.25" PCIe

42.5-inch SAS HDD box

(8x HDD) Bays 2+3 1 3.2" x 5.25" SAS

4 Ultraslim ODD in 4x

3.5-inch HDD

extension box

Bays 1+2+3 1 4.8" x 5.25" SATA

Table 4: Accessible drive mounting sequence

5.25“ x 1.6“ 5.25“ x 1.6“

5.25“ SL ODD 5.25“ SL ODD

Bay 1

3.5“ HDD

5.25“ x 1.6“

8 x 2.5“ HDD

3.5“ HDD

5.25“ x 1.6“ Bay 2

3.5“ HDD

5.25“ x 1.6“ 5.25“ x 1.6“ Bay 3

3.5“ HDD

342 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual TX1330 M4

Accessible drives

12.2 Installing accessible drives

12.2.1 Preliminary steps

Ê"Shutting down the server" on page 53

Ê"Disconnecting the power cord" on page 54

Ê"Getting access to the component" on page 55

IThe front cover only needs to be removed in order to remove

accessible drive dummy covers.

12.2.2 Removing accessible drive dummy covers

ÊRemove accessible drive filler covers from the required bays, see section

"Accessible drive filler covers" on page 90.

ÊRemove accessible drive covers, see section "Accessible drive covers" on

page 92.

12.2.3 Installing mounting brackets to RDX backup drives

This section is not applied for Japan.

Backup drive mounting brackets are contained in mounting kit S26361-F3753-

E1 (to be ordered separately with the backup drive).

INo new mounting brackets are available when replacing a backup drive

during service.

ÊIf applicable, remove existing mounting brackets from the backup drive.

Upgrade and Repair Unit

(URU)

Hardware: 10 minutes

Tools: Slotted screw driver (for bending in or out accessible drive mounting

brackets)

Phillips PH2 / (+) No. 2 screw driver (for installing mounting brackets)

TX1330 M4 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual 343

Accessible drives

Figure 238: Backup drive mounting brackets

Figure 239: Screw holes on backup drive mounting brackets

ÊNote the screw hole description stamped onto the mounting bracket:

ÊUse the square screw hole for RDX backup drives (see blue arrow).

Figure 240: Securing mounting brackets to an RDX backup drive

ÊFasten the backup drive mounting brackets to the RDX backup drive with

two screws per bracket as shown.

344 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual TX1330 M4

Accessible drives

12.2.4 Installing an accessible drive

Figure 241: Mounting brackets in right position

ÊEnsure that the four mounting brackets in the desired accessible drive bay

have not been bent inwards as for installing HDD extension boxes. If

applicable, bend the mounting brackets back to the original positions (see

close-up).

ÊOpen the locking bar, see section "Opening the accessible drive locking bar"

on page 86.

TX1330 M4 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual 345

Accessible drives

Figure 242: Inserting the accessible drive

ÊInsert the accessible drive into its installation bay and carefully push in until

it lines up with the front panel.

VCAUTION!

For installing a LTO drive: ensure that the power cables routed behind

the accessible drive cage are not trapped when pushing the LTO

drive in its bay.

ÊClose the locking bar, see section "Closing the accessible drive locking bar"

on page 88.

346 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual TX1330 M4

Accessible drives

12.2.5 Connecting cables to a accessible drive

Example RDX drive

Figure 243: Connecting the RDX drive

ÊConnect the cables to the RDX drive:

Figure 244: Connecting SATA cable

ÊConnect the SATA cable to the system board connector "SATA ODD" (1).

ÊRun the cables through the cable guide as shown (2).

1SATA cable

2Power cable

TX1330 M4 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual 347

Accessible drives

Example LTO drive or ODD

IFor connecting an LTO drive or a ODD, see the cable plan in chapter

"Appendix B" on page 477.

12.2.6 Concluding steps

Ê"Reassembling" on page 67

Ê"Connecting the power cord" on page 78

Ê"Switching on the server" on page 80

12.3 Removing accessible drives

12.3.1 Preliminary steps

Ê"Locating the defective server" on page 51

Ê"Removing backup and optical disk media" on page 99

Ê"Verifying and configuring the backup software solution" on page 100

Ê"Shutting down the server" on page 53

Ê"Getting access to the component" on page 55

IThe front cover only needs to be removed in order to install

accessible drive dummy covers.

Upgrade and Repair Unit

(URU)

Hardware: 10 minutes

Tools: tool-less

348 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual TX1330 M4

Accessible drives

12.3.2 Removing an accessible drive

ÊRemove all cables from the accessible drive.

ÊOpen the locking bar, see section "Opening the accessible drive locking bar"

on page 86.

Figure 245: Removing the accessible drive

ÊCarefully pull the accessible drive out of its installation bay.

ÊClose the locking bar, see section "Closing the accessible drive locking bar"

on page 88.

12.3.3 Installing accessible drive dummy covers

ÊIf applicable, install accessible drive filler covers, see section "Accessible

drive filler covers" on page 90.

ÊIf applicable, install accessible drive covers, see section "Accessible drive

covers" on page 92.

TX1330 M4 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual 349

Accessible drives

12.3.4 Concluding steps

Ê"Reassembling" on page 67

Ê"Connecting the power cord" on page 78

Ê"Switching on the server" on page 80

12.4 Replacing accessible drives

12.4.1 Preliminary steps

Ê"Locating the defective server" on page 51

Ê"Removing backup and optical disk media" on page 99

Ê"Verifying and configuring the backup software solution" on page 100

Ê"Shutting down the server" on page 53

Ê"Disconnecting the power cord" on page 54

Ê"Getting access to the component" on page 55

IRemoving the front cover is not required in order to replace an

accessible drive. The front cover only needs to be removed in order

to remove/install accessible drive dummy covers and this is not

necessary here.

12.4.2 Removing the defective accessible drive

ÊRemove all cables from the accessible drive.

ÊRemove the accessible drive, see section "Removing an accessible drive"

on page 348.

Upgrade and Repair Unit

(URU)

Hardware: 15 minutes

Tools: Phillips PH2 / (+) No. 2 screw driver (for installing mounting brackets)

350 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual TX1330 M4

Accessible drives

12.4.3 Installing the new accessible drive

ÊInstall the accessible drive, see section "Installing an accessible drive" on

page 344.

ÊConnect all cables to their original accessible drive connectors, see cable

plans in chapter "Appendix B" on page 477.

12.4.4 Concluding steps

Ê"Reassembling" on page 67

Ê"Connecting the power cord" on page 78

Ê"Switching on the server" on page 80

TX1330 M4 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual 351

Accessible drives

12.5 Slimline ODD in Multibay box

12.5.1 Installing the slimline ODD

12.5.1.1 Preliminary steps

Ê"Shutting down the server" on page 53

Ê"Disconnecting the power cord" on page 54

Ê"Getting access to the component" on page 55

ÊIf applicable, "Removing the Multibay box" on page 356

12.5.1.2 Removing the ODD dummy module

ÊPress up on the locking tab to disengage the slimline ODD dummy module

(see figure 252).

ÊFrom inside the Multibay module, press out on the ODD dummy module and

pull it out of its bay.

Upgrade and Repair Unit

(URU)

Hardware: 10 minutes

Tools: – Phillips PH2 / (+) No. 2 screw driver

– Slotted screw driver (for bending in or out accessible drive

mounting brackets)

352 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual TX1330 M4

Accessible drives

Figure 246: Disassembling the slimline ODD dummy module

ÊDisengage (1) and remove (2) the slimline ODD dummy from the slimline

ODD installation frame.

12.5.1.3 Installing the slimline ODD into the Multibay box

Figure 247: Mounting the slimline ODD in the installation frame

ÊFit the slimline ODD into the slimline ODD installation frame.

ÊEnsure that the four pins on the frame (see circles) engage with the screw

holes on the drive.

ÊEnsure that the ODD is properly seated in the installation frame.

TX1330 M4 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual 353

Accessible drives

Figure 248: Mounting the slimline ODD module in the Multibay box

ÊInsert the slimline ODD module into the Multibay box (1) and push back until

the locking tab (2) engages.

12.5.1.4 Removing accessible drive dummy covers

ÊIf applicable, remove the accessible drive filler cover from installation bay 1,

see section "Accessible drive filler covers" on page 90.

ÊIf applicable, remove the accessible drive cover from installation bay 1, see

section "Accessible drive covers" on page 92.

12.5.1.5 Installing the Multibay box

ÊEnsure that the four mounting brackets in installation bay 1 have not been

bent out (see figure 241).

ÊOpen the locking bar, see section "Opening the accessible drive locking bar"

on page 86.

354 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual TX1330 M4

Accessible drives

Figure 249: Inserting the Multibay box

ÊInsert the Multibay box into installation bay 1 and carefully push in until it

lines up with the front panel (1).

ÊClose the locking bar (2) until it locks in place (3).

Figure 250: Connecting cables to the slimline ODD

ÊConnect the cables to the slimline ODD:

ÊConnect the SATA cable to the system board, see figure 244.

1SATA power cable

2SATA cable

TX1330 M4 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual 355

Accessible drives

12.5.1.6 Concluding steps

Ê"Reassembling" on page 67

Ê"Connecting the power cord" on page 78

Ê"Switching on the server" on page 80

12.5.2 Removing a slimline ODD

12.5.2.1 Preliminary steps

Ê"Removing backup and optical disk media" on page 99

Ê"Shutting down the server" on page 53

Ê"Disconnecting the power cord" on page 54

Ê"Getting access to the component" on page 55

Upgrade and Repair Unit

(URU)

Hardware: 10 minutes

Tools: Phillips PH2 / (+) No. 2 screw driver

356 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual TX1330 M4

Accessible drives

12.5.2.2 Removing the Multibay box

ÊRemove all cables from the slimline ODD.

ÊOpen the locking bar, see section "Opening the accessible drive locking bar"

on page 86.

Figure 251: Removing the Multibay box

ÊCarefully pull the Multibay box out of its installation bay (1).

ÊClose the locking bar (2) until it locks in place (3).

TX1330 M4 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual 357

Accessible drives

12.5.2.3 Removing the slimline ODD from the Multibay box

Figure 252: Removing the slimline ODD from the Multibay box

ÊPress up on the locking tab to disengage the slimline ODD module (1).

ÊFrom inside the Multibay box, press out on the slimline ODD module and pull

it out of its bay (2).

Figure 253: Removing the slimline ODD from its installation frame

ÊDisengage (1) and remove (2) the slimline ODD from its installation frame.

358 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual TX1330 M4

Accessible drives

12.5.2.4 Installing a ODD dummy

Figure 254: Mounting the slimline ODD dummy insert in the installation frame

ÊFit the slimline ODD dummy insert into the slimline ODD installation frame.

ÊEnsure that the four pins on the frame (see arrows) engage with the side

holes on the dummy insert.

ÊInsert the slimline ODD dummy module into the Multibay box and push back

until the locking tab engages (see figure 248).

12.5.2.5 Installing the Multibay box

ÊInstall the Multibay box, see section "Installing the Multibay box" on

page 353.

12.5.2.6 Concluding steps

Ê"Reassembling" on page 67

Ê"Connecting the power cord" on page 78

Ê"Switching on the server" on page 80

TX1330 M4 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual 359

Accessible drives

12.5.3 Replacing a slimline ODD

12.5.3.1 Preliminary steps

Ê"Locating the defective server" on page 51

Ê"Removing backup and optical disk media" on page 99

Ê"Shutting down the server" on page 53

Ê"Disconnecting the power cord" on page 54

Ê"Getting access to the component" on page 55

Ê"Removing the Multibay box" on page 356

12.5.3.2 Removing the defective slimline ODD

ÊRemove the slimline ODD from the Multibay box, see section "Removing the

slimline ODD from the Multibay box" on page 357.

12.5.3.3 Installing the new slimline ODD

ÊInstall the slimline ODD into the Multibay box, see section "Installing the

slimline ODD into the Multibay box" on page 352.

12.5.3.4 Concluding steps

Ê"Installing the Multibay box" on page 353

Ê"Reassembling" on page 67

Ê"Connecting the power cord" on page 78

Ê"Switching on the server" on page 80

Upgrade and Repair Unit

(URU)

Hardware: 10 minutes

Tools: – Phillips PH2 / (+) No. 2 screw driver

– Slotted screw driver (for bending in or out accessible drive

mounting brackets)

360 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual TX1330 M4

Accessible drives

ÊIf applicable, "Verifying and configuring the backup software solution" on

page 100

12.6 Ultraslim ODD in 4x 3.5-inch HDD extension

box

12.6.1 Installing the ultraslim ODD

12.6.1.1 Preliminary steps

Ê"Shutting down the server" on page 53

Ê"Disconnecting the power cord" on page 54

Ê"Getting access to the component" on page 55

IThe front cover only needs to be removed in order to remove

accessible drive dummy covers. If the HDD extension box is already

installed in the server and will be removed in order to install an

ultraslim ODD, skip this step.

ÊIf applicable, "Removing the 4x 3.5-inch HDD extension box" on page 246

Upgrade and Repair Unit

(URU)

Hardware: 10 minutes

Tools: – Phillips PH1 / (+) No. 1 screw driver

– Slotted screw driver (for bending in or out accessible drive

mounting brackets)

TX1330 M4 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual 361

Accessible drives

12.6.1.2 Installing the ultraslim ODD into the HDD extension box

Figure 255: Removing the ultraslim ODD dummy cover

ÊRemove the ultraslim ODD dummy cover.

VCAUTION!

Keep the dummy cover for future use. If a ultraslim ODD is removed and

not immediately replaced by a new one, a ultraslim ODD dummy cover

must be replaced in the bay to comply with applicable EMC regulations

and satisfy cooling requirements.

362 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual TX1330 M4

Accessible drives

Figure 256: Removing the ultraslim ODD latch

ÊRemove the two screws from the locking latch (see circles).

ÊRemove the locking latch.

Figure 257: Installing the locking latch on the ultraslim ODD

ÊFasten the locking latch to the ultraslim ODD with its two original screws (see

close-up).

TX1330 M4 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual 363

Accessible drives

Figure 258: Installing the ultraslim ODD on the HDD extension box

ÊSlide the ultraslim ODD into its bay until it locks into place (see close-up).

12.6.1.3 Installing the 4x 3.5-inch HDD extension box

ÊInstall the 4x 3.5-inch HDD extension box, see section "Installing the 4x 3.5-

inch HDD extension box" on page 242.

Figure 259: Connecting cables to the ultraslim ODD

ÊConnect the cables to the ultraslim ODD:

ÊConnect the SATA cable from the ultraslim ODD to the system board, see

figure 244.

1SATA power cable

2SATA cable

364 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual TX1330 M4

Accessible drives

12.6.1.4 Concluding steps

Ê"Reassembling" on page 67

Ê"Connecting the power cord" on page 78

Ê"Switching on the server" on page 80

12.6.2 Removing the ultraslim ODD

12.6.2.1 Preliminary steps

Ê"Removing backup and optical disk media" on page 99

Ê"Shutting down the server" on page 53

Ê"Disconnecting the power cord" on page 54

Ê"Getting access to the component" on page 55

IThe front cover only needs to be removed in order to remove

accessible drive dummy covers. If the HDD extension box is already

installed in the server and will be removed in order to install an

ultraslim ODD, skip this step.

12.6.2.2 Removing the 4x 3.5-inch HDD extension box

ÊRemove the 4x 3.5-inch HDD extension box, see section "Removing the 4x

3.5-inch HDD extension box" on page 246.

Upgrade and Repair Unit

(URU)

Hardware: 10 minutes

Tools: Phillips PH2 / (+) No. 2 screw driver

TX1330 M4 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual 365

Accessible drives

12.6.2.3 Removing the ultraslim ODD from the extension box

Figure 260: Removing the ultraslim ODD from the extension box

ÊPull down the locking latch (1).

ÊRemove the ultraslim ODD (2).

Figure 261: Removing the locking latch from the ultraslim ODD

ÊRemove the two screws (1).

ÊRemove the locking latch (2).

366 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual TX1330 M4

Accessible drives

ÊIf the removed ultraslim ODD is not to be replaced by a new drive:

ÊFasten the locking latch to the ultraslim ODD with its two original screws

to the HDD cage (see figure 256).

ÊInsert the ultraslim ODD dummy cover (see figure 255).

12.6.2.4 Installing the 4x 3.5-inch HDD extension box

ÊInstall the 4x 3.5-inch HDD extension box, see section "Installing the 4x 3.5-

inch HDD extension box" on page 241.

12.6.2.5 Concluding steps

Ê"Reassembling" on page 67

Ê"Connecting the power cord" on page 78

Ê"Switching on the server" on page 80

12.6.3 Replacing the ultraslim ODD

12.6.3.1 Preliminary steps

Ê"Locating the defective server" on page 51

Ê"Removing backup and optical disk media" on page 99

Ê"Shutting down the server" on page 53

Ê"Disconnecting the power cord" on page 54

Ê"Getting access to the component" on page 55

IRemoving the front cover is not required in order to replace the

ultraslim ODD in the 4x 3.5-inch HDD extension box.

Upgrade and Repair Unit

(URU)

Hardware: 10 minutes

Tools: – Phillips PH2 / (+) No. 2 screw driver

– Slotted screw driver (for bending in or out accessible drive

mounting brackets)

TX1330 M4 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual 367

Accessible drives

12.6.3.2 Removing the defective ultraslim ODD

ÊRemove the 4x 3.5-inch HDD extension box, see section "Removing the 4x

3.5-inch HDD extension box" on page 246.

ÊRemove the ultraslim ODD, see section "Removing the ultraslim ODD from

the extension box" on page 365.

12.6.3.3 Installing the new ultraslim ODD

ÊInstall the ultraslim ODD, see section "Installing the ultraslim ODD into the

HDD extension box" on page 361.

ÊInstall the 4x 3.5-inch HDD extension box, see section "Installing the 4x 3.5-

inch HDD extension box" on page 242.

12.6.3.4 Concluding steps

Ê"Reassembling" on page 67

Ê"Connecting the power cord" on page 78

Ê"Switching on the server" on page 80

368 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual TX1330 M4

Accessible drives

12.7 Ultraslim ODD in ultraslim ODD adapter

12.7.1 Installing the ultraslim ODD

12.7.1.1 Preliminary steps

Ê"Shutting down the server" on page 53

Ê"Disconnecting the power cord" on page 54

Ê"Getting access to the component" on page 55

IThe front cover only needs to be removed in order to remove

accessible drive dummy covers.

Upgrade and Repair Unit

(URU)

Hardware: 10 minutes

Tools: – Phillips PH0 / (+) No. 0 screw driver

– Slotted screw driver (for bending in or out accessible drive

mounting brackets)

TX1330 M4 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual 369

Accessible drives

12.7.1.2 Installing the ultraslim ODD into the ultraslim ODD adapter

Figure 262: Removing the ultraslim ODD dummy cover - ultraslim ODD adapter

ÊRemove the ultraslim ODD dummy cover.

VCAUTION!

Keep the dummy cover for future use. If a ultraslim ODD is removed and

not immediately replaced by a new one, a ultraslim ODD dummy cover

must be replaced in the bay to comply with applicable EMC regulations

and satisfy cooling requirements.

Figure 263: Installing the ultraslim ODD in the ultraslim ODD adapter (A)

ÊSlide the ultraslim ODD into its bay.

370 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual TX1330 M4

Accessible drives

Figure 264: Installing the ultraslim ODD in the ultraslim ODD adapter (B)

ÊSecure the ultraslim ODD to the ultraslim ODD adapter with two screws (see

circles).

ÊConnect the power cable and the SATA cable to the ultraslim ODD (see

figure 259).

12.7.1.3 Installing the ultraslim ODD adapter

ÊInstall the ultraslim ODD adapter, see section "Installing an accessible drive"

on page 344.

ÊConnect the SATA cable from the ultraslim ODD to the system board, see

figure 244.

12.7.1.4 Concluding steps

Ê"Reassembling" on page 67

Ê"Connecting the power cord" on page 78

Ê"Switching on the server" on page 80

TX1330 M4 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual 371

Accessible drives

12.7.2 Removing the ultraslim ODD

12.7.2.1 Preliminary steps

Ê"Removing backup and optical disk media" on page 99

Ê"Shutting down the server" on page 53

Ê"Disconnecting the power cord" on page 54

Ê"Getting access to the component" on page 55

IThe front cover only needs to be removed in order to remove or install

accessible drive dummy covers.

12.7.2.2 Removing the ultraslim ODD adapter

ÊRemove the ultraslim ODD adapter, see section "Removing an accessible

drive" on page 348.

Upgrade and Repair Unit

(URU)

Hardware: 10 minutes

Tools: Phillips PH0 / (+) No. 0 screw driver

372 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual TX1330 M4

Accessible drives

12.7.2.3 Removing the ultraslim ODD from the ultraslim ODD adapter

Figure 265: Removing the ultraslim ODD from the ultraslim ODD adapter

ÊRemove the two screws (1).

ÊRemove the ultraslim ODD (2).

ÊIf the removed ultraslim ODD is not to be replaced by a new drive:

ÊInsert the ultraslim ODD dummy cover (see figure 262 on page 369).

12.7.2.4 Installing the ultraslim ODD adapter

ÊInstall the ultraslim ODD adapter, see section "Installing an accessible drive"

on page 344.

12.7.2.5 Concluding steps

Ê"Reassembling" on page 67

Ê"Connecting the power cord" on page 78

Ê"Switching on the server" on page 80

TX1330 M4 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual 373

Accessible drives

12.7.3 Replacing the ultraslim ODD

12.7.3.1 Preliminary steps

Ê"Locating the defective server" on page 51

Ê"Removing backup and optical disk media" on page 99

Ê"Shutting down the server" on page 53

Ê"Disconnecting the power cord" on page 54

Ê"Getting access to the component" on page 55

IRemoving the front cover is not required in order to replace the

ultraslim ODD.

12.7.3.2 Removing the defective ultraslim ODD

ÊRemove the ultraslim ODD adapter, see section "Removing an accessible

drive" on page 348.

ÊRemove the ultraslim ODD, see section "Removing the ultraslim ODD from

the ultraslim ODD adapter" on page 372.

12.7.3.3 Installing the new ultraslim ODD

ÊInstall the ultraslim ODD, see section "Installing the ultraslim ODD into the

ultraslim ODD adapter" on page 369.

ÊInstall the ultraslim ODD adapter, see section "Installing an accessible drive"

on page 344.

Upgrade and Repair Unit

(URU)

Hardware: 10 minutes

Tools: – Phillips PH0 / (+) No. 0 screw driver

– Slotted screw driver (for bending in or out accessible drive

mounting brackets)

374 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual TX1330 M4

Accessible drives

12.7.3.4 Concluding steps

Ê"Reassembling" on page 67

Ê"Connecting the power cord" on page 78

Ê"Switching on the server" on page 80

TX1330 M4 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual 375

13 Front panel

Safety notes

VCAUTION!

●When inserting the front panel module into the server, ensure not to

pinch or strain any connected cables.

●Circuit boards and soldered parts of internal options are exposed and

can be damaged by static electricity. Always discharge static build-up

(e.g. by touching a grounded object) before handling electrostatic-

sensitive devices (ESDs).

●Do not touch the circuitry on boards or soldered parts. Hold circuit

boards by their metallic areas or edges.

●For more information, see chapter "Important information" on

page 37.

376 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual TX1330 M4

Front panel

13.1 Replacing the front panel

Note on system information backup/restore

The front panel (front panel module, front panel board or front panel on QRL)

contains the Chassis ID EPROM that contains system information like server

name and model, housing type, serial number and manufacturing data.

To avoid the loss of non-default settings when replacing the system board, a

backup copy of important system configuration data is automatically stored from

the system board NVRAM to the Chassis ID EPROM.

VCAUTION!

For that reason the front panel and system board must not be replaced

simultaneously! In this case, restoring the system configuration data on

the system board would fail.

When replacing the front panel, the system information like server name and

model, housing type, serial number and manufacturing data are not restored

automatically. So never forget to restore it manually by Chassis ID Prom Tool.

13.1.1 Preliminary steps

Ê"Locating the defective server" on page 51

Ê"Suspending BitLocker functionality" on page 97

Ê"Shutting down the server" on page 53

Ê"Disconnecting the power cord" on page 54

Ê"Getting access to the component" on page 55

ÊRemove the system fan module, see section "Removing the system fan

module" on page 81

Field Replaceable Unit

(FRU)

Hardware: 10 minutes

Software: 5 minutes

Tools: Phillips PH2 / (+) No. 2 screw driver (for removing the rack front cover)

Other procedures: tool-less

TX1330 M4 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual 377

Front panel

ÊIf applicable, remove the SAS expander holder without disconnecting

cables, see section "Removing the SAS expander holder" on page 256.

Position the SAS expander holder on the HDD cages to get more space.

13.1.2 Removing the defective front panel module

Disconnecting the front panel cables from the system board

Figure 266: Disconnecting cables from system board

ÊDisconnect the front panel cables from the system board (1,2).

ÊRemove the front panel cables from the cable guide (see circle).

Removing the front panel module

IUnlocking and securing the front panel is illustrated by the example of the

rack server. In case of floorstand models, the accessible drive locking bar

is located on the top of the drive bay. Further information, see section

"Opening the accessible drive locking bar" on page 86.

378 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual TX1330 M4

Front panel

Figure 267: Opening the accessible drive locking bar

IThe front cover (floorstand model) / rack front cover (rack server) does

not need to be removed in order to replace the front panel module. In the

figures, the front cover / rack front cover has been removed for illustration

purposes only.

ÊPull up the locking latch to disengage the accessible drive locking bar (1).

ÊFold out the accessible drive locking bar (2).

Figure 268: Removing the front panel module

ÊPull out the front panel module.

TX1330 M4 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual 379

Front panel

13.1.3 Removing cables from the front panel module

Figure 269: Removing the front panel cables

ÊOpen the cable tie (1) and remove the front panel cable (2).

ÊRemove the two screws (3) and remove the front USB cable (4).

13.1.4 Connecting cables to the front panel module

ÊConnect the front panel cable to the new front panel module and secure it to

the lug with a new cable tie (see figure 269).

ÊConnect the front USB cable to the new front panel module and secure it

with two screws (see figure 269).

380 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual TX1330 M4

Front panel

13.1.5 Installing the front panel module

Installing the front panel module

Figure 270: Installing the front panel module

ÊInsert the front panel module into its installation bay and carefully push in

until the front screw hole on the front panel frame lines up with the centering

pin on the locking bar.

Figure 271: Closing the accessible drive locking bar (rack server)

ÊFold in the locking bar (1) until it locks in place (2,see close-up).

TX1330 M4 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual 381

Front panel

Connecting front panel cables to the system board

Figure 272: Connecting front panel cables

ÊConnect the cables of the front panel to the system board:

ÊRun the front panel cables through the cable guide (see circle).

13.1.6 Concluding steps

ÊIf applicable, install the SAS expander holder, see section "Installing the

SAS expander holder" on page 254

ÊInstall the system fan module, see section "Installing the system fan module"

on page 83

Ê"Reassembling" on page 67

Ê"Connecting the power cord" on page 78

Ê"Switching on the server" on page 80

Ê"Verifying system information backup/restore" on page 103

1Front panel cable to connector "Frontpanel"

2Front USB cable to connector "USB 3.1 Front"

382 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual TX1330 M4

Front panel

Ê "Using the Chassis ID Prom Tool" on page 121.

Ê"Resuming BitLocker functionality" on page 117

TX1330 M4 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual 383

14 System board and components

Safety notes

VCAUTION!

●Devices and components inside the server remain hot after

shutdown. After shutting down the server, wait for hot components to

cool down before installing or removing internal options.

●Circuit boards and soldered parts of internal options are exposed and

can be damaged by static electricity. Always discharge static build-up

(e.g. by touching a grounded object) before handling electrostatic-

sensitive devices (ESDs).

●Do not touch the circuitry on boards or soldered parts. Hold circuit

boards by their metallic areas or edges.

●For more information, see chapter "Important information" on

page 37.

384 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual TX1330 M4

System board and components

14.1 Basic information

This section provides instructions for the system board and the following

components:

●CMOS battery

The real-time clock is powered by a lithium coin cell (CMOS battery) when

mains get lost. This cell lasts up to five years, depending on ambient

temperature and use.

If the CMOS battery is depleted or falls below minimum voltage levels, it

need to be replaced immediately.

●TPM (Trusted Platform Module)

The system board is optionally equipped with a TPM. This module enables

programs from third party manufacturers to store key information, for

example drive encryption using Windows Bitlocker Drive Encryption.

●iRMC microSD card

The iRMC microSD card is necessary for using the embedded Lifecycle

Management (eLCM) functionality of the iRMC.

●M.2 SSD

The system board offers two M.2 slots (Key M) with support for 42 mm, 60

mm, 80 mm and 110 mm long M.2 SSDs. With the M.2 SSD an internal SSD

is offered. This SSD can be configured as a boot device or data storage

device.

●Dual microSD 64GB Enterprise

The system board is optionally equipped with a Dual microSD 64GB

Enterprise. The Dual microSD 64GB Enterprise offers an Integrated

Hardware RAID solution based on RAID-on-Chip (ROC) technology.

TX1330 M4 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual 385

System board and components

14.2 CMOS battery

14.2.1 Replacing the CMOS battery

Safety notes

VCAUTION!

●The CMOS battery must be replaced with an identical battery or with

a battery type recommended by the manufacturer.

●Keep lithium batteries away from children.

●Do not throw batteries into the trash can. Lithium batteries must be

disposed of in accordance with local regulations concerning special

waste.

●For more information, see section "Environmental protection" on

page 48.

●Ensure to insert the CMOS battery with the positive pole facing

up!

14.2.1.1 Preliminary steps

Ê"Locating the defective server" on page 51

Ê"Shutting down the server" on page 53

Ê"Disconnecting the power cord" on page 54

Ê"Getting access to the component" on page 55

ÊRemove the system fan module, see section "Removing the system fan

module" on page 81.

ÊIf applicable, remove the SAS expander holder without disconnecting

cables, see section "Removing the SAS expander holder" on page 256.

Position the SAS expander holder on the HDD cages to get more space.

Upgrade and Repair Unit

(URU)

Hardware: 5 minutes

Tools: tool-less; recommended: tooth pick

386 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual TX1330 M4

System board and components

ÊIf applicable, "Removing expansion cards" on page 285

14.2.1.2 Replacing the defective CMOS battery

Figure 273: Replacing the CMOS battery

ÊPress the locking spring into direction of the arrow (1), so that the CMOS

battery jumps out of its socket.

ÊRemove the CMOS battery (2).

VCAUTION!

Sharp tools such as screw drivers might damage system board

components in case of slipping.

If the CMOS battery cannot be ejected without the help of a tool, it is

recommended to use a tooth pick.

ÊInsert a new CMOS battery of the same type into the socket (3) and (4).

14.2.1.3 Concluding steps

ÊDispose of the CMOS battery in accordance with local regulations

concerning special waste.

ÊIf applicable, "Installing expansion cards" on page 279

ÊIf applicable, install the SAS expander holder, see section "Installing the

SAS expander holder" on page 254

ÊInstall the system fan module, see section "Installing the system fan module"

on page 83

Ê"Reassembling" on page 67

TX1330 M4 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual 387

System board and components

Ê"Connecting the power cord" on page 78

Ê"Switching on the server" on page 80

Ê"Verifying the system time settings" on page 113

388 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual TX1330 M4

System board and components

14.3 Trusted Platform Module (TPM)

Figure 274: TPM kit

14.3.1 Installing the TPM

14.3.1.1 Preliminary steps

Ê"Suspending BitLocker functionality" on page 97

Ê"Shutting down the server" on page 53

Ê"Disconnecting the power cord" on page 54

Ê"Getting access to the component" on page 55

1 TPM SPI (Trusted Platform

Module)

3 Special screw for TPM

2 TPM spacer 4 TPM bit insert for TPM special screw

Field Replaceable Unit

(FRU)

Hardware: 5 minutes

Software: 5 minutes

Tools: – Bit screw driver

– TPM bit insert (*)

(*) For Japan:

– TPM module fixing tool (S26361-F3552-L909)

TX1330 M4 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual 389

System board and components

ÊRemove the system fan module, see section "Removing the system fan

module" on page 81

ÊIf applicable, remove the SAS expander board, see section "Removing the

SAS expander board" on page 255

ÊIf applicable, remove the expansion cards, see section "Removing

expansion cards" on page 285

14.3.1.2 Installing the TPM

IThe onboard position of the TPM connector can be found in section

"Onboard connectors" on page 455.

Figure 275: Position for the TPM spacer

Figure 276: Inserting the TPM spacer on the system board

ÊInsert the TPM spacer into the hole on the system board.

Figure 277: TPM bit insert

ÊAttach the TPM bit insert or TPM module fixing tool (for Japan) to a bit screw

driver.

390 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual TX1330 M4

System board and components

Figure 278: Installing the TPM

ÊConnect the TPM to the system board (1).

ÊFasten the TPM with the special screw for the TPM using the TPM bit insert

or TPM module fixing tool (Japan) (2).

VCAUTION!

Do not fasten the screw too firmly. Stop it by extent where the head

of the screw lightly touches the TPM (torque value of 0.6 Nm, the

description of this torque value doesn't apply to Japan).

14.3.1.3 Concluding steps

ÊIf applicable, install the SAS expander board, see section "Installing the SAS

expander board" on page 251.

ÊInstall the system fan module, see section "Installing the system fan module"

on page 83

ÊIf applicable, install the expansion cards, see section "Installing expansion

cards" on page 279

Ê"Reassembling" on page 67

Ê"Connecting the power cord" on page 78

Ê"Switching on the server" on page 80

Ê"Resuming BitLocker functionality" on page 117

ÊEnable TPM in the system board BIOS. Proceed as follows:

ÊSwitch on or restart your server.

ÊAs soon as the startup screen appears, enter the BIOS setup menu.

ÊSelect the Advanced menu.

ÊSelect the Trusted Computing submenu.

TX1330 M4 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual 391

System board and components

ÊSet the TPM Support and TPM State settings to Enabled.

ÊUnder Pending TPM operation, select the desired TPM operation

mode.

ÊSave your changes and exit the BIOS.

IFor more information on how to access the BIOS and modify settings,

refer to the corresponding BIOS Setup Utility reference manual.

14.3.2 Removing the TPM

VCAUTION!

Advise your contact persons that they must provide you with all recovery

keys which belong to the system to restore them in the TPM later.

14.3.2.1 Preliminary steps

IPreliminary steps are not necessary, if a system board has to be replaced

and the TPM is used again.

ÊBefore removing the TPM, it is necessary to remove BitLocker-protection

from the computer and to decrypt the volume.

Ask the system administrator to turn off BitLocker-protection using the

BitLocker setup wizard available either from the Control Panel or Windows

Explorer:

Field Replaceable Unit

(FRU)

Hardware: 30 minutes

Tools: Removing the system board:

– Phillips PH2 / (+) No. 2 screw driver

Removing the TPM:

– Bit screw driver

– flat nose pliers

– TPM bit insert (*)

(*) For Japan:

– TPM module fixing tool (S26361-F3552-L909)

392 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual TX1330 M4

System board and components

ÊOpen Bitlocker Drive Encryption by clicking the Start button, clicking

Control Panel, clicking Security, and then clicking Bitlocker Drive

Encryption.

IAdministrator permission required: If you are prompted for an

administrator password or confirmation, type the password or

provide confirmation.

ÊTo turn off BitLocker and decrypt the volume, click Turn Off BitLocker,

and then click Decrypt the volume.

IDecrypting the volume may be time-consuming. By decrypting the

volume, all of the information stored on that computer is decrypted.

For more information on how to disable BitLocker drive encryption,

see the Microsoft Knowledge Base.

For more information, see the Fujitsu web pages.

ÊDisable TPM in the system board BIOS. Proceed as follows:

ÊSwitch on or restart your server.

ÊAs soon as the startup screen appears, enter the BIOS setup menu.

ÊSelect the Advanced menu.

ÊSelect the Trusted Computing submenu.

ÊSet the TPM Support and TPM State settings to Disabled.

ÊSave your changes and exit the BIOS.

IFor more information on how to access the BIOS and modify settings,

refer to the corresponding BIOS Setup Utility reference manual.

Ê"Suspending BitLocker functionality" on page 97

Ê"Shutting down the server" on page 53

Ê"Disconnecting the power cord" on page 54

Ê"Getting access to the component" on page 55

ÊRemove the system fan module, see section "Removing the system fan

module" on page 81

ÊIf applicable, remove the SAS expander board, see section "Removing the

SAS expander board" on page 255

TX1330 M4 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual 393

System board and components

ÊIf applicable, remove the expansion cards, see section "Removing

expansion cards" on page 285

14.3.2.2 Removing the TPM board

ÊRemove the system board, see section "Removing the defective system

board" on page 420.

ÊLay the system board on a soft, antistatic surface with its component side

facing down.

Figure 279: Removing the TPM screw

ÊLocate the slotted lower end of the TPM screw (1).

ÊCarefully loosen the TPM screw using a thin slotted screw driver (e.g. watch-

maker's screw driver) or the dedicated TPM screw driver (for Japan) (2).

VCAUTION!

Ensure to turn the screw clockwise in order to remove it!

Slowly and carefully increase the pressure on the screw until it begins to

turn. The effort when loosing the screw should be as low as possible.

Otherwise the thin metal bar may break, rendering it impossible to

loosen the screw.

ÊRemove the TPM screw (3).

ÊRemove the TPM on the upper side of the system board.

394 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual TX1330 M4

System board and components

Figure 280: Removing the TPM spacer

ÊUsing a flat nose pliers, press together the hooks on the TPM spacer and

remove it from the system board (2).

IIf the TPM is to be replaced, the TPM spacer may remain on the

system board.

ÊInstall the system board, see section "Installing the new system board" on

page 422

14.3.2.3 Concluding steps

ÊIf applicable, install the SAS expander board, see section "Installing the SAS

expander board" on page 251.

ÊIf applicable, install the expansion cards "Installing expansion cards" on

page 279

ÊInstall the system fan module, see section "Installing the system fan module"

on page 83

Ê"Resuming BitLocker functionality" on page 117

Ê"Reassembling" on page 67

Ê"Connecting the power cord" on page 78

Ê"Switching on the server" on page 80

TX1330 M4 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual 395

System board and components

14.3.3 Replacing the TPM

VCAUTION!

Advise your contact persons that they must provide you with all recovery

keys which belong to the system to restore them in the TPM later.

14.3.3.1 Preliminary steps

Ê"Locating the defective server" on page 51

Ê"Suspending BitLocker functionality" on page 97

Ê"Shutting down the server" on page 53

Ê"Disconnecting the power cord" on page 54

Ê"Getting access to the component" on page 55

ÊRemove the system fan module, see section "Removing the system fan

module" on page 81

ÊIf applicable, remove the expander board, see section "Removing the SAS

expander board" on page 255

ÊIf applicable, "Removing expansion cards" on page 285

Field Replaceable Unit

(FRU)

Hardware: 40 minutes

Tools: Removing the system board:

– Phillips PH2 / (+) No. 2 screw driver

Replacing the TPM:

– Bit screw driver

– TPM bit insert (*)

– thin slotted screw driver (2 x 0.4 mm) (*)

– Flat nose pliers

(*) For Japan:

– Dedicated TPM screw driver (CWZ8291A)

– TPM module fixing tool (S26361-F3552-L909)

396 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual TX1330 M4

System board and components

14.3.3.2 Removing the defective TPM

ÊRemove the TPM, see section "Removing the TPM" on page 391.

ÊLeave the TPM spacer on the system board when removing the defective

TPM.

14.3.3.3 Installing the new TPM

IThe TPM spacer is already present on the system board.

ÊInstall the TPM, see section "Installing the TPM" on page 388.

14.3.3.4 Concluding steps

ÊIf applicable, "Installing expansion cards" on page 279

ÊIf applicable, install the expander board, see section "Installing the SAS

expander board" on page 251.

ÊInstall the system fan module, see section "Installing the system fan module"

on page 83

Ê"Reassembling" on page 67

Ê"Connecting the power cord" on page 78

Ê"Switching on the server" on page 80

Ê"Resuming BitLocker functionality" on page 117

IYou can find information on configuring the TPM in the corresponding

BIOS Setup Utility reference manual.

TX1330 M4 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual 397

System board and components

14.4 iRMC microSD card

IThe iRMC microSD card is necessary for using the embedded Lifecycle

Management (eLCM) functionality of the iRMC. It requires a valid eLCM

license key, which is always purchased together with the iRMC microSD

card and activated through the iRMC web interface.

For more information, see the “ServerView embedded Lifecycle

Management (eLCM)” user guide.

14.4.1 Installing the iRMC microSD card

14.4.1.1 Preliminary steps

Ê"Shutting down the server" on page 53

Ê"Disconnecting the power cord" on page 54

ÊRemove the system fan module, see section "Removing the system fan

module" on page 81

14.4.1.2 Installing the iRMC microSD card

Figure 281: iRMC microSD card

Upgrade and Repair Unit

(URU)

Hardware: 5 minutes

Tools: tool-less

398 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual TX1330 M4

System board and components

Figure 282: Installing the iRMC microSD card

ÊWith the label facing up, insert the iRMC microSD card into the microSD

card slot (1) until it locks in place (2).

IThe onboard position of the microSD card slot can be found in section

"Connectors and indicators on the system board" on page 455.

14.4.1.3 Concluding steps

ÊInstall the system fan module, see section "Installing the system fan module"

on page 83

Ê"Reassembling" on page 67

Ê"Connecting the power cord" on page 78

Ê"Switching on the server" on page 80

TX1330 M4 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual 399

System board and components

14.4.2 Removing the iRMC microSD card

14.4.2.1 Preliminary steps

Ê"Shutting down the server" on page 53

Ê"Disconnecting the power cord" on page 54

Ê"Getting access to the component" on page 55

ÊRemove the system fan module, see section "Removing the system fan

module" on page 81

14.4.2.2 Removing the iRMC microSD card

Figure 283: Removing the iRMC microSD card

ÊTo eject the iRMC microSD card, gently push it in and then let go (1).

ÊPull the iRMC microSD card straight out of its slot (2).

VCAUTION!

The iRMC microSD card contains customer information. After removing

the iRMC microSD card, hand the card over to the customer.

Upgrade and Repair Unit

(URU)

Hardware: 5 minutes

Tools: tool-less

400 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual TX1330 M4

System board and components

14.4.2.3 Concluding steps

ÊInstall the system fan module, see section "Installing the system fan module"

on page 83

Ê"Reassembling" on page 67

Ê"Connecting the power cord" on page 78

Ê"Switching on the server" on page 80

14.4.3 Replacing the iRMC microSD card

14.4.3.1 Preliminary steps

Ê"Locating the defective server" on page 51

Ê"Shutting down the server" on page 53

Ê"Disconnecting the power cord" on page 54

Ê"Getting access to the component" on page 55

ÊRemove the system fan module, see section "Removing the system fan

module" on page 81

14.4.3.2 Replacing the iRMC microSD card

ÊRemove the defective iRMC microSD card, see section "Removing the

iRMC microSD card" on page 399.

VCAUTION!

The microSD card contains customer information. After replacing the

microSD card, hand the defective card over to the customer. If the

customer requests disposal of the defective microSD card, proceed

as follows:

ÊUsing a pair of side-cutting pliers, cut the microSD card in half.

Upgrade and Repair Unit

(URU)

Hardware: 5 minutes

Tools: a pair of side-cutting pliers

TX1330 M4 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual 401

System board and components

ÊInstall the new iRMC microSD card, see section "Installing the iRMC

microSD card" on page 397.

14.4.3.3 Concluding steps

ÊInstall the system fan module, see section "Installing the system fan module"

on page 83

Ê"Reassembling" on page 67

Ê"Connecting the power cord" on page 78

Ê"Switching on the server" on page 80

402 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual TX1330 M4

System board and components

14.5 M.2 SSD

The system board offers two M.2 slots (Key M) with support for 42 mm, 60 mm,

80 mm and 110 mm long M.2 SSDs. With the M.2 SSD an internal SSD is

offered. This SSD can be configured as a boot device or data storage device.

14.5.1 Installing an M.2 SSD

14.5.1.1 Preliminary steps

Ê"Shutting down the server" on page 53

Ê"Disconnecting the power cord" on page 54

Ê"Getting access to the component" on page 55

ÊRemove the system fan module, see section "Removing the system fan

module" on page 81

ÊIf applicable, remove the SAS expander holder without disconnecting

cables, see section "Removing the SAS expander holder" on page 256.

Position the SAS expander holder on the HDD cages to get more space.

ÊIf applicable,"Removing expansion cards" on page 285

Upgrade and Repair Unit

(URU)

Hardware: 5 minutes

Software: 15minutes

Tools: – Phillips PH1 / (+) No. 1 screw driver

– Hexagon screw driver

TX1330 M4 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual 403

System board and components

14.5.1.2 Installing the M.2 SSD

Figure 284: Example M.2 SSD

Figure 285: Slots for M.2 SSDs

1 M.2 slot 1

2 M.2 slot 2

404 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual TX1330 M4

System board and components

VCAUTION!

The M.2 slot 1 must be equipped first. An M.2 SSD in M.2 slot 2 is not

recognized, if M.2 slot 1 is free.

IEach M.2 SSD needs one hexagon stand-off for fastening. To support

different length of M.2 SSD, several nuts are on the system board

indicating the positions for fastening the M.2 SSD.

ÊIf no M.2 SSD has been installed before:

ÊRemove the screw (see orange circles in figure 285).

IIf the hexagon stand-off is unscrewed as well, remove the screw

from the hexagon stand-off.

ÊInstall the hexagon stand-off on the right position depending on the

length of the M.2 SSD.

Figure 286: Installing the M.2 SSD

ÊWith the label facing up, insert the M.2 SSD into the M.2 slot at a slight angle.

Figure 287: Fastening the M.2 SSD

ÊFasten the M.2 SSD with the screw (see circle).

TX1330 M4 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual 405

System board and components

14.5.1.3 Concluding steps

ÊIf applicable, "Installing expansion cards" on page 279.

ÊIf applicable, install the SAS expander holder, see section "Installing the

SAS expander holder" on page 254

ÊInstall the system fan module, see section "Installing the system fan module"

on page 83

Ê"Reassembling" on page 67

Ê"Connecting the power cord" on page 78

Ê"Switching on the server" on page 80

14.5.1.4 Software configuration

In order to install the ESXi to the M.2 SSD, the VMware ESXi installer CD is

required.To obtain the ESXi installer CD by purchasing the OEM Media Kit, or

downloading the ESXi Custom Image ISO file from VMware's website and burn

the image to the CD.

https://www.vmware.com/go/download-vsphere.

To Install the ESXi to the M.2 SSD by following the steps below:

ÊDisconnect all storage devices from the server beside the M.2 SSD.

ÊPower on the server. Once the server has been started, then enter the BIOS

setup menu and select the DVD drive as primary boot device.

ÊInsert the CD into the DVD drive and reboot the server. The server will boot

from the installer CD.

ÊFollow the on-screen instructions to install the ESXi. When the installation is

complete, you will be asked to reboot the server.

ÊWhile the server is rebooting, enter the BIOS setup menu again and select

the M.2 SSD as primary boot device.

The installation of the ESXi to the M.2 SSD is complete.

IFor more information on how to access the BIOS and modify settings,

see the corresponding BIOS Setup Utility reference manual.

IThe M.2 SSD can be used only for boot device. Do not use VMFS on the

M.2 SSD because of not meeting required endurance. For more

information, see the VMware Knowledge Base 2145210.

http://kb.vmware.com/s/article/2145210

406 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual TX1330 M4

System board and components

IFor Japan

In order to setup the ESXi, see the corresponding version of the "VMware

vSphere Software Description" from the following URL and reinstall ESXi

to the M.2 SSD.

http://jp.fujitsu.com/platform/server/primergy/software/vmware/manual/

14.5.2 Removing the M.2 SSD

14.5.2.1 Preliminary steps

Ê"Shutting down the server" on page 53

Ê"Disconnecting the power cord" on page 54

Ê"Getting access to the component" on page 55

ÊRemove the system fan module, see section "Removing the system fan

module" on page 81

ÊIf applicable, remove the SAS expander holder without disconnecting

cables, see section "Removing the SAS expander holder" on page 256.

Position the SAS expander holder on the HDD cages to get more space.

ÊIf applicable, "Removing expansion cards" on page 285

Upgrade and Repair Unit

(URU)

Hardware: 5 minutes

Tools: – Phillips PH1 / (+) No. 1 screw driver

– Hexagon screw driver (for moving the screw to another hexagon

stand-off)

TX1330 M4 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual 407

System board and components

14.5.2.2 Removing the M.2 SSD

Figure 288: Removing the M.2 SSD (A)

ÊRemove the screw (see circle).

Figure 289: Removing the M.2 SSD (B)

ÊPull the M.2 SSD out of its slot.

ÊIf no new M.2 SSD will be installed:

ÊFasten the screw to the corresponding hexagon stand-off (see orange

circles in figure 285 on page 403).

14.5.2.3 Concluding steps

ÊIf applicable, "Installing expansion cards" on page 279.

ÊIf applicable, install the SAS expander holder, see section "Installing the

SAS expander holder" on page 254

ÊInstall the system fan module, see section "Installing the system fan module"

on page 83

Ê"Reassembling" on page 67

408 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual TX1330 M4

System board and components

Ê"Connecting the power cord" on page 78

Ê"Switching on the server" on page 80

14.5.3 Replacing the M.2 SSD

14.5.3.1 Preliminary steps

Ê"Locating the defective server" on page 51

Ê"Shutting down the server" on page 53

Ê"Disconnecting the power cord" on page 54

Ê"Getting access to the component" on page 55

ÊRemove the system fan module, see section "Removing the system fan

module" on page 81

ÊIf applicable, remove the SAS expander holder without disconnecting

cables, see section "Removing the SAS expander holder" on page 256.

Position the SAS expander holder on the HDD cages to get more space.

ÊIf applicable, "Removing expansion cards" on page 285

14.5.3.2 Replacing the M.2 SSD

ÊRemove the defective M.2 SSD, see section "Removing the M.2 SSD" on

page 406.

ÊInstall the new M.2 SSD, see section "Installing an M.2 SSD" on page 402.

Upgrade and Repair Unit

(URU)

Hardware: 5 minutes

Software: 15 minutes

Tools: – Phillips PH1 / (+) No. 1 screw driver

TX1330 M4 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual 409

System board and components

14.5.3.3 Concluding steps

ÊIf applicable, "Installing expansion cards" on page 279.

ÊIf applicable, install the SAS expander holder, see section "Installing the

SAS expander holder" on page 254

ÊInstall the system fan module, see section "Installing the system fan module"

on page 83

Ê"Reassembling" on page 67

Ê"Connecting the power cord" on page 78

Ê"Switching on the server" on page 80

14.5.3.4 Software configuration

ITo install the ESXi to the M.2 SSD, see "Software configuration" on

page 405.

410 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual TX1330 M4

System board and components

14.6 Dual microSD 64GB Enterprise

14.6.1 Installing the Dual microSD 64GB Enterprise

14.6.1.1 Preliminary steps

Ê"Shutting down the server" on page 53

Ê"Disconnecting the power cord" on page 54

Ê"Getting access to the component" on page 55

ÊRemove the system fan module, see section "Removing the system fan

module" on page 81

Upgrade and Repair Unit

(URU)

Hardware: 5 minutes

Tools: tool-less

TX1330 M4 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual 411

System board and components

14.6.1.2 Installing the Dual microSD 64GB Enterprise

Figure 290: Position on the system board

Figure 291: Connecting the cable to the Dual microSD 64GB Enterprise

ÊConnect the cable to the Dual microSD 64GB Enterprise.

412 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual TX1330 M4

System board and components

Figure 292: Installing the Dual microSD 64GB Enterprise

ÊInsert the Dual microSD 64GB Enterprise into the system board connector

"USB 1" (see arrow).

ÊConnect the ROC cable to the system board connector "ROC" (see circle).

14.6.1.3 Concluding steps

ÊInstall the system fan module, see section "Installing the system fan module"

on page 83

Ê"Reassembling" on page 67

Ê"Connecting the power cord" on page 78

Ê"Switching on the server" on page 80

14.6.2 Removing the Dual microSD 64GB Enterprise

14.6.2.1 Preliminary steps

Ê"Shutting down the server" on page 53

Upgrade and Repair Unit

(URU)

Hardware: 5 minutes

Tools: tool-less

TX1330 M4 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual 413

System board and components

Ê"Disconnecting the power cord" on page 54

Ê"Getting access to the component" on page 55

ÊRemove the system fan module, see section "Removing the system fan

module" on page 81

14.6.2.2 Removing the Dual microSD 64GB Enterprise

ÊDisconnect the cable from the connector "ROC" on the system board (see

figure 292).

Figure 293: Installing the Dual microSD 64GB Enterprise

ÊPull the Dual microSD 64GB Enterprise out of its connector.

14.6.2.3 Concluding steps

ÊInstall the system fan module, see section "Installing the system fan module"

on page 83

Ê"Reassembling" on page 67

Ê"Connecting the power cord" on page 78

Ê"Switching on the server" on page 80

414 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual TX1330 M4

System board and components

14.6.3 Replacing the Dual microSD 64GB Enterprise

14.6.3.1 Preliminary steps

Ê"Locating the defective server" on page 51

Ê"Shutting down the server" on page 53

Ê"Disconnecting the power cord" on page 54

Ê"Getting access to the component" on page 55

ÊRemove the system fan module, see section "Removing the system fan

module" on page 81

14.6.3.2 Replacing the Dual microSD 64GB Enterprise

ÊRemove the defective Dual microSD 64GB Enterprise, see section

"Removing the Dual microSD 64GB Enterprise" on page 412.

ÊRemove both microSD cards from the defective Dual microSD 64GB

Enterprise. Proceed as described in the following:

Figure 294: Removing the microSD card

ÊTo eject the microSD card, gently push it in and then let go (1).

ÊPull the microSD card straight out of its slot (2).

ÊInstall both microSD cards on the new Dual microSD 64GB Enterprise.

Proceed as described in the following:

Upgrade and Repair Unit

(URU)

Hardware: 5 minutes

Tools: tool-less

TX1330 M4 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual 415

System board and components

Figure 295: Installing the microSD card

ÊWith the label facing up, insert the microSD card into the microSD slot on

the controller (1) until it locks in place (2).

ÊInstall the new Dual microSD 64GB Enterprise, see section "Installing the

Dual microSD 64GB Enterprise" on page 410.

14.6.3.3 Concluding steps

ÊInstall the system fan module, see section "Installing the system fan module"

on page 83

Ê"Reassembling" on page 67

Ê"Connecting the power cord" on page 78

Ê"Switching on the server" on page 80

14.6.4 Replacing the microSD card

14.6.4.1 Preliminary steps

Ê"Locating the defective server" on page 51

Ê"Shutting down the server" on page 53

Ê"Disconnecting the power cord" on page 54

Ê"Getting access to the component" on page 55

Upgrade and Repair Unit

(URU)

Hardware: 5 minutes

Tools: a pair of side-cutting pliers

416 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual TX1330 M4

System board and components

ÊRemove the system fan module, see section "Removing the system fan

module" on page 81

14.6.4.2 Replacing the microSD card

ÊRemove the Dual microSD 64GB Enterprise, see section "Removing the

Dual microSD 64GB Enterprise" on page 412.

ÊRemove the defective microSD card from the Dual microSD 64GB

Enterprise. Proceed as described in the following:

ÊTo eject the defective microSD card, gently push it in and then let go (see

figure 294).

ÊPull the microSD card straight out of its slot.

VCAUTION!

The microSD card contains customer information. After replacing the

microSD card, hand the defective card over to the customer. If the

customer requests disposal of the defective microSD card, proceed

as follows:

ÊUsing a pair of side-cutting pliers, cut the microSD card in half.

ÊInstall the new microSD card on the Dual microSD 64GB Enterprise.

Proceed as described in the following:

ÊWith the label facing up, insert the microSD card into the microSD slot on

the controller until it locks in place (see figure 295).

ÊInstall the Dual microSD 64GB Enterprise, see section "Installing the Dual

microSD 64GB Enterprise" on page 410.

14.6.4.3 Concluding steps

ÊInstall the system fan module, see section "Installing the system fan module"

on page 83

Ê"Reassembling" on page 67

Ê"Connecting the power cord" on page 78

Ê"Switching on the server" on page 80

TX1330 M4 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual 417

System board and components

14.7 System board

14.7.1 Replacing the system board

Note on TPM

IThe system board can be equipped with an optional TPM (Trusted

Platform Module). This module enables third party programs to store key

information (e. g. drive encryption using Windows Bitlocker Drive

Encryption).

If the customer is using TPM functionality, the TPM has to be removed

from the defective system board and connected to the new system

board. For a detailed description, see "Replacing the TPM" on page 395.

The TPM is enabled in the system BIOS.

VCAUTION!

– Before replacing the system board, ask the customer whether TPM

functionality is used.

Field Replaceable Unit

(FRU)

Hardware: 50 minutes

Software: 10 minutes

Tools: Replacing the system board:

– Phillips PH2 / (+) No. 2 screw driver

– Magnifying glass for inspecting CPU socket springs

(recommended)

Replacing the TPM:

– Bit screw driver

– flat nose pliers

– TPM bit insert (*)

– thin slotted screw driver (2 x 0.4 mm) (*)

(*) For Japan:

– Dedicated TPM screw driver (CWZ8291A)

– TPM module fixing tool (S26361-F3552-L909)

418 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual TX1330 M4

System board and components

– If the customer is using TPM functionality, remove the TPM from the

old system board and install it on the new system board.

Advise your contact persons that they must provide you with all

recovery keys which belong to the system to restore them in the TPM

later.

Note on system information backup/restore

The front panel (front panel module, front panel board or front panel on QRL)

contains the Chassis ID EPROM that contains system information like server

name and model, housing type, serial number and manufacturing data.

To avoid the loss of non-default settings when replacing the system board, a

backup copy of important system configuration data is automatically stored from

the system board NVRAM to the Chassis ID EPROM.

VCAUTION!

For that reason the front panel and system board must not be replaced

simultaneously! In this case, restoring the system configuration data on

the system board would fail.

After replacing the system board the backup data is restored from the Chassis

ID board to the new system board.

Note on network settings recovery

IWhen replacing network controllers or the system board, network

configuration settings in the operating system will be lost and replaced

by default values. This applies to all static IP address and LAN teaming

configurations.

Ensure to note down your current network settings before replacing a

network controller or the system board.

TX1330 M4 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual 419

System board and components

14.7.1.1 Preliminary steps

Ê"Locating the defective server" on page 51

Ê"Note on network settings recovery" on page 288

Ê"Suspending BitLocker functionality" on page 97

Ê"Shutting down the server" on page 53

Ê"Disconnecting the power cord" on page 54

ÊDisconnect all external cables.

Ê"Getting access to the component" on page 55

ÊRemove the system fan module, see section "Removing the system fan

module" on page 81

ÊIf applicable, remove the SAS expander board, see section "Removing the

SAS expander board" on page 255

ÊRemove the following components from the system board as shown in the

related sections:

– Heat sinks: "Removing the heat sink" on page 321

ILeave the CPU on the defective board for now.

– Memory modules: "Removing memory modules" on page 315

IEnsure to take note of the memory modules’ mounting positions

for reassembly.

– Expansion cards:

If applicable, disconnect the riser card.

"Removing expansion cards" on page 285

IEnsure to take note of the controllers’ mounting positions and

cable connections for reassembly.

– iRMC microSD card: "Removing the iRMC microSD card" on page 399

– If applicable, M.2 SSD, see section "Removing the M.2 SSD" on

page 406

– If applicable, Dual microSD 64 GB Enterprise, see section "Removing

the Dual microSD 64GB Enterprise" on page 412

420 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual TX1330 M4

System board and components

14.7.1.2 Removing the defective system board

ÊDisconnect all cables from the system board.

Figure 296: Screws system board

ÊRemove the eight screws from the system board (see blue circles, orange

circles show the centering bolts).

TX1330 M4 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual 421

System board and components

Figure 297: Removing the system board

ÊUse both hands to lift the system board carefully out of the chassis in a slight

angle. Thereby you pull the connectors out of the I/O panel (see arrows).

VCAUTION!

Always take the system board with both hands!

Never lift the system board one-sided or at a heat sink, because the

solder connections between the socket and the system board come

under tension and increase the risk of damage and malfunction!

Don’t damage the EMI springs which are essential to comply with

applicable EMC regulations and satisfy cooling requirements and fire

protection measures.

ÊPlace the removed and the new system board on an antistatic surface.

ÊIf applicable, remove the TPM, see section "Removing the TPM" on

page 391.

422 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual TX1330 M4

System board and components

Figure 298: Removing the power cable clamp

ÊUsing a small pair of combination pliers, press together the hooks on the

power cable clamp (1) and remove it from the defective system board (2).

14.7.1.3 Installing the new system board

ÊIf applicable, install the iRMC microSD card, see section "Installing the iRMC

microSD card" on page 397.

ÊIf applicable, install the TPM, see section "Installing the TPM" on page 388.

ÊCheck the settings on the new system board (see section "Onboard

settings" on page 473).

ÊInsert the system board by holding it at a slight angle. Slide the connectors

into the I/O panel (see figure 297).

ÊLower the system board carefully into the chassis.

ÊAdjust the system board. If necessary adjust the position of the system

board with a gentle twisting motion (orange circles in figure 296 show the

centering bolts).

ÊFasten the system board with the eight screws (see figure 296).

TX1330 M4 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual 423

System board and components

Figure 299: Installing the power cable clamp

ÊPress down on the power cable clamp until it snaps into place.

ÊRemove the protective plastic cover from the CPU socket of the new system

board.

ÊRemove the CPU from the defective system board, see section "Removing

the CPU" on page 322.

ÊConfirm that the CPU model number printed on the top of the CPU fits with

the requirements.

ÊInstall the CPU on the new system board, see section "Installing the CPU"

on page 324.

ÊFit the protective plastic cover onto the socket of the defective system board

which will be sent back to spares.

IReturned system boards without this cover probably have to be

scrapped.

Ê"Installing the CPU heat sink" on page 330

14.7.1.4 Concluding steps

ÊConnect all cables to the system board.

IFor the cable plan, see chapter "Appendix B" on page 477.

ÊReinstall all remaining system board components as shown in the related

sections:

424 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual TX1330 M4

System board and components

– If applicable, M.2 SSD, see section "Installing an M.2 SSD" on page 402

– If applicable, Dual microSC 64 GB Enterprise, see section "Installing the

Dual microSD 64GB Enterprise" on page 410

– Memory modules: "Installing a memory module" on page 314

IMake sure that you reinstall each memory module in the slot it was

located before the replacement.

– Expansion cards: "Installing expansion cards" on page 279

If applicable, connect the riser card.

ÊIf applicable, install the expander board, see section "Installing the SAS

expander board" on page 251.

ÊInstall the system fan module, see section "Installing the system fan module"

on page 83

Ê"Reassembling" on page 67

ÊConnect all external cables.

Ê"Connecting the power cord" on page 78

Ê"Switching on the server" on page 80

IWhen the system is powered on after a CPU has been replaced or

upgraded, the Global Error indicator will start flashing with the

message CPU has been changed.

This only indicates that the CPU configuration has been altered.

There is no technical problem.

Proceed as follows:

ÊRestart your server.

ÊAs soon as the startup screen appears, press the [F2] function

key to enter the BIOS.

If a password is assigned, enter the password and press [Enter].

ÊSelect the Save & Exit menu.

ÊSelect Save Changes and Exit or Save Changes and Reset.

ÊVerify that the Global Error indicator stops flashing.

Ê"Verifying the system time settings" on page 113

TX1330 M4 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual 425

System board and components

Ê"Updating or recovering the BIOS and the iRMC S5" on page 102

ÊIf applicable, activate TPM functionality in the system BIOS under Security

> TPM (Security Chip) Setting > Security Chip. For more information,

refer to the corresponding BIOS Setup Utility reference manual.

Ê"Verifying system information backup/restore" on page 103

Ê"Looking for MAC/WWN/GUID and SAS addresses" on page 118

Ê"Updating the NIC configuration file in a Linux and VMware environment" on

page 116

Ê"Resuming BitLocker functionality" on page 117

ÊIf applicable, reconfigure your network settings in the operation system

according to the original configuration of the replaced controller (expansion

card or onboard).

IConfiguration of network settings should be performed by the

customer. For more information, see section "Note on network

settings recovery" on page 288.

ÊIf applicable, restore LAN teaming configurations, see section "After

replacing a system board" on page 122.

426 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual TX1330 M4

System board and components

TX1330 M4 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual 427

15 Converting a floorstand model to

a rack model

Safety notes

For more information, see chapter "Important information" on page 37.

15.1 Preliminary steps

Ê"Shutting down the server" on page 53

Ê"Disconnecting the power cord" on page 54

ÊRemove all external cables.

Ê"Getting access to the component" on page 55

Ê"Removing the anti-tilt bracket" on page 95

Field Replaceable Unit

(FRU)

Hardware: 20 minutes

Tools: – Phillips PH2 / (+) No. 2 screw driver

– Slotted screw driver

428 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual TX1330 M4

Converting a floorstand model to a rack model

15.2 Converting a floorstand model to a rack

model

Removing the right side cover

Figure 300: Removing the right side cover (A)

ÊRemove two screws on the server rear (see circles).

TX1330 M4 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual 429

Converting a floorstand model to a rack model

Figure 301: Removing the right side cover (B)

ÊSlide the right side cover towards the server rear as far as it will go (1).

ÊRemove the three hooks on the right side cover from the slots on the upper

chassis edge:

ÊUsing a slotted screw driver, slightly pry up on the middle hook until it

disengages (2).

ÊPull up on both ends of the right side cover to remove the left and right

hooks from the slots on the upper chassis edge.

ÊEnsure that all cables and components are properly secured inside the

server and that there are no loose pieces.

ÊCarefully turn the server upside down.

IAt least two people are needed to turn over a fully equipped server.

Remove HDDs and hot-plug PSUs in order to facilitate the task.

ÊLift off and remove the right side cover.

IThe right side cover is no longer required.

ÊLeave the server in its upside down position.

430 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual TX1330 M4

Converting a floorstand model to a rack model

Removing rubber feet

Figure 302: Removing rubber feet

ÊUsing a slotted screw driver, slightly pry up on each rubber foot until it

detaches.

ÊBring the server back to its horizontal position.

IAt least two people are needed to turn over a fully equipped server.

Remove HDDs and PSUs in order to facilitate the task.

TX1330 M4 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual 431

Converting a floorstand model to a rack model

Removing the accessible drive cage

ÊRemove the front panel module, see section "Removing the defective front

panel module" on page 377.

ÊIf applicable, remove all accessible drives, see section "Removing an

accessible drive" on page 348.

ÊIf applicable, remove an HDD extension box, see section "HDD extension

boxes" on page 228.

Figure 303: Detaching the accessible drive cage (A)

ÊRemove two screws from the bottom side of the server as shown.

ÊBring the server back to its horizontal position.

IAt least two people are needed to turn over a fully equipped server.

Remove HDDs and PSUs in order to facilitate the task.

432 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual TX1330 M4

Converting a floorstand model to a rack model

Figure 304: Detaching the accessible drive cage (B)

ÊRemove two screws from the right chassis edge (1).

ÊRemove two screws from the top edge of the chassis (2).

TX1330 M4 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual 433

Converting a floorstand model to a rack model

Figure 305: Removing the accessible drive cage

ÊSlightly lift up the accessible drive cage to disengage its front bottom edge

from the slot on the chassis floor (1).

ÊSlide the accessible drive cover from under the chassis frame as shown (2).

ÊLift the accessible drive cage out of the chassis (3).

434 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual TX1330 M4

Converting a floorstand model to a rack model

Converting the accessible drive cage

Figure 306: Converting the accessible drive cage

ÊTurn the accessible drive cover with its "RACK" stamping facing up (1, see

close-up).

ÊRemove the threaded bolt from the upper edge of the accessible drive cage

(2).

ÊReinstall the threaded bolt on the side of the accessible drive cage as shown

(3, see close-up).

TX1330 M4 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual 435

Converting a floorstand model to a rack model

Reinstalling the accessible drive cage

Figure 307: Mounting the accessible drive cage

ÊWith its "RACK" stamping facing up, lower the accessible drive cage into the

chassis (1).

ÊSlide the accessible drive cage towards the server front as far as it will go

(2).

ÊEnsure that the front bottom edge on the accessible drive cover properly

engages in the slot in the chassis floor (3).

436 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual TX1330 M4

Converting a floorstand model to a rack model

Figure 308: Securing the accessible drive cage (A)

ÊSecure the accessible drive cage with two screws to the right chassis edge

(1).

ÊSecure the accessible drive cage with two screws to the top edge of the

chassis (2).

ÊEnsure that all cables and components are properly secured inside the

server and that there are no loose pieces.

TX1330 M4 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual 437

Converting a floorstand model to a rack model

Figure 309: Securing the accessible drive cage (B)

ÊCarefully turn the server upside down.

IAt least two people are needed to turn over a fully equipped server.

Remove HDDs and hot-plug PSUs in order to facilitate the task.

ÊSecure the accessible drive cage with the two screws (see circles) to the

bottom side of the server.

INote the correct screw positions: The screw hole on the right that has

been used in the floorstand model configuration remains empty.

ÊReinstall the front panel (rotated by 90 degrees), see section "Installing the

front panel module" on page 380.

ÊReinstall all accessible drives into their original bays (rotated by 90

degrees), see section "Installing an accessible drive" on page 344.

ÊReinstall all accessible drive filler covers and front covers, see section

"Installing accessible drive dummy covers" on page 236.

ÊIf applicable, install an HDD extension box, see section "HDD extension

boxes" on page 228.

Preparing the intrusion switch

ÊRemove the intrusion switch module, see section "Removing the intrusion

switch cable" on page 441.

IIt is not necessary to disconnect the intrusion switch cable from the

system board.

438 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual TX1330 M4

Converting a floorstand model to a rack model

ÊAttach a rubber bumper to the front intrusion switch and reinstall the

intrusion switch module, see section "Installing the intrusion switch cable" on

page 445.

Assembling the rack front cover

Figure 310: Rack mounting brackets with quick release levers

IThe rack front cover consists of a plastic frame and two rack mounting

brackets with quick release levers.

Figure 311: Installing rack mounting brackets

TX1330 M4 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual 439

Converting a floorstand model to a rack model

ÊFit the rack mounting bracket with the FUJITSU logo on the two hooks on

the right side of the rack front bezel (1).

ÊFirmly press down on the rack mounting bracket until it is fully seated in the

rack front bezel (2).

ÊMount the second rack mounting bracket to the left side of the rack front

bezel accordingly.

Figure 312: Installing accessible drive dummy covers

ÊIf available, reinstall all accessible drive dummy covers into their original

locations (rotated by 90 degrees):

ÊEnsure that an accessible drive filler cover has been installed in every

empty drive bay.

ÊTurn the front cover face down.

ÊJoin the two lugs on one edge of the accessible drive cover with the right

inner edge of the front cover (1).

ÊFold down the accessible drive cover until it snaps in place (2).

IUse the dummy covers that have been removed from the front cover

during the preliminary steps.

440 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual TX1330 M4

Converting a floorstand model to a rack model

ÊInstall the rack front cover, see section "Installing the rack front cover" on

page 67.

15.3 Concluding steps

Ê"Reassembling" on page 67

ÊMount the support bracket and rack mounting rails in the rack, see the "Rack

Mounting Kit - RMK-F2 Drop-In" Mounting Instructions.

IFor Japan:

The document is available online at http://manuals.ts.fujitsu.com

(http://www.fujitsu.com/jp/products/computing/servers/primergy/man

ual/.

The printed poster is contained in the rack mounting kit.

ÊConnect all external cables.

Ê"Connecting the power cord" on page 78

Ê"Switching on the server" on page 80

ÊUpdate your server’s chassis information on the Chassis ID EPROM

integrated into the front panel board. For further information on how to obtain

and use the ChassisId_Prom Tool, see section "Using the Chassis ID Prom

Tool" on page 121.

ÊChange the chassis model setting to "rack server", see section "Specifying

the chassis model" on page 123.

TX1330 M4 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual 441

16 Cabling

16.1 Replacing the intrusion switch cable

16.1.1 Preliminary steps

Ê"Locating the defective server" on page 51

Ê"Shutting down the server" on page 53

Ê"Disconnecting the power cord" on page 54

Ê"Getting access to the component" on page 55

16.1.2 Removing the intrusion switch cable

Figure 313: Removing the intrusion switch cable from the cable clamp

Field Replaceable Unit

(FRU)

Hardware: 10 minutes

Tools: Phillips PH2 / (+) No. 2 screw driver

442 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual TX1330 M4

Cabling

ÊIf applicable, remove the intrusion switch cable from the cable clamp on the

expander board (see circle).

Figure 314: Disconnecting the intrusion switch cable

ÊDisconnect the intrusion switch cable from the system board (see circle).

ÊRemove the intrusion switch cable from the cable guide and the two cable

clamps (see arrows).

TX1330 M4 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual 443

Cabling

Figure 315: Removing the intrusion switch holder (A)

ÊRemove one screw from the intrusion switch holder as shown.

IReplacing the intrusion switch cable is illustrated by the example of

the 2.5-inch HDD model. In case of the 3.5-inch HDD model, the

procedure is identical, although the HDD bay top cover looks slightly

different:

Figure 316: HDD bay top cover in 3.5-inch HDD configurations

444 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual TX1330 M4

Cabling

Figure 317: Removing the intrusion switch cable (B)

ÊSlide back the intrusion switch holder until it disengages from the HDD bay

top cover.

ÊRemove the defective intrusion switch holder.

TX1330 M4 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual 445

Cabling

16.1.3 Installing the intrusion switch cable

IThe rubber bumper is only necessary in case of rack server

configuration.

Figure 318: Attaching a rubber bumper to the front intrusion switch

IIn case of rack server configurations, a rubber bumper needs to be

attached to the front intrusion switch as described below. When working

on a floorstand model, please skip this step.

ÊAttach a rubber bumper (C26192-Y26-C43) to the front intrusion switch as

shown.

446 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual TX1330 M4

Cabling

Figure 319: Installing the intrusion switch cable (A)

ÊPlace the new intrusion switch holder on the HDD bay top cover as shown.

ÊSlide the intrusion switch holder under the front chassis rim as far as it will

go.

Figure 320: Installing the intrusion switch cable (B)

ÊSecure the intrusion switch holder on the HDD bay top cover with one screw.

TX1330 M4 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual 447

Cabling

Figure 321: Connecting the intrusion switch cable

ÊRun the intrusion switch cable through the cable clamps and the cable guide

(see arrows).

ÊConnect the intrusion switch cable to the system board (see circle).

VCAUTION!

Please make sure that the intrusion switch cable is connected to the right

connector "INTR" on the system board, see section "Onboard

connectors" on page 455.

Please do not connect the intrusion switch cable to the connector "FAN2"

near the "INTR".The system may occur "Sudden Power Down" and

"system board defect", if the intrusion switch cable is connected to

"FAN2".

448 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual TX1330 M4

Cabling

Figure 322: Removing the intrusion switch cable from the cable clamp

ÊIf applicable, run the intrusion switch cable trough the cable clamp on the

expander board (see circle).

16.1.4 Concluding steps

Ê"Reassembling" on page 67

Ê"Connecting the power cord" on page 78

Ê"Switching on the server" on page 80

TX1330 M4 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual 449

17 Appendix A

17.1 Mechanical overview

17.1.1 Server front

2.5-inch HDDs/SSDs

Figure 323: Server front 2.5-inch HDDs/SSDs - example TX1330 M4 rack model

Pos. Component

1 2.5-inch HDDs//SSDs / dummy modules

2 ODD / 2.5-inch dummy cover

3ID card

4 8x 2.5-inch HDD extension box / 8x 2.5-inch PCIe SSD extension box

5 Front panel module

450 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual TX1330 M4

Appendix A

3.5-inch HDDs

Figure 324: Server front 3.5-inch HDDs - example TX1330 M4 rack model

Pos. Component

1 3.5-inch HDDs /dummy modules

2ID card

3 4x 3.5-inch HDD extension box

4ODD

5 Front panel module

TX1330 M4 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual 451

Appendix A

3.5-inch HDDs and 2.5-inch PCIe SSDs

Figure 325: Server front 3.5-inch HDD model with PCIe SSD - example TX1330 M4 rack model

Pos. Component

1 3.5-inch HDDs / dummy modules

2 4x 2.5-inch PCIe SSD

3ID card

4 Dummy module

5ODD

6 Front panel module

452 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual TX1330 M4

Appendix A

17.1.2 Server rear

Figure 326: Server rear (example: standard power supply)

Figure 327: Server rear (example: redundant power supply)

1 PSU 3 I/O panel

2 System fan 4 Optional expansion cards

1 PSU 4 I/O panel

2 Fujitsu battery unit (FJBU) 5 Optional expansion cards

3 System fan

TX1330 M4 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual 453

Appendix A

17.1.3 Server interior

Figure 328: Interior (example: 2.5-inch HDD model, standard power supply)

1 Standard PSU 6 Expansion card slots

2 Accessible drive bay 7 Standard system fan

3 Front panel module bay 8 CPU/heat sink

4 HDD/SSD bays 9 Memory modules

5 System board D3673

454 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual TX1330 M4

Appendix A

Figure 329: Interior (example: 2.5-inch HDD model, redundant power supply)

1 PSU bays 6 System board D3673

2 Accessible drive bay 7 Expansion card slots

3 Front panel module bay 8 Redundant system fan

4 HDD/SSD bays 9 CPU/heat sink

5 Expander board 10 Memory modules

TX1330 M4 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual 455

Appendix A

17.2 Connectors and indicators

17.2.1 Connectors and indicators on the system board

17.2.1.1 Onboard connectors

Figure 330: Internal connectors of system board D3673

CPU

Slot 2

Slot 1

Slot 4

Slot 3

RCVR

PWD CLR

external connectors

LAN 1

Management

LAN / USB 2.0

LAN 2 /

USB 3.1 Gen 2

VGA

Shared LAN 1 /

USB 2.0

Serial

Micro

Frontpanel

OOB

USB 2

PWR1

Front USB

USB 1

ROC

FAN4

P30

PC98

PWR MAIN

iRMC

Battery

TPM

IntrSATA ODD

FAN2

FAN3

HDD LED

Intel

i210

Intel

i210

Indicate

SATA

0-3

CSS FAN1

M.2

SSD1

M.2

SSD2

DIMM1B

DIMM2B

DIMM1A

DIMM2A

DIMM1A

DIMM1B

DIMM2B

DIMM2A

456 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual TX1330 M4

Appendix A

No. Print Description

1 PWR MAIN PSU connector

2 USB 1 Connector for Dual microSD 64GB Enterprise

3ROC Connector for Dual microSD 64GB Enterprise

cable

4 PC98 Data cable connector for standard PSU

5 FAN4 Power connector for HDD fan 2 (2.5-inch HDD)

6 MICRO SD iRMC microSD card

7 FRONTPANEL Front panel connector

8OOB OOB (Out-Of-Band) connector for HDD

backplanes

9 P30 PSU connector

10 USB 3.1 FRONT Connector for front USB

11 USB 2 Connector for RDX drive

12 PWR1 Connector for SATA power cable

13 SATA 0-3 SATA HDD connector

14 FAN1 Connector for CPU fan cable

15 M.2 SSD2 M.2 slot 2

16 M.2 SSD1 M.2 slot 1

17 TPM Connector for optional TPM

18 INTR Intrusion switch cable connector (not used)

19 SATA ODD Connector for SATA ODD

20 FAN2 Power connector for HDD fan 1 (2.5-inch HDD) or

HDD fan (3.5-inch HDD)

21 FAN3 (not used)

22 HDD LED Connector for HDD LED cable (e.g. PRAID

EP5x0i)

TX1330 M4 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual 457

Appendix A

17.2.1.2 Onboard indicators and controls

Figure 331: Onboard indicators and Indicate CSS button

Component LEDs

ILEDs A, B and C are visible from the outside on the server rear. All other

LEDs are only visible if the server cover has been opened.

If the server has been powered off (power plugs must be disconnected) it is

possible to indicate the faulty component by pressing the indicate CSS button.

1 Indicate CSS button

CPU

Slot 2

Slot 1

Slot 4

Slot 3

RCVR

PWD CLR

external connectors

LAN 1

Management

LAN / USB 2.0

LAN 2 /

USB 3.1 Gen 2

VGA

Shared LAN 1 /

USB 2.0

Serial

Micro

Frontpanel

OOB

USB 2

PWR1

Front USB

USB 1

ROC

FAN4

P30

PC98

PWR MAIN

iRMC

Battery

TPM

IntrSATA ODD

FAN2

FAN3

HDD LED

Intel

i210

Intel

i210

Indicate

SATA

0-3

CSS FAN1

M.2

SSD1

M.2

SSD2

DIMM1B

DIMM2B

DIMM1A

DIMM2A

DIMM1A

DIMM1B

DIMM2B

DIMM2A

458 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual TX1330 M4

Appendix A

The LEDs have the following meaning:

Indicator Status Description

A -

Identification blue on

The server has been highlighted using ServerView

Operations Manager, iRMC web interface or the ID

button on the front panel for easy identification.

blue

flashing

The server has been highlighted for easy

identification using the iRMC (AVR) with disabled

local VGA output.

B - CSS

(Customer

Self Service)

off No critical event detected (CSS component).

orange on Prefailure event detected (CSS component).

orange

flashing CSS component failure detected.

C - GEL

(Global Error

LED)

off No critical event detected (non CSS component).

orange on Prefailure event detected (non CSS component).

orange

flashing

Non CSS component failure detected.

Possible causes:

– System is out of the specified temperature

range

– Defective sensor

– CPU error

– Error detected by server management

software

F - Controller off Controller okay

orange on Controller failure (PCI card installed on riser card)

G - Memory off memory module running

orange on memory module failure

H - iRMC off iRMC S5 inactive

green

flashing

iRMC S5 okay

I - Fans off system fan running

orange on system fan failure

K - Standby

Power

orange on All standby voltages ok

O - M.2 SSD orange on M.2 SSD faulty

TX1330 M4 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual 459

Appendix A

17.2.2 Server front

17.2.2.1 Indicators on the front panel

Figure 332: Indicators on the front panel

Pos. Label Indicator Status Description

1ID

indicator,

see also

"iRMC-

status

signals" on

page 461

blue on

The server has been highlighted

using ServerView Operations

Manager, iRMC web interface or the

ID button on the front panel for easy

identification

flashing

blue

The server has been highlighted for

easy identification using the iRMC

with disabled local VGA output.

2[CSS] CSS

indicator

off No critical event detected (CSS

component).

orange

Prefailure event detected (CSS

component).

For HDDs/SSDs, see also "HDD

prefailure detection" on page 462.

flashing

orange CSS component failure detected.

460 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual TX1330 M4

Appendix A

Global

Error

indicator,

see also

"iRMC-

status

signals" on

page 461

off No critical event detected (non CSS

component).

orange

Prefailure event detected (non CSS

component).

flashing

orange

Non CSS component failure

detected.

Possible causes:

– System is out of the specified

temperature range

– Defective sensor

– CPU error

– Error detected by server

management software

HDD/SSD

activity

indicator

flashing

green Data access in progress.

5Power-on

indicator

off The server is switched off.

green on

– The server has been switched on

but Power Cycle Delay settings

delay it from turning on for a

specified time.

– The server is switched on and

operating normally.

flashing

green

slowly

The BMC firmware is starting up after

the server has been connected to the

mains.

Pos. Label Indicator Status Description

TX1330 M4 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual 461

Appendix A

iRMC-related status signals

IFor further information, see section "Updating or recovering the BIOS

and the iRMC S5" on page 102.

connected

indicator

green on

– The server is switched off and

connected to the mains (standby

mode).

– The server has been switched on

but Power Cycle Delay settings

delay it from turning on for a

specified time.

IAfter connecting the server to

the mains, it will take about 60

seconds until the server will

enter standby mode and can

be switched on.

off

– The server is switched off and not

connected to the mains.

– The server is switched on and

operating normally.

ID indicator Global error

indicator Description

blue flashing off

A remote connection has been

established. Local VGA output has

been disabled during the remote

session.

blue flashing orange flashing An emergency flash of the iRMC

firmware is in progress.

Pos. Label Indicator Status Description

462 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual TX1330 M4

Appendix A

HDD prefailure detection

Depending on your hardware configuration HDD prefailure detection will be

supported.

The requirements are:

– iRMC S5 Firmware 1.2 or later

– supported OOB RAID system

17.2.2.2 Indicator on the ODD

IODDs may have an indicator or not.

Figure 333: Example: Indicator on the ODD

Pos. Indicator Status Description

1Activity

indicator

off The ODD is inactive.

green on The storage medium is being accessed.

TX1330 M4 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual 463

Appendix A

17.2.2.3 Indicators on the hot-plug HDD/SSD module

Figure 334: Indicators on the hot-plug HDD/SSD module

Pos. Label Indicator Status Description

1Access

indicator

off The HDD/SSD is inactive.

green on The HDD/SSD being accessed

2Error

indicator

off No HDD/SSD error detected.

orange

An HDD/SSD error has been

detected.

Possible causes:

– The drive is defective and

needs replacing.

– A RAID rebuild process has

failed.

– The HDD/SSD module has not

been inserted correctly.

flashing

orange

slowly

HDD/SSD RAID rebuild is in

progress. Data is being restored

after replacing a drive that has

been combined into a RAID array.

464 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual TX1330 M4

Appendix A

17.2.3 Server rear

17.2.3.1 Connectors on the I/O panel

Figure 335: Connectors on the I/O panel

IDepending on the BIOS settings, the shared LAN connector may also be

used as a management LAN connector. For more information, see the

corresponding BIOS Setup Utility reference manual.

ISome of the devices connected require special software (e.g. drivers)

(see documentation for the connected device).

1 Management LAN connector for

iRMC server management function

5 4x USB 2.0 connectors

2 Shared LAN connector (LAN1) 6 Video connector (VGA)

3 Standard LAN connector (LAN2) 7 Serial connector COM1*

4 2x USB 3.1 Gen 2 connectors

* The serial connector can be used as the standard interface or for

communication with iRMC.

햷

햸

햵

햲 햴햳

햶

TX1330 M4 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual 465

Appendix A

17.2.3.2 Indicators on the I/O panel

ID, CSS and Global Error indicators

Figure 336: ID, CSS and Global Error indicators

Pos. Label Indicator Status Description

indicator,

see also

"iRMC-

status

signals" on

page 466

blue on

The server has been highlighted

using ServerView Operations

Manager, iRMC web frontend or

the ID button on the front panel for

easy identification.

blue

flashing

The server has been highlighted

for easy identification using the

iRMC (AVR) with disabled local

VGA output.

[CSS] CSS

indicator

off No critical event detected (CSS

component).

orange

Prefailure event detected (CSS

component).

orange

flashing CSS component failure detected.

466 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual TX1330 M4

Appendix A

INote on CSS and Global Error indicators on the I/O panel:

If CSS and Global Error indicators are located in the same place on the

I/O panel of the server, also check the indicators on the front panel to

determine if a CSS or Global Error event has been detected.

IFor more information on detected errors, see the System Event Log or

use the ServerView Operations Manager or iRMC web interface.

iRMC-related status signals

IFor further information see section "Updating or recovering the BIOS and

the iRMC S5" on page 102.

Global

Error

indicator,

see also

"iRMC-

status

signals" on

page 466

off No critical event detected (non

CSS component).

orange

Prefailure event detected (non

CSS component).

orange

flashing

Non CSS component failure

detected.

Possible causes:

– System is out of the specified

range

– Defective sensor

–CPU error

– Error detected by server

management software

ID indicator Global error

indicator Description

blue flashing off

A remote connection has been

established. Local VGA output has

been disabled during the remote

session.

blue flashing orange flashing An emergency flash of the iRMC

firmware is in progress.

Pos. Label Indicator Status Description

TX1330 M4 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual 467

Appendix A

HDD prefailure detection

Depending on your hardware configuration HDD prefailure detection will be

supported.

The requirements are:

– iRMC S5 Firmware 1.2 or later

– supported OOB RAID system

LAN indicators

Figure 337: LAN indicators

Pos. Indicator Status Description

LAN

link/transfer

indicator

green on A LAN connection has been

established.

off LAN is not connected.

flashing

green LAN data transfer is in progress.

2LAN speed

indicator

yellow on Data traffic at a transfer rate of 1 Gbit/s.

green on Data traffic at a transfer rate of

100 Mbit/s.

off Data traffic at a transfer rate of

10 Mbit/s.

햲 햳

햲 햳 햲 햳

468 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual TX1330 M4

Appendix A

Indication of LAN connection supporting Energy Efficient Ethernet

(EEE mode)

To configure the EEE mode, it is necessary that the on board LAN or an add in

LAN card supports this mode and the connected switch supports this mode as

well.

INote on the onboard LAN controller

The system board is equipped with a Gigabit Ethernet Controller that

supports transfer rates of 10 Mbit/s, 100 Mbit/s and 1 Gbit/s.

The separate management LAN connector is used as a management

interface (iRMC S5) and is prepared for operation with the Remote

Management. Optionally LAN connector 1 can also be used for iRMC S5

server management.

Pos. Indicator Status Description

LAN

link/transfer

indicator

short flashing

green 3x,

then off

A LAN connection has been established

(1 Gbit or 100 Mbit) and EEE mode is

active

2LAN speed

indicator

short flashing

yellow 1x,

then

2 seconds off

green off

Data traffic at a transfer rate of 1 Gbit/s.

short flashing

green 1x,

then

2 seconds off

yellow off

Data traffic at a transfer rate of

100 Mbit/s

Table 5: LAN indicators if EEE mode is active

TX1330 M4 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual 469

Appendix A

17.2.3.3 Indicator on hot-plug PSU

Figure 338: Indicator on hot-plug PSU

Pos. Indicator Status Description

1PSU status

indicator

flashing

green

The server is switched off, but mains

voltage is present (standby mode).

green on The server is switched on and operating

properly.

flashing

orange

An overload has been detected. The

PSU is still running, but failure might be

imminent.

orange on

An PSU failure has been detected.

Possible causes:

– Over/under voltage

– Overheating

– Fan failure

470 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual TX1330 M4

Appendix A

17.2.3.4 Indicator on FJBU

Figure 339: Indicator on FJBU

Pos. Indicator Status Description

1FJBU status

indicator

flashing

green The battery unit is charging.

flashing

green

slowly

The battery unit is discharging.

green on The battery unit is fully charged.

flashing

orange

A battery unit failure has been detected.

Possible causes:

– Capacity failure

– Overheating

orange on A general battery failure has occurred.

TX1330 M4 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual 471

Appendix A

17.2.4 Acoustic indicators

PEI Beep Codes

Pre-EFI Initialization (PEI) - memory Initialization (bootblock)

DXE Beep Codes

Driver Execution Environment (DXE) - main hardware Initialization (POST)

# of

Beep

Description Action

1 Memory not installed ÊCheck if the memory module is installed.

ÊCheck if the memory module is installed

correctly.

2 Recovery started Recovery procedure is initialized by jumper

settings on the system board and announced

with two beep.

This is only an information.

4 Recovery failed ÊRestart the recovery procedure again.

ÊIf the same beep code sounds again,

replace the system board.

# of

Beep

Description Action

1 Invalid password ÊCheck for the correct password and try

again.

Make sure that the caps lock key is

deactivated.

5 No Console Input

devices1 or Output

devices2 are found

Booting will continue.

1 Serial console redirection is considered a

console output device if enabled.

2 Serial console redirection is considered a

console input device if enabled.

This beep code is only an information.

472 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual TX1330 M4

Appendix A

6 Flash update is failed A processing bar and an error message is

displayed on the screen.

This beep code is only an information.

8 Platform PCI resource

requirements cannot

be met

ÊCheck the connection of your expansion

card whether it is installed in a correct

slot.

ÊEnter the BIOS setup menu.

ÊOpen the Advanced menu.

ÊCheck in the PCI Subsystem Settings the

parameter Above 4G Decoding.

This parameter must be set to Enabled.

# of

Beep

Description Action

TX1330 M4 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual 473

Appendix A

17.3 Onboard settings

Figure 340: Onboard settings on system board D3673

Setting Status Description

1PWD CLR /

BIOS-RCVR

Default (place to keep the jumper)

Recovery BIOS enabled

Password Clear enabled

This jumper setting will permanently delete

the current BIOS password and apply

default BIOS settings.

CPU

Slot 2

Slot 1

Slot 4

Slot 3

RCVR

PWD CLR

external connectors

LAN 1

Management

LAN / USB 2.0

LAN 2 /

USB 3.1 Gen 2

VGA

Shared LAN 1 /

USB 2.0

PWR1

iRMC

Battery

TPM

IntrSATA ODD

FAN2

FAN3

HDD LED

Intel

i210

Intel

i210

Indicate

SATA

0-3

CSS FAN1

M.2

SSD1

M.2

SSD2

474 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual TX1330 M4

Appendix A

17.4 Minimum startup configuration

If the server does not start up or other problems occur, it may be necessary to

take the system down to its most basic configuration in order to isolate the

defective component.

The minimum startup configuration consists of the following components and

cables:

Ê"Shutting down the server" on page 53

Ê"Disconnecting the power cord" on page 54

ÊTake the system down to its minimum startup configuration.

Ê"Connecting the power cord" on page 78

ÊConnect a display to the server.

Ê"Switching on the server" on page 80

Field Replaceable Units (FRU)

Component Notes

System board no TPM, expansion cards or M.2 SSD installed

1 CPU with CPU heat sink installed in CPU1

1 memory module installed in DIMM slot 1A

Front panel module

PSU Standard PSU or hot-plug PSU installed in bay

PSU 1

Table 6: Minimum startup configuration - components

Cable Notes

Front panel cable connected to the system board

Power cable

Table 7: Minimum startup configuration - cables

TX1330 M4 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual 475

Appendix A

VCAUTION!

Since the fan module is not included in the minimum startup

configuration, the server must be shut down immediately after the

diagnostic process is complete (POST phase has been passed).

The minimum startup configuration must be used exclusively for

diagnostic purposes by maintenance personnel, never in daily

operation!

476 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual TX1330 M4

Appendix A

TX1330 M4 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual 477

18 Appendix B

The following documents are available in this appendix:

– "Cable plan for FUJITSU Server PRIMERGY TX1330 M4 Reference

Manual"

– "List of Released Adapters incl. Installation sequence and priority"

– "List of all used screws for PRIMERGY Servers - Assembled in Germany

and Japan"

478 Upgrade and Maintenance Manual TX1330 M4

Appendix B

FUJITSU Server PRIMERGY TX1330 M4

Reference Manual

Reference Manual - English

Cable Plan for

November 2018

2TX1330 M4

Contents

Cable Plan

List of used cables 3

List of used cables (continuation) 4

SYS Board Connector D3673 5

BasicCabling3Bpl 6

OOBCabling2Bpl_with_NVMe 7

OOBCabling3Bpl_with_NVMe 8

PowerCablingStdPSU 9

PowerCablingRedPSU2Bpl 10

PowerCablingRedPSU3Bpl 11

PowerCablingRedPSU2BPLwithNVMe 12

PowerCablingRedPSU3BPLwithNVME 13

SATA_1x4_3.5 14

SATA_1x8_2.5 15

SAS_1x4_3.5_CPEP4x0i 16

SAS_1x4_3.5_EP5x0i 17

SAS_2x4_3.5_CPEP4x0i 18

SAS_2x4_3.5_EP5x0i 19

SAS_CPEP4x0i_Exp 20

SAS_EP5x0i_Exp 21

SAS_Exp_3x4_3.5 22

SAS_1x8_2.5_CPEP4x0i 23

SAS_1x8_2.5_EP5x0i 24

SAS_Exp_2x8_2.5 25

SAS_Exp_3x8_2.5 26

EP5x0i_NVMe_ExtensionBox 27

AccDrv_LTO_RiserPCI32 28

Option RiserSlot 29

AccDrv_LTO_RDX 30

Dual_Micro_SD_64GB_Enterprise 31

System FANs Standard 32

System FANs Redundant 33

3TX1330 M4

List of used cables

Cable Plan

Ref.

Name

Number

Routing

Basic

CBL_FRONTPANEL

T26139-Y4015-V301

BasicCabling3Bpl

CBL_FRONT_USB

T26139-Y3999-V503

BasicCabling3Bpl

CBL_MoBo_DVD

T26139-Y3928-V205

BasicCabling3Bpl

CBL_Intruison_Sw

T26139-Y3922-V121

BasicCabling3Bpl

CBL_MoBo_DRV_Pwr

T26139-Y4012-V503

PowerCablingStdPSU;

PowerCablingRedPSU2Bpl;

PowerCablingRedPSU3Bpl;

PowerCablingRedPSU2BPLwithNVME;

PowerCablingRedPSU3BPLwithNVME

C19

CBL_SAS_320

T26139-Y4040-V7

SATA_1x4_3.5; SATA_1x8_2.5;

SAS_1x4_3.5_EP4x0i; SAS_2x4_3.5_EP4x0i;

SAS_1x4_3.5_EP5x0i; SAS_2x4_3.5_EP5x0i;

SAS_EP4x0i_Exp; SAS_EP5x0i_Exp;

SAS_1x8_2.5_EP4x0i; SAS_1x8_2.5_EP5x0i

Red PSU

C10

CBL_PDB_MoBo_Pwr

T26139-Y3952-V611

PowerCablingRedPSU2Bpl;

PowerCablingRedPSU3Bpl;

PowerCablingRedPSU2BPLwithNVME;

PowerCablingRedPSU3BPLwithNVME

C11

CBL_PDB_MoBo_Sig

T26139-Y3956-V2

PowerCablingRedPSU2Bpl;

PowerCablingRedPSU3Bpl;

PowerCablingRedPSU2BPLwithNVME;

PowerCablingRedPSU3BPLwithNVME

C12

CBL_PWR_12P_2x6P

T26139-Y3939-V207

PowerCablingRedPSU2Bpl;

PowerCablingRedPSU3Bpl;

PowerCablingRedPSU2BPLwithNVME;

PowerCablingRedPSU3BPLwithNVME

C13

CBL_PWR_6P_2x4P

T26139-Y4041-V4

PowerCablingRedPSU2BPLwithNVME;

PowerCablingRedPSU3BPLwithNVME

Accessible drives

C21

CBL_SAS_Dev_PwSig_700

T26139-Y4044-V2

AccDrv_LTO_RiserPCI32;

AccDrv_LTO_RDX

C22

CBL_USB30_Dev

T26139-Y4039-A80

AccDrv_LTO_RDX

C23

CBL_OOB_4Bpl

T26139-Y4015-V607

BasicCabling3Bpl;

OOBCabling2Bpl_with_NVMe;

OOBCabling3Bpl_with_NVMe

C24

CBL_I2C_ROC_330

T26139-Y4018-V8

Dual_Micro_SD_64GB_Enterprise

C25

CBL_PWR_4P_2x4P

T26139-Y3959-V307

AccDrv_LTO_RiserPCI32

C26

4TX1330 M4

List of used cables (continuation)

Cable Plan

Ref.

Name

Number

Routing

Basic

C32

CBL_FBU03_550

T26139-Y4031-V102

SAS_1x4_3.5_EP4x0i;

SAS_2x4_3.5_EP4x0i;

SAS_EP4x0i_Exp;

SAS_1x8_2.5_EP4x0i

C33

CBL_BPL_RisCrd_Pwr

T26139-Y4029-V202

Option RiserSlot,

AccDrv_LTO_RiserPCI32

C34

CBL_SAS_Exp_Pwr

T26139-Y3959-V354

SAS_Exp_3x4_3.5;

SAS_Exp_2x8_2.5;

SAS_Exp_3x8_2.5;

C35

CBL_SAS_250

T26139-Y4040-V42

SAS_Exp_3x4_3.5;

SAS_Exp_2x8_2.5;

SAS_Exp_3x8_2.5;

C36

CBL_SAS_470

T26139-Y4040-V8

SAS_Exp_3x4_3.5;

SAS_Exp_3x8_2.5;

C37

CBL_HDD_Signal

If one EP5x0i installed =>

Cable C41

If two EP5x0i installed

=> Cable C42

SAS_1x4_3.5_EP5x0i;

SAS_2x4_3.5_EP5x0i;

SAS_1x8_2.5_EP5x0i

SAS_EP5x0i_Exp;

EP5x0i_NVMe_ExtensionBox;

C38

CBL_FBU345_550

T26139-Y4031-V107

SAS_1x4_3.5_EP5x0i;

SAS_2x4_3.5_EP5x0i;

SAS_1x8_2.5_EP5x0i

SAS_EP5x0i_Exp;

EP5x0i_NVMe_ExtensionBox;

C39

CBL_HOST-BP_430

T26139-Y4050-V12

EP5x0i_NVMe_ExtensionBox;

C40

CBL_HOST-BP_530

T26139-Y4050-V13

EP5x0i_NVMe_ExtensionBox;

C41

CBL_HDD_Signal_220

T26139-Y2361-V103

SAS_1x4_3.5_EP5x0i;

SAS_2x4_3.5_EP5x0i;

SAS_1x8_2.5_EP5x0i

SAS_EP5x0i_Exp;

EP5x0i_NVMe_ExtensionBox

C42

CBL_HDD_SIGL_2X450

T26139-Y2361-V105

SAS_1x4_3.5_EP5x0i;

SAS_2x4_3.5_EP5x0i;

SAS_1x8_2.5_EP5x0i

SAS_EP5x0i_Exp;

EP5x0i_NVMe_ExtensionBox

5TX1330 M4

SYS Board Connector D3673

Cable Plan

USB 3.1 Front

SATA1-4

P30

ROC

OOB

SATA ODD

Internal USB 3.1

FRONTPANEL

Pwr 1

PSU MAIN

PC98

HDD Activity

Intrusion

FAN 2

FAN 1

FAN 3

FAN 4

6TX1330 M4

BasicCabling3Bpl

Cable Plan

USB 3.1 Front

SATA1-4

P30

ROC

OOB

SATA ODD

Internal USB 3.1

FRONTPANEL

Pwr 1

PSU MAIN

PC98

HDD Activity

Intrusion

FAN 2

FAN 1

FAN 3

FAN 4

Intrusion Switch

2.5" / 3.5"

Backplane 1

OOB X11

2.5" / 3.5"

Backplane 2

PWR X40

OOB X11

C23

Extension Box

FrontPanel

USB 3.1 Gen1

2.5" / 3.5"

Backplane 3

PWR X40

OOB X11

ODD

Data

PWR

SlimlinePWR

7TX1330 M4

OOBCabling2Bpl_with_NVMe

Cable Plan

USB 3.1 Front

SATA1-4

P30

ROC

OOB

SATA ODD

Internal USB 3.1

FRONTPANEL

Pwr 1

PSU MAIN

PC98

HDD Activity

Intrusion

FAN 2

FAN 1

FAN 3

FAN 4

2.5" / 3.5"

Backplane 1

OOB X11

Extension Box

FrontPanel

USB 3.1 Gen1

ODD

Data

PWR

SlimlinePWR

4x 2.5" NVMe

Backplane 3

PWR X40

OOB X11

C23

8TX1330 M4

OOBCabling3Bpl_with_NVMe

Cable Plan

USB 3.1 Front

SATA1-4

P30

ROC

OOB

SATA ODD

Internal USB 3.1

FRONTPANEL

Pwr 1

PSU MAIN

PC98

HDD Activity

Intrusion

FAN 2

FAN 1

FAN 3

FAN 4

2.5" / 3.5"

Backplane 1

OOB X11

Extension Box

FrontPanel

USB 3.1 Gen1

ODD

Data

PWR

SlimlinePWR

2.5" / 3.5"

Backplane 2

OOB X11

4x 2.5" NVMe

Backplane 3

PWR X40

OOB X11

C23

9TX1330 M4

PowerCablingStdPSU

Cable Plan

USB 3.1 Front

SATA1-4

P30

ROC

OOB

SATA ODD

Internal USB 3.1

FRONTPANEL

Pwr 1

PSU MAIN

PC98

HDD Activity

Intrusion

FAN 2

FAN 1

FAN 3

FAN 4 2.5" / 3.5"

Backplane 1

OOB X11

Extension Box

FrontPanel

USB 3.1 Gen1

ODD

Data

PWR

SlimlinePWR

Drive Bay 2

Backup Drive

RDX / LTO

PWR

DATA

Drive Bay 3

Backup Drive

RDX / LTO

PWR

DATA

Std PSU

Data

PWR

10TX1330 M4

PowerCablingRedPSU2Bpl

Cable Plan

USB 3.1 Front

SATA1-4

P30

ROC

OOB

SATA ODD

Internal USB 3.1

FRONTPANEL

Pwr 1

PSU MAIN

PC98

HDD Activity

Intrusion

FAN 2

FAN 1

FAN 3

FAN 4

2.5" / 3.5"

Backplane 1

OOB

Extension Box

FrontPanel

USB 3.1 Gen1

ODD

Data

PWR

SlimlinePWR

Drive Bay 2

Backup Drive

RDX / LTO

PWR

DATA

Drive Bay 3

Backup Drive

RDX / LTO

PWR

DATA

Red PSU

Data

PWR

C10

C11

2.5" / 3.5"

Backplane 2

OOB X11

PWR

C12

11TX1330 M4

PowerCablingRedPSU3Bpl

Cable Plan

USB 3.1 Front

SATA1-4

P30

ROC

OOB

SATA ODD

Internal USB 3.1

FRONTPANEL

Pwr 1

PSU MAIN

PC98

HDD Activity

Intrusion

FAN 2

FAN 1

FAN 3

FAN 4

2.5" / 3.5"

Backplane 1

OOB X11

Extension Box

FrontPanel

USB 3.1 Gen1

ODD

Data

PWR

SlimlinePWR

2.5" / 3.5"

Backplane 3

PWR X40

OOB X11

Red PSU

Data

PWR

C10

C11

2.5" / 3.5"

Backplane 2

OOB X11

PWR

C12

12TX1330 M4

PowerCablingRedPSU2BPLwithNVMe

Cable Plan

USB 3.1 Front

SATA1-4

P30

ROC

OOB

SATA ODD

Internal USB 3.1

FRONTPANEL

Pwr 1

PSU MAIN

PC98

HDD Activity

Intrusion

FAN 2

FAN 1

FAN 3

FAN 4

2.5" / 3.5"

Backplane 1

OOB

Extension Box

FrontPanel

USB 3.1 Gen1

ODD

Data

PWR

SlimlinePWR

4x2.5" NVMe

Backplane 3

PWR X40

OOB X11

Red PSU

Data

PWR

C10

C11

PWR

C12

C13

13TX1330 M4

PowerCablingRedPSU3BPLwithNVME

Cable Plan

USB 3.1 Front

SATA1-4

P30

ROC

OOB

SATA ODD

Internal USB 3.1

FRONTPANEL

Pwr 1

PSU MAIN

PC98

HDD Activity

Intrusion

FAN 2

FAN 1

FAN 3

FAN 4

2.5" / 3.5"

Backplane 1

OOB X11

Extension Box

FrontPanel

USB 3.1 Gen1

ODD

Data

PWR

SlimlinePWR

4x2.5" NVMe

Backplane 3

PWR X40

OOB X11

Red PSU

Data

PWR

C10

C11

2.5" / 3.5"

Backplane 2

OOB X11

PWR

C12

C13

14TX1330 M4

SATA_1x4_3.5

Cable Plan

USB 3.1 Front

SATA1-4

P30

ROC

OOB

SATA ODD

Internal USB 3.1

FRONTPANEL

Pwr 1

PSU MAIN

PC98

HDD Activity

Intrusion

FAN 2

FAN 1

FAN 3

FAN 4

4x3.5"

Backplane 1

DATA X9

C19

15TX1330 M4

SATA_1x8_2.5

Cable Plan

USB 3.1 Front

SATA1-4

P30

ROC

OOB

SATA ODD

Internal USB 3.1

FRONTPANEL

Pwr 1

PSU MAIN

PC98

HDD Activity

Intrusion

FAN 2

FAN 1

FAN 3

FAN 4

8x2.5"

Backplane 1

Data x10

Data X9

C19

16TX1330 M4

SAS_1x4_3.5_CPEP4x0i

Cable Plan

System Board

D3673

SAS RAID

CP/EP4x0i

MLC2

MLC1

TFM

4x3.5"

Backplane 1

Data X9

FBU1

C32

C19

17TX1330 M4

SAS_1x4_3.5_EP5x0i

Cable Plan

System Board

EP5x0i

J10DAC

HDD Activity

C37

SCAP

C19

FBU1

C38

If Installed

1x EP5x0i =>

C37 = T26139-Y2361-V103

2x EP5x0i =>

C37 = T26139-Y2361-V105

4x3.5"

Backplane 1

Data X9

18TX1330 M4

SAS_2x4_3.5_CPEP4x0i

Cable Plan

System Board

D3673

SAS RAID

CP/EP4x0i

MLC2

MLC1

TFM

4x3.5"

Backplane 1

Data X9

4x3.5"

Backplane 2

Data X9

FBU1

C32

C19

19TX1330 M4

SAS_2x4_3.5_EP5x0i

Cable Plan

System Board

EP5x0i

J10DAC

HDD Activity

C37

SCAP

C19

FBU1

C38

If Installed

1x EP5x0i =>

C37 = T26139-Y2361-V103

2x EP5x0i =>

C37 = T26139-Y2361-V105

4x3.5"

Backplane 1

Data X9

4x3.5"

Backplane 2

Data X9

20TX1330 M4

SAS_CPEP4x0i_Exp

Cable Plan

System Board

D3673

SAS RAID

CP/EP4x0i

MLC2

MLC1

TFM

SAS 3.0

Expander

X15

X14

X13

X12

X11

X10

C19

FBU1

C32

21TX1330 M4

SAS_EP5x0i_Exp

Cable Plan

System Board

EP5x0i

J10DAC

HDD Activity

C37

SCAP

SAS 3.0

Expander

X15

X14

X13

X12

X11

X10

C19

FBU1

C38

If Installed

1x EP5x0i =>

C37 = T26139-Y2361-V103

2x EP5x0i =>

C37 = T26139-Y2361-V105

22TX1330 M4

SAS_Exp_3x4_3.5

Cable Plan

SAS 3.0

Expander

X15

X14

X13

X12

X11

X10

Extension Box

FrontPanel

USB 3.1 Gen1

4x3.5"

Backplane 3

Data X9

4x3.5"

Backplane 1

4x3.5"

Backplane 2

Data X9

C35

C36

C34

23TX1330 M4

SAS_1x8_2.5_CPEP4x0i

Cable Plan

System Board

D3673

SAS RAID

CP/EP4x0i

MLC2

MLC1

TFM FBU1

C32

C19

C19 8x2.5"

Backplane 1

Data x10

Data X9

24TX1330 M4

SAS_1x8_2.5_EP5x0i

Cable Plan

System Board

EP5x0i

J10DAC

HDD Activity

C37

SCAP

C19

FBU1

C38

If Installed

1x EP5x0i =>

C37 = T26139-Y2361-V103

2x EP5x0i =>

C37 = T26139-Y2361-V105

8x2.5"

Backplane 1

Data x10

Data X9

25TX1330 M4

SAS_Exp_2x8_2.5

Cable Plan

SAS 3.0

Expander

X15

X14

X13

X12

X11

X10

8x2.5"

Backplane 1

Pwr X17

8x2.5"

Backplane 2

C35

C34

C35

26TX1330 M4

SAS_Exp_3x8_2.5

Cable Plan

SAS 3.0

Expander

X15

X14

X13

X12

X11

X10

Extension Box

FrontPanel

USB 3.1 Gen1

C35

C34

8x2.5"

Backplane 1

Pwr X17

8x2.5"

Backplane 2

C35

8x2.5"

Backplane 3

C36

27TX1330 M4

EP5x0i_NVMe_ExtensionBox

Cable Plan

System Board

EP5x0i

J10DAC

Extension Box

4x2.5" NVMe

Extension Box

P2_X3

P3_X4

P0_X1

P1_X2

HDD Activity

C37

SCAP

FBU2

C38

FrontPanel

USB 3.1 Gen1

If Installed

1x EP5x0i =>

C37 = T26139-Y2361-V103

2x EP5x0i =>

C37 = T26139-Y2361-V105

C40

C39

28TX1330 M4

AccDrv_LTO_RiserPCI32

Cable Plan

System Board

D3673

SAS RAID

CP4x0i

MLC2

MLC1

TFM

PCIE x4

Slot 1

Extension Box

FrontPanel

USB 3.1 Gen1

ODD

Data

PWR

SlimlinePWR

RDX

PWR

DATA

LTO

DATA

PWR

C21

2.5" / 3.5"

Backplane 1

OOB X11

C33 C25

C21

29TX1330 M4

Option RiserSlot

Cable Plan

System Board

D3673

2.5" / 3.5"

Backplane 1

OOB X11

C33

PCIE x4

Slot 1

30TX1330 M4

AccDrv_LTO_RDX

Cable Plan

System Board

D3673

SAS RAID

CP4x0i

MLC2

MLC1

TFM

Extension Box

FrontPanel

USB 3.1 Gen1

ODD

Data

PWR

SlimlinePWR

RDX

PWR

DATA

LTO

DATA

PWR

2.5" / 3.5"

Backplane 1

OOB X11

C21

Internal USB 3.1

C22

31TX1330 M4

Dual_Micro_SD_64GB_Enterprise

Cable Plan

DUAL_MICRO_SD_

64GB_Enterprise

USB

I2C

C24

USB 3.1 Front

SATA1-4

P30

ROC

OOB

SATA ODD

Internal USB 3.1

FRONTPANEL

Pwr 1

PSU MAIN

PC98

HDD Activity

Intrusion

FAN 2

FAN 1

FAN 3

FAN 4

32TX1330 M4

System FANs Standard

Cable Plan

USB 3.1 Front

SATA1-4

P30

ROC

OOB

SATA ODD

Internal USB 3.1

FRONTPANEL

Pwr 1

PSU MAIN

PC98

HDD Activity

Intrusion

FAN 2

FAN 1

FAN 3

FAN 4

FAN1

Rear side

33TX1330 M4

System FANs Redundant

Cable Plan

USB 3.1 Front

SATA1-4

P30

ROC

OOB

SATA ODD

Internal USB 3.1

FRONTPANEL

Pwr 1

PSU MAIN

PC98

HDD Activity

Intrusion

FAN 2

FAN 1

FAN 3

FAN 4

FAN2

Inside

FAN1

Rear side

Adapter

Class

Table of Contents

Fujitsu TX1330 M4 User Manual

Related Manuals